cm7&8_sonet_sdh_revd
DESCRIPTION
SDHTRANSCRIPT
CM7/8
SONET/SDH
155-Mbps
Digital Microwave Radio
System User’s Manual
Site____________________Part Number 8831607-00Revision DIssued: 5/04
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 11/9/03 Page iii
CM7/8 SONET/SDH Manual – Revision History
Section Changed Pages Changed
Revision A -- Initial Release
Revision B – 8/6/03
Front Matter Cover, history, table of contents, index
Chapter 1, Introduction 1-2, 1-8 to 1-10
Chapter 2, Principles of Operation 2-20, 2-21, 2-22, 2-23, 2-27, 2-28
Chapter 3, Module Descriptions 3-1, 3-2
Section 3-1, Radio Cabinet all (10 pages)
Section 3-2, RF Distribution 3-2-6, 3-2-10
Section 3-11, SYNDES 3-11-1, 3-11-2, 3-11-5
Chapter 4, Installation 4-1, 4-2, 4-6, 4-11
Chapter 5, Alignment 5-10, 5-11
Chapter 6, Maintenance 6-4, 6-18, 6-29, 6-32
Appendix A, T/I Curves A-3, A-4
Appendix B, QuikLink Screens B-27, B-30
Appendix D, Alarm Codes D-4
Appendix E, Frequency Switch Settings E-1, E-5 to E-8
Appendix G, SNMP Option added all
Revision C 11/9/03
Front Matter cover, revision history, TOC, index
Chapter 3, Module Descriptions 3-7-5, 3-7-6, 3-12-4, 3-12-5
Appendix C, Configuration Tables C-1 to C-12
Revision D 5/12/05
Front Matter cover, revision history, TOC
Chapter 3, Module Descriptions 3-1, 3-2, 3-1-1 to 3-1-14 (all); 3-14-1 to 3-14-8 (all)
Chapter 4, Installation 4-6 to 4-12
Appendix C, Configuration Tables all
Index all
Page iv 11/9/03 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
Commercial Warranty
Microwave Networks, Inc. (MNI) manufactured products are warranted to be free from defect in material and workmanship for a period of two (2) years from date of shipment. In the event of a defect during the warranty period, Buyer will return item to the MNI depot repair facility for repair or replacement. Repair at MNI's option may include the replacement of parts or equipment, and all replaced parts or equipment shall be the property of MNI. Parts or equipment replaced dur-ing the warranty period are warranted for the remainder of the original applicable warranty period or ninety (90) days, whichever is greater. This express warranty is extended by MNI to the origi-nal Buyer for commercial, industrial or governmental use. Such action on the part of MNI shall be the full extent of MNI's liability and Buyer's exclusive remedy.
This warranty extends only to products manufactured by MNI, and it is expressly conditioned upon the equipment having been installed in accordance with the installation practices accepted by the telecommunications industry, the standard installation and configuration practices recom-mended by MNI, and the equipment having been maintained in accordance with MNI recom-mended standard maintenance practices. Frequency sensitive components, towers, vidicon tubes, test equipment, batteries, and other manufacturers' products are excluded, but carry their own sep-arate limited warranties as authorized by the individual manufacturers.
This warranty shall automatically terminate if the product is used in other than its normal and cus-tomary manner, has been subject to misuse, accident, neglect or damage, has improper alterations or repairs made to it, or if nonconforming parts are used in the product, unless done by a service facility authorized by MNI to perform warranty service. An authorization to return products to MNI under this warranty must be obtained from the MNI Customer Care Center prior to making shipment to MNI's repair center. All returns shall be shipped freight prepaid and collect shipments will not be accepted. MNI will prepay return freight charges on repaired and replaced products found to be defective. There will be a minimum charge for each warranty module replacement requested as an emergency exchange.
Because each radio system is unique, MNI disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of a system as a whole under this warranty except by a separate written agreement signed by an officer of MNI. MNI's total liability is limited to the total price of the products sold. Buyer's sole remedy is to request MNI, at MNI's option, to either refund the purchase price, repair or replace product(s) that are not as warranted. No action shall be brought for any breach of this contract more than one (1) year after the accrual of such cause of action except for money due upon open account.
This MNI warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties, either expressed or implied, which are specifically excluded, including warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. In no event shall MNI be liable for any incidental or consequential damages arising from this war-ranty.
Where you can find us
Company Headquarters:
Microwave Networks4000 GreenbriarStafford, TX 77477USATel 281.263.6500Fax 281.263.6400Toll free in US 1.888.225.6429
Internet: www.microwavenetworks.com
24-Hour Customer Service Hotline
Tel 281.263.6501Toll free in US 1.888.225.4762
International
LondonTel 44.1628.788383Fax 44.1628.788424
CM7/8 SONET System User’s Manual Page vii
Using This Manual
1.0 IntroductionWelcome to the CM7/8 SONET System User’s Manual. This section is provided to help guide you through the manual.
2.0 Manual OrganizationThis manual is organized into the following sections.
Using This Manual provides a quick guide for locating information in this manual.
The Table of Contents lists all chapters, sections, headings, and subheadings in the manual, as well as where to find them.
Chapter 1 provides General Information on the radio, including an equipment description and system specifications.
Chapter 2 outlines Principles of Operation, including a description of signal flow through the radio, equipment descriptions and configurations, switching and loopback information, and detailed instructions on how to use the radio features.
Chapter 3 is divided into sections that give Module Descriptions, including module block dia-grams and other module-specific information, such as principles of operation, front panel descriptions, and jumper and DIP switch settings.
Chapter 4, Equipment Installation, gives step-by-step instructions on how to unpack, config-ure, and install the radio.
Chapter 5, Alignment, describes radio alignment and tests.
Chapter 6 discusses Maintenance procedures, and provides sections on troubleshooting and module replacement procedures.
Appendix A provides T/I Curves for the CM7/8 SONET radio.
Appendix B shows all Screens that appear on the remote VT-100 Display Terminal, accompa-nied by screen descriptions.
Appendix C contains all of the Configuration Tables necessary to prepare the radio for oper-ation.
Appendix D lists radio Alarm Codes.
Appendix E describes procedure to set LO oscillator frequency
Appendix F, Glossary describes common terms and acronyms used in this manual.
Appendix G, SNMP Option, describes the equipment, installation, and operation of the SNMP radio management system.
The Index is designed to aid in rapid location of information in the manual.
Page viii CM7/8 SONET System User’s Manual
Using This Manual
3.0 CM7/8 SONET Radio Quick ReferenceThe following quick reference table identifies sections in the manual which will help you to per-form specific tasks on the radio.
Quick Reference Table
Description Chapter
How to install the radio 4
How to turn up the radio 5
How to maintain the radio 6
How to troubleshoot the radio 6
How to repair the radio 6
How to spare the radio TXU/RXU 6
How to switch TX 2
How to switch RX 2
How to initiate loopbacks 2
How to enable or disable APC 2
How to check or change frequency 2
How to change protection configuration 2
How to add service channel 2
How to add orderwire 2
How to add ATDE or WTU 2
How to check for alarms 2
How to check the alarm log 2
How to check performance values 2
How to establish RF loopback 6
How to check receive threshold 5
How to check Tx fade margin 5
How to add NMU 2
How to install the SNMP option App. G
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page ix
Chapter 1–General Information1.0. Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 1-12.0. CM7/8 Protection Features................................................................................................................. 1-2
2.1. Protection..................................................................................................................................... 1-23.0. SONET Optical Data Conversion ...................................................................................................... 1-44.0. Channel Capacity ............................................................................................................................... 1-45.0. FCC Compliance ................................................................................................................................ 1-46.0. Equipment Description....................................................................................................................... 1-57.0. Transmission Engineering.................................................................................................................. 1-7
7.1. RF Channel Separation................................................................................................................ 1-77.2. Radio System Gain ...................................................................................................................... 1-77.3. Interference Considerations......................................................................................................... 1-7
8.0. Specifications ..................................................................................................................................... 1-78.1. Transmitter Power ....................................................................................................................... 1-78.2. Receiver Sensitivity..................................................................................................................... 1-7
Chapter 2–Principles of Operation1.0. Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 2-1
1.1. Transmitting ................................................................................................................................ 2-11.2. Receiving..................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.0. RF Modules ........................................................................................................................................ 2-32.1. Branching Waveguide ................................................................................................................. 2-32.2. Transmitter Unit (TXU) .............................................................................................................. 2-42.3. RF Power Supply Unit (RF PSU)................................................................................................ 2-4
3.0. Signal Processing ............................................................................................................................... 2-53.1. Access Panel................................................................................................................................ 2-53.2. Signal Processing Modules.......................................................................................................... 2-53.3. ATDE and Dispersive Fade Margin ............................................................................................ 2-6
4.0. Equipment Configurations ................................................................................................................. 2-74.1. Protection..................................................................................................................................... 2-74.2. Repeater Arrangements ............................................................................................................. 2-10
5.0. Protection Switching ........................................................................................................................ 2-115.1. Monitored Hot Standby Tx/Rx Switching (HH) ....................................................................... 2-115.2. Automatic Switching vs. Manual Switching ............................................................................. 2-12
5.2.1. What Happens During an A SYNDES Module Failure .................................................. 2-125.3. Monitored Hot-Standby Transmit Switching ............................................................................ 2-13
5.3.1. Transmitter Switch Levels............................................................................................... 2-135.4. Transmitter SYNDES-MUX Switch ......................................................................................... 2-145.5. Transmitter TXU-MOD Switch ................................................................................................ 2-145.6. Transmitter SCU Switch .......................................................................................................... 2-145.7. Transmit WTU Switch ............................................................................................................. 2-145.8. Performing Manual Switchovers.............................................................................................. 2-14
5.8.1. Performing a Manual SYNDES-MUX Switchover........................................................ 2-155.8.2. Performing a Manual TXU-MOD Switchover ............................................................... 2-155.8.3. Performing a Manual RXU-DEMOD Switchover ......................................................... 2-15
Table of Contents
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page x
5.8.4. Performing a Manual SCU Switchover .......................................................................... 2-165.8.5. Performing the WTU Switch Manually.......................................................................... 2-16
5.9. Hot-Standby Protected Receive Switching Levels ................................................................... 2-175.9.1. Receiver RXU-DEMOD Switch..................................................................................... 2-175.9.2. Receiver SYNDES-MUX Switch Level......................................................................... 2-185.9.3. Receiver SCU Switch ..................................................................................................... 2-185.9.4. Receive WTU Switch ...................................................................................................... 2-18
5.10. Monitored Hot-Standby Transmitter, Space Diversity Receiver Switching (HS).................. 2-186.0. Loopbacks......................................................................................................................................... 2-19
6.1. Traffic Requirements ................................................................................................................. 2-206.2. How to Perform a Loopback ..................................................................................................... 2-206.3. RF Local Loopback ................................................................................................................... 2-20
6.3.1. Initiating the RF Local Loopback.................................................................................... 2-216.4. IF Local Loopback..................................................................................................................... 2-226.5. MUX Local Loopback............................................................................................................... 2-246.6. SYNDES Loopback................................................................................................................... 2-24
6.6.1. Local Loopback ............................................................................................................... 2-246.7. Remote Loopback...................................................................................................................... 2-246.8. Service Channel Unit Loopback................................................................................................ 2-25
6.8.1. Local Loopback ............................................................................................................... 2-256.8.2. Remote Loopback ............................................................................................................ 2-25
6.9. WTU Loopback ......................................................................................................................... 2-256.9.1. Local Loopback ............................................................................................................... 2-256.9.2. Remote Loopback ............................................................................................................ 2-26
7.0. Automatic Power Control................................................................................................................. 2-277.1. Manually Activating the Automatic Power Control for Loopback .......................................... 2-27
Chapter 3–Module Descriptions1.0. Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 3-1
Section 3-1–Radio Cabinet
1.0. Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 3-1-12.0. Access Panel .................................................................................................................................... 3-1-1
2.1. Principles of Operation ............................................................................................................. 3-1-42.2. Access Panel Features .............................................................................................................. 3-1-5
3.0. SP Shelf Backplane ....................................................................................................................... 3-1-103.1. Jumpers ................................................................................................................................... 3-1-10
4.0. RF Shelf Backplane....................................................................................................................... 3-1-115.0. Equipment Rack ............................................................................................................................ 3-1-12
5.1. Installing Auxiliary Equipment in the Rack ........................................................................... 3-1-126.0. Installation Kits ............................................................................................................................. 3-1-12
Section 3-2–RF Distribution
1.0. General Information ........................................................................................................................ 3-2-12.0. Description of Function ................................................................................................................... 3-2-2
2.1. Transmit Section....................................................................................................................... 3-2-52.2. Receive Section ........................................................................................................................ 3-2-5
3.0. User Operation................................................................................................................................. 3-2-63.1. Front Panel Functions (HH) ..................................................................................................... 3-2-6
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page xi
3.2. Front Panel Functions (HS) ...................................................................................................... 3-2-73.3. Front Panel Functions (NS) ...................................................................................................... 3-2-83.4. Front Panel Functions (FF)....................................................................................................... 3-2-93.5. Front Panel Functions (NN) ................................................................................................... 3-2-10
Section 3-3–Transmitter Unit (TXU)
1.0. Physical Description........................................................................................................................ 3-3-12.0. Functional Description .................................................................................................................... 3-3-23.0. Front Panel Functions...................................................................................................................... 3-3-24.0. Setting TXU Boards ........................................................................................................................ 3-3-4
4.1. TXU Alarm/Control Board MLN8146 and MLN8147 ............................................................ 3-3-44.2. TX IF BPF/LO Board Jumpers................................................................................................. 3-3-5
Section 3-4–Receiver Unit (RXU)
1.0. General Information ........................................................................................................................ 3-4-12.0. Description of Function ................................................................................................................... 3-4-23.0. Front Panel Functions...................................................................................................................... 3-4-2
3.1. RXU Control Board MLN7905A Jumpers............................................................................... 3-4-4
Section 3-5–RF Power Supply Unit (RF PSU)
1.0. General Information ........................................................................................................................ 3-5-12.0. Functional Description .................................................................................................................... 3-5-23.0. RF PSU Board Features................................................................................................................... 3-5-3
Section 3-6–SP Power Supply Unit (SP PSU)
1.0. General Information ........................................................................................................................ 3-6-12.0. Functional Description .................................................................................................................... 3-6-23.0. Front Panel Functions...................................................................................................................... 3-6-3
Section 3-7–Alarm and Control Unit
1.0. Physical Description........................................................................................................................ 3-7-12.0. Functional Description .................................................................................................................... 3-7-23.0. Front Panel Functions...................................................................................................................... 3-7-4
3.1. Jumpers and Switches............................................................................................................... 3-7-4
Section 3-8–Modulator (MOD)
1.0. General Information ........................................................................................................................ 3-8-12.0. Description ...................................................................................................................................... 3-8-1
2.1. Physical..................................................................................................................................... 3-8-12.2. Functional ................................................................................................................................. 3-8-2
3.0. Front Access Functions ................................................................................................................... 3-8-34.0. 8000514 MOD Jumpers (SONET/SDH)......................................................................................... 3-8-4
Section 3-9–Demodulator (DEMOD)
1.0. General Information ........................................................................................................................ 3-9-12.0. Functional Description .................................................................................................................... 3-9-23.0. Front Panel Functions...................................................................................................................... 3-9-4
3.1. 8000515 DEMOD Jumper (SONET/SDH) .............................................................................. 3-9-5
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page xii
Section 3-10–Multiplexer (MUX)
1.0. General Information ...................................................................................................................... 3-10-12.0. Functional Description .................................................................................................................. 3-10-23.0. Front Panel Functions......................................................................................................................3-10-34.0. 8000513 MUX Jumpers (SONET/SDH)....................................................................................... 3-10-4
Section 3-11–Synchronizer/Desynchronizer (SYNDES)
1.0. General Information ...................................................................................................................... 3-11-12.0. Functional Description .................................................................................................................. 3-11-2
2.1. Transmit.................................................................................................................................. 3-11-22.2. Receive ................................................................................................................................... 3-11-2
3.0. SYNDES Front Access.................................................................................................................. 3-11-44.0. SYNDES Jumpers ......................................................................................................................... 3-11-5
Section 3-12–Service Channel Unit (SCU)
1.0. General Information ...................................................................................................................... 3-12-12.0. Functional Description .................................................................................................................. 3-12-23.0. Front Panel Functions.................................................................................................................... 3-12-34.0. Configuring the SCU..................................................................................................................... 3-12-4
Section 3-13–Orderwire Unit (OWU)
1.0. General Information ...................................................................................................................... 3-13-12.0. Description of Function ................................................................................................................. 3-13-23.0. Front Panel Functions.................................................................................................................... 3-13-44.0. Handset Functions ......................................................................................................................... 3-13-4
4.1. Handset Functions .................................................................................................................. 3-13-44.2. Jumpers and Switches............................................................................................................. 3-13-5
5.0. Orderwire, Service Channel, and Bridge Configuration .................................................................3-13-7
Section 3-14–Wayside Traffic Unit (WTU)
1.0. General Information ...................................................................................................................... 3-14-12.0. Description of Function ................................................................................................................. 3-14-23.0. Front Panel Features ...................................................................................................................... 3-14-44.0. MLN7330 Jumpers and Configuration Switch.............................................................................. 3-14-45.0. 8000608-00 Configuration Switch ................................................................................................ 3-14-6
Section 3-15–Network Management Unit (NMU)
1.0. General Information ...................................................................................................................... 3-15-12.0. Description of Function ................................................................................................................. 3-15-1
2.1. Jumpers ................................................................................................................................... 3-15-32.2. DIP Switches .......................................................................................................................... 3-15-4
Chapter 4–Equipment Installation1.0. Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 4-12.0. Preparing for Installation.................................................................................................................... 4-1
2.1. Location Considerations .............................................................................................................. 4-12.2. Unpacking the Equipment ........................................................................................................... 4-2
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page xiii
3.0. Rack Installation................................................................................................................................. 4-23.1. Rack Ground Bar ......................................................................................................................... 4-53.2. Power Cable Considerations........................................................................................................ 4-5
4.0. Access Panels .................................................................................................................................... 4-64.1. General Description ..................................................................................................................... 4-64.2. Access Panel Connections ........................................................................................................... 4-74.3. Network Management Port Connections................................................................................... 4-11
5.0. Connecting Performance Monitoring Devices ................................................................................. 4-135.1. Connecting the MLN8003 Local Maintenance Terminal.......................................................... 4-135.2. Configuring the LMT for VT-100 Operation ............................................................................ 4-13
5.2.1. Before Beginning............................................................................................................. 4-135.2.2. Configuring the LMT ...................................................................................................... 4-13
5.3. Connecting a Computer or Terminal ......................................................................................... 4-145.3.1. Verifying Operation......................................................................................................... 4-18
5.4. Connecting a Modem................................................................................................................. 4-195.5. Connection Diagrams ................................................................................................................ 4-21
6.0. Antenna Connections....................................................................................................................... 4-216.1. Installing the Waveguide ........................................................................................................... 4-22
Chapter 5–Alignment1.0. Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 5-12.0. Inspection ........................................................................................................................................... 5-1
2.1. Visual Inspection ......................................................................................................................... 5-12.2. IF Cabling .................................................................................................................................... 5-82.3. RF Cables .................................................................................................................................... 5-8
3.0. Verification......................................................................................................................................... 5-83.1. Preliminary Checks...................................................................................................................... 5-93.2. Jumper and DIP Switch Settings ................................................................................................. 5-93.3. DC Voltages ................................................................................................................................ 5-93.4. System Configuration .................................................................................................................. 5-93.5. SP Verification .......................................................................................................................... 5-10
4.0. Alignment ......................................................................................................................................... 5-104.1. Modulator Frequency (IF) ......................................................................................................... 5-104.2. Local Oscillator Frequency ....................................................................................................... 5-104.3. Transmitter Carrier Frequency/Receiver LO Frequency........................................................... 5-104.4. Transmitter Output Power ......................................................................................................... 5-114.5. Access Panel and Module Fail LEDs ........................................................................................ 5-114.6. End-to-End 155-Mbit/s Data Check .......................................................................................... 5-114.7. End-to-End Service Channel Check .......................................................................................... 5-134.8. Receive Threshold Check.......................................................................................................... 5-15
4.8.1. Remote Terminal Setup ................................................................................................... 5-154.8.2. Local Terminal Setup ...................................................................................................... 5-15
4.9. RF Tx Fade Margin Check ........................................................................................................ 5-174.9.1. Remote Terminal Setup ................................................................................................... 5-174.9.2. Local Terminal Setup ...................................................................................................... 5-17
4.10. Receive Signal Level/AGC Recording.................................................................................... 5-194.11. Commissioning Radio Link..................................................................................................... 5-19
5.0. Recommended Test Equipment........................................................................................................ 5-206.0. Test Tables........................................................................................................................................ 5-22
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page xiv
Chapter 6–Maintenance1.0. Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 6-1
1.1. Customer Service......................................................................................................................... 6-11.1.1. Repair and Exchange Services........................................................................................... 6-11.1.2. Technical Support Services ............................................................................................... 6-2
1.2. Recommended Test Equipment................................................................................................... 6-21.3. Description of the Local Maintenance Terminal ......................................................................... 6-3
2.0. Maintenance ....................................................................................................................................... 6-42.1. Annual Transmitter Checks ......................................................................................................... 6-42.2. DC Voltages ................................................................................................................................ 6-4
3.0. Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................................. 6-53.1. Check Alarms Using Alarm LEDs .............................................................................................. 6-5
3.1.1. Check the ACU.................................................................................................................. 6-63.2. Check Alarms Using the Local Maintenance Terminal .............................................................. 6-6
3.2.1. Checking the Alarm Log ................................................................................................... 6-73.2.2. Checking Performance Values........................................................................................... 6-7
3.3. Check LBO and DS1 Line Coding .............................................................................................. 6-84.0. Upgrades and Changes ....................................................................................................................... 6-8
4.1. Changing Local Oscillator Frequency......................................................................................... 6-84.1.1. Checking LO Frequency.................................................................................................... 6-94.1.2. Changing LO Frequency.................................................................................................... 6-9
4.2. Changing Protection Configuration............................................................................................. 6-94.3. Adding Service Channel, Orderwire, or WTU .......................................................................... 6-104.4. Adding the Optional Network Management Unit ..................................................................... 6-10
5.0. Replacing Modules ........................................................................................................................... 6-115.1. Replacing TXU and RXU.......................................................................................................... 6-11
5.1.1. TXU ................................................................................................................................. 6-115.1.2. RXU................................................................................................................................. 6-12
5.2. Replacing All Other Modules.................................................................................................... 6-136.0. Troubleshooting Charts .................................................................................................................... 6-14
Site Engineering–
Appendix A–T/I Curves1.0. Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... A-12.0. T/I Ratio............................................................................................................................................. A-1
Appendix B–QuikLink ScreensIntroduction .............................................................................................................................................. B-1Verifying the ACU Software Version ...................................................................................................... B-1
Software Revision.............................................................................................................................. B-1Screen Layout........................................................................................................................................... B-2
Selecting Screens ............................................................................................................................... B-2Aborting Changes .............................................................................................................................. B-2Navigating Screens ............................................................................................................................ B-2
Monitoring Radio Functions..................................................................................................................... B-4Index of Screens ....................................................................................................................................... B-4Screen Menu Flowcharts .......................................................................................................................... B-7Local Maintenance Screens ...................................................................................................................... B-9
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page xv
Appendix C–Configuration Tables1.0. Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... C-1
Appendix D–Alarm Codes1.0. Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... D-1
Appendix E–Setting Frequency SwitchesIntroduction ............................................................................................................................................... E-1CM7 Setting Switches ............................................................................................................................... E-1CM8 Switch Settings................................................................................................................................. E-5
Appendix F–Glossary
Appendix G–CM SNMPIntroduction .............................................................................................................................................. G-1What is CM SNMP?................................................................................................................................. G-1SNMP Option Components ...................................................................................................................... G-2
The SNMP Front Panel...................................................................................................................... G-2The SNMP NMU (Network Management Unit) ............................................................................... G-3
Layout of a CM SNMP Network.............................................................................................................. G-4Installing Hardware .................................................................................................................................. G-5
Connecting Cables ............................................................................................................................. G-6Ethernet (10BaseT) Port ............................................................................................................. G-6SCE Port ..................................................................................................................................... G-6 Local Access Port ...................................................................................................................... G-7
Installing Software.................................................................................................................................... G-8Install ................................................................................................................................................. G-8Configure ........................................................................................................................................... G-8
System Operation ................................................................................................................................... G-10SNMP Network Manager ................................................................................................................ G-10
Microwave Networks MIB ....................................................................................................... G-10MIB Tables ............................................................................................................................... G-10Performance Table.................................................................................................................... G-11Configuration Table.................................................................................................................. G-12Fault Manager Table................................................................................................................. G-12CM SNMP Traps ...................................................................................................................... G-13Diagnostics ............................................................................................................................... G-13
Telnet ............................................................................................................................................... G-14Telnet Commands ..................................................................................................................... G-15Telnet Command Usage ........................................................................................................... G-16
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page xvi
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page xvii
Chapter 1–General InformationFigure 1-1. CM7/8 SONET SDH Digital Microwave Radio .................................................................. 1-1Figure 1-2. CM7/8 155-Mbps Hot Standby System Block Diagram ...................................................... 1-3Figure 1-3. CM7/8 Digital Microwave Radio in Hot-Standby Configuration ........................................ 1-5
Chapter 2–Principles of OperationFigure 2-1. RF Shelf; Hot-Standby Tx/Rx and Hot-Standby Tx/Space Diversity Rx............................. 2-3Figure 2-2. Signal Processing Shelf in Protected Configuration ............................................................. 2-6Figure 2-3. Hot Standby Tx/Rx (HH) Signal Flow.................................................................................. 2-7Figure 2-4. Hot-Standby Tx, Space Diversity Rx (HS) Signal Flow....................................................... 2-8Figure 2-5. Non-Protected Tx, Space Diversity Rx (NS) Signal Flow.................................................... 2-9Figure 2-6. Frequency Diversity Tx/Rx (FF) Signal Flow ...................................................................... 2-9Figure 2-7. Non-protected Tx/Rx (NN) Signal Flow............................................................................. 2-10Figure 2-8. Back-to-Back Terminal Configuration................................................................................ 2-10Figure 2-9. Monitored Hot Standby Switching Diagram....................................................................... 2-11Figure 2-10. Monitored Hot Standby Switching...................................................................................... 2-13Figure 2-11. Monitored Hot Standby Switching (Repeated)................................................................ 2-17
Figure 2-12. Hot Standby Tx, Space Diversity Rx (HS) Switching ........................................................ 2-19Figure 2-13. RF Loopback Circuit Setup................................................................................................ 2-21Figure 2-14. RF Loopback Circuit Setup................................................................................................. 2-23
Chapter 3–Module Descriptions
Section 3-1–Radio Cabinet
Figure 3-1-1 8209309-00 – Universal Access Panel for 28DS1, 3DS3, 100BaseT and SONET\SDH. 3-1-2Figure 3-1-2 MGN8112 Early-Model Access Panel for 28xDS1, 3xDS3 and SONET/SDH ............... 3-1-3Figure 3-1-3 8209120-00 – Access Panel for SONET/SDH Optical & Electrical ................................ 3-1-3Figure 3-1-4 8209296-00 – Access Panel for SONET/SDH Optical & Electrical and SNMP NMS .... 3-1-4Figure 3-1-5 Power Distribution Diagram ............................................................................................. 3-1-4Figure 3-1-6 Access Panel Features ....................................................................................................... 3-1-5Figure 3-1-7. SP Backplane Jumper Locations (as viewed through the chassis).................................. 3-1-10Figure 3-1-8 RF Shelf Backplane (viewed through chassis from front of the cabinet) ....................... 3-1-11
Section 3-2–RF Distribution
Figure 3-2-1. RF Distribution Block; TX/RX Hot Standby (HH) .......................................................... 3-2-2Figure 3-2-2. RF Distribution Block; TX Hot Standby, RX Space Diversity (HS)................................ 3-2-3Figure 3-2-3. RF Distribution Block; TX Non-Protected, RX Space Diversity (NS)............................. 3-2-3Figure 3-2-4. RF Distribution Block; TX/RX Frequency Diversity (FF) ............................................... 3-2-4
List of Figures
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page xviii
Microwave Networks
Figure 3-2-5. RF Distribution Block; TX/RX Non-protected (NN) ....................................................... 3-2-4Figure 3-2-6. Front Panel Functions of the Transmit and Receive Waveguide Filters (HH) ................. 3-2-6Figure 3-2-7. Front Panel Functions of the Transmit and Receive Waveguide Filters (HS) .................. 3-2-7Figure 3-2-8. Front Panel Functions of the Transmit and Receive Waveguide Filters (NS) .................. 3-2-8Figure 3-2-9. Front Panel Functions of the Transmit and Receive Waveguide Filters (FF)................... 3-2-9Figure 3-2-10. Front Panel Functions of the Transmit and Receive Waveguide Filters (NN) ............... 3-2-10
Section 3-3–Transmitter Unit (TXU)
Figure 3-3-1. Transmitter Unit ................................................................................................................ 3-3-1Figure 3-3-2. TXU Block Diagram ......................................................................................................... 3-3-2Figure 3-3-3. Transmitter Unit Front Panel............................................................................................. 3-3-3Figure 3-3-4. TXU Alarm/Control Board ............................................................................................... 3-3-4Figure 3-3-5. TX IF BPF/LO Board Jumper Locations .......................................................................... 3-3-5
Section 3-4–Receiver Unit (RXU)
Figure 3-4-1. Receiver Unit (RXU) ........................................................................................................ 3-4-1Figure 3-4-2. Receiver Functional Block ................................................................................................ 3-4-2Figure 3-4-3. Front Panel Functions of the RXU.................................................................................... 3-4-3Figure 3-4-4. Jumper Locations for MLN7905....................................................................................... 3-4-4
Section 3-5–RF Power Supply Unit (RF PSU)
Figure 3-5-1. RF Power Supply Unit ...................................................................................................... 3-5-1Figure 3-5-2. RF PSU Block Diagram .................................................................................................... 3-5-2Figure 3-5-3. RF Power Supply Board.................................................................................................... 3-5-3
Section 3-6–SP Power Supply Unit (SP PSU)
Figure 3-6-1. SP Power Supply Unit....................................................................................................... 3-6-1Figure 3-6-2. SP PSU Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 3-6-2Figure 3-6-3. Front Panel Functions of the SP PSU................................................................................ 3-6-3
Section 3-7–Alarm and Control Unit
Figure 3-7-1. Alarm and Control Unit..................................................................................................... 3-7-1Figure 3-7-2. ACU Block Diagram......................................................................................................... 3-7-3Figure 3-7-3. Front Panel Functions of the ACU.................................................................................... 3-7-4
Section 3-8–Modulator (MOD)
Figure 3-8-1. Modulator .......................................................................................................................... 3-8-1Figure 3-8-2. MOD Block Diagram........................................................................................................ 3-8-2Figure 3-8-3. Front Panel Functions of the MOD ................................................................................... 3-8-3Figure 3-8-4. MOD 8000514 Jumper Locations (SONET/SDH) ........................................................... 3-8-4
Section 3-9–Demodulator (DEMOD)
Figure 3-9-1. Typical Demodulator......................................................................................................... 3-9-1
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page xix
Microwave Networks
Figure 3-9-2. DEMOD Block Diagram (SONET/SDH) ......................................................................... 3-9-3Figure 3-9-3. Front Panel Functions of the DEMOD.............................................................................. 3-9-4Figure 3-9-4. DEMOD 8000515 Jumper Locations (SONET/SDH) ...................................................... 3-9-5
Section 3-10–Multiplexer (MUX)
Figure 3-10-1 Typical Multiplexer......................................................................................................... 3-10-1Figure 3-10-2 MUX Operations Block Diagram ................................................................................... 3-10-2Figure 3-10-3 ALM LED on the Front Panel......................................................................................... 3-10-3Figure 3-10-4 MUX 8000513 Jumper Locations (SONET/SDH) ......................................................... 3-10-4
Section 3-11–Synchronizer/Desynchronizer (SYNDES)
Figure 3-11-1. Typical SYNDES Module............................................................................................... 3-11-1Figure 3-11-2. SYNDES Block Diagram................................................................................................ 3-11-3Figure 3-11-3. SYNDES Front Panel LED Alarm Function................................................................... 3-11-4Figure 3-11-4. Jumper Locations for SYNDES Module......................................................................... 3-11-5
Section 3-12–Service Channel Unit (SCU)
Figure 3-12-1. Service Channel Unit ...................................................................................................... 3-12-1Figure 3-12-2. SCU Block Diagram........................................................................................................ 3-12-2Figure 3-12-3. Front Panel Functions of the SCU................................................................................... 3-12-3Figure 3-12-4. SCU Jumper Locations and Dip Switch Settings............................................................ 3-12-4
Section 3-13–Orderwire Unit (OWU)
Figure 3-13-1. Orderwire Unit ................................................................................................................ 3-13-1Figure 3-13-2. Order Wire Unit Operations ............................................................................................ 3-13-3Figure 3-13-3. Front Panel Functions of the OWU................................................................................. 3-13-4Figure 3-13-4. Functions of the Orderwire Handset (MLN7324A)........................................................ 3-13-5Figure 3-13-5. OWU Jumper and Switch Locations ............................................................................... 3-13-5Figure 3-13-6. Orderwire When Used with SCU Set Up for Dual Narrow Band VF............................. 3-13-7Figure 3-13-7. Orderwire When Used with SCU Set Up for Single Wide Band VF.............................. 3-13-8
Section 3-14–Wayside Traffic Unit (WTU)
Figure 3-14-1. Wayside Traffic Unit....................................................................................................... 3-14-1Figure 3-14-2. Functional Blocks of the Wayside Traffic Unit .............................................................. 3-14-3Figure 3-14-3. WTU Alarm LED Location............................................................................................. 3-14-4Figure 3-14-4. MLN7330 WTU Jumper and Switch Locations ............................................................. 3-14-4Figure 3-14-5. 8000608-00 WTU Configuration Switch Location......................................................... 3-14-6
Section 3-15–Network Management Unit (NMU)
Figure 3-15-1. Network Management Unit Block Diagram ................................................................... 3-15-2Figure 3-15-2. Jumpers on the Network Management Unit (NMU)....................................................... 3-15-3Figure 3-15-3. DIP Switch S1 Values ..................................................................................................... 3-15-4
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page xx
Microwave Networks
Chapter 4–Equipment InstallationFigure 4-1 Customer DC Power Connections......................................................................................... 4-3Figure 4-2 Recommended DC Power Connection for Dual Battery Source ......................................... 4-3Figure 4-3 DC Power Connection for a Single Battery Source .............................................................. 4-4Figure 4-4 NOT RECOMMENDED DC Power Connection for Battery Source(s) .............................. 4-4Figure 4-5 Rack Ground Wiring ............................................................................................................. 4-5Figure 4-6 155-Mbit/s Access Panels ..................................................................................................... 4-6Figure 4-7 Network Connections Between Radios and the Telescan NMS ......................................... 4-12Figure 4-8 Terminal to Radio Connection; DTE-to-DTE..................................................................... 4-16Figure 4-9 Terminal to Radio Connection; DTE-to-DCE and Null-Modem........................................ 4-17Figure 4-10 Modem Connection to Radio Access Panel, Local Access Port ......................................... 4-19Figure 4-11 Various DTE-to-DTE and DTE-to-DCE Wiring Configurations ....................................... 4-21Figure 4-12 Antenna Port Connections for NN or HH Radios ............................................................... 4-22Figure 4-13 Antenna Port Connections for Space Diversity Radio ........................................................ 4-23
Chapter 5–AlignmentFigure 5-1. RF Section and RF Distribution in HH Configuration.......................................................... 5-3Figure 5-2. SP Section in HH Configuration ........................................................................................... 5-3Figure 5-3. RF Section and RF Distribution in HS Configuration .......................................................... 5-4Figure 5-4. SP Section in HS Configuration............................................................................................ 5-4Figure 5-5. RF Section and RF Distribution in NS Configuration .......................................................... 5-5Figure 5-6. SP Section in NS Configuration............................................................................................ 5-5Figure 5-7. RF Section and RF Distribution in FF Configuration ........................................................... 5-6Figure 5-8. SP Section in FF Configuration ............................................................................................ 5-6Figure 5-9. RF Distribution and RF Section in Non-protected/Non-protected Configuration ................ 5-7Figure 5-10. SP Section in NN Configuration ........................................................................................... 5-7Figure 5-11. IF Cabling.............................................................................................................................. 5-8Figure 5-12. BER Test Set Connections to the Radio.............................................................................. 5-12Figure 5-13. Service Channel BER Test Set Connections to the Radio .................................................. 5-14Figure 5-14. TX and RX Signal Attenuator Connection to the Radio..................................................... 5-16Figure 5-15. Signal Attenuator Connection to the Radio......................................................................... 5-18
Chapter 6–MaintenanceFigure 6-1. TXU Bandpass Filter Location ........................................................................................... 6-12Figure 6-2. Synthesizer Switch Location............................................................................................... 6-13
Site Engineering–
Appendix A–T/I CurvesFigure A-1. CM7 SONET Electrical, T/I Curve, APC On, SP TXUs..................................................... A-2Figure A-2. CM7 SONET Electrical, T/I Curve, APC Off, SP TXU...................................................... A-3Figure A-3. CM8 SONET Electrical, CW Interference, APC Off, DHP Tx........................................... A-4
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page xxi
Microwave Networks
Figure A-4. CM8 SONET Electrical, CW Interference, APC On, DHP Tx............................................ A-4
Appendix B–QuikLink ScreensFigure B-1. Screen 002 – Main Menu ..................................................................................................... B-2Figure B-2. Flowchart - Main Menus ...................................................................................................... B-7Figure B-3. Flowchart - Performance Monitoring Screens ..................................................................... B-7Figure B-4. Flowchart -Alarm and Status Screens .................................................................................. B-8Figure B-5. Flowchart - Configuration Screens ...................................................................................... B-8Figure B-6. Flowchart - Control and Maintenance Screens .................................................................... B-9
001 - Product Label Screen B-10002 - Main Menu B-10003 - Performance Monitoring Menu B-11004 - View Link B-11005 - View Measurements Screen B-12006 - Reset Statistics Menu B-13007 - View Comm Ports Screen B-13020 - Alarm and Status Menu B-14021 - System Alarm Menu B-14022 - SYNDES Alarm Screen B-15023 - MUX Alarm Screen B-16024 - DEMOD Alarm Screen B-17025 - MOD Alarm Screen B-17026 - SCU Alarm Screen B-18027 - ATDE Alarm Screen B-18028 - TXU Alarm Screen B-19029 - RXU Alarm Screen B-20030 - OWU Alarm Screen B-21031 - SP PSU Alarm Screen B-21032 - RF PSU Alarm Screen B-22033 - WTU Alarm Screen B-22034 - SCE Alarm Screen B-23035 - Alarm Summary Screen B-23036 - System Alarms Screen B-24037 - System LED Status Screen B-24038 - Alarm Log Menu B-25039 - Alarm Log Screen B-25040 - TX and RX Path Status B-26050 - System Configuration Menu B-26051 - System/Module Parameters Screen B-27052 - AIS Options Screen B-28053 -Tx Output Power Calibration Screen B-28054 - Date and Time Menu B-29057 - 28DS1 SYNDES Configuration Screen B-30070 - Control and Maintenance Menu B-31071 - Path Switching Screen B-31073 - TTL and Relay I/O Status Screens B-32081 - Loopback Monitoring Screen B-33
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page xxii
Microwave Networks
082 - IF/Baseband Loopback Screen B-33083 - MUX Loopback Screen B-34084 - SYNDES Loopback Screen B-34084 - 3DS3-100BaseT SYNDES Loopback Screen B-35085 - SCU Loopback Screen B-35086 - WTU Loopback Screen B-35087 - APC Option Menu B-36088 - Power Amplifier Control Screen B-36
Appendix C–Configuration Tables
Appendix D–Alarm Codes
Appendix E–Setting Frequency SwitchesFigure E-1. Frequency Switch Arrangement........................................................................................... E-2Figure E-2. CM8 Synthesizer Switch Arrangement................................................................................ E-6
Appendix F–Glossary
Appendix G–CM SNMPFigure G-1. SNMP NMU Front Panel ..................................................................................................... G-2Figure G-2. SNMP NMU Card................................................................................................................ G-3Figure G-3. Typical CM SNMP Network................................................................................................ G-5Figure G-4. Network Interface Ports ....................................................................................................... G-6Figure G-5. Example of setup-ppp Entries .............................................................................................. G-9Figure G-6. Example of Radio Network Connections............................................................................. G-9Figure G-7. CM SNMP MIB Tables...................................................................................................... G-11Figure G-8. CM SNMP Telnet Shell ..................................................................................................... G-14Figure G-9. Main Telnet Display........................................................................................................... G-15
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page xxiii
Chapter 1–General InformationTable 1-A. CM7/8 SONET FCC Specifications ....................................................................... 1-4Table 1-B. CM7/8 SONET Sections and Modules ................................................................... 1-6Table 1-C. CM7/8 SONET/SDH Radio Specifications ............................................................ 1-8Table 1-D. General Specifications ............................................................................................ 1-9
Chapter 2–Principles of OperationTable 2-A. RF Shelf Module Requirements.............................................................................. 2-4Table 2-B SP Shelf Module Requirements .............................................................................. 2-6
Chapter 3–Module DescriptionsTable 3-A. CM7/8 SONET/SDH Modules ............................................................................... 3-1
Section 3-1–Radio Cabinet
Table 3-1-A. CM SONET\SDH Access Panels......................................................................... 3-1-1Table 3-1-B. 8209302-00 Configuration Switch Settings......................................................... 3-1-8Table 3-1-C. MGN8112 Access Panel Switch Settings ............................................................ 3-1-9Table 3-1-D. SP Backplane Jumper Settings........................................................................... 3-1-10Table 3-1-E. MLN7730 Accessory Kit ................................................................................... 3-1-12
Section 3-2–RF Distribution
Table 3-2-A. Transmit and Receive Bandpass Filter Options................................................... 3-2-1Table 3-2-B. Waveguide Branching Network Options ............................................................. 3-2-1
Section 3-3–Transmitter Unit (TXU)
Table 3-3-A. TXU Part Numbers .............................................................................................. 3-3-1Table 3-3-B. Tx/Rx Spacing Options........................................................................................ 3-3-1Table 3-3-C. TXU IF BPF/LO Board Jumper Settings............................................................. 3-3-5
Section 3-4–Receiver Unit (RXU)
Table 3-4-A. RXU Part Numbers .............................................................................................. 3-4-1Table 3-4-B. RXU Control Board MLN7905A Jumper Settings.............................................. 3-4-4
Section 3-5–RF Power Supply Unit (RF PSU)
Section 3-6–SP Power Supply Unit (SP PSU)
Section 3-7–Alarm and Control Unit
Table 3-7-A. ACU Jumper Settings........................................................................................... 3-7-5
List of Tables
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page xxiv
Microwave Networks
Table 3-7-B. ACU DIP Switch Settings.................................................................................... 3-7-6
Section 3-8–Modulator (MOD)
Table 3-8-A. MOD Part Numbers ............................................................................................. 3-8-1Table 3-8-B. MOD 8000514 Jumper Settings (SONET/SDH) ................................................. 3-8-4
Section 3-9–Demodulator (DEMOD)
Table 3-9-A. DEMOD Part Numbers........................................................................................ 3-9-1
Section 3-10–Multiplexer (MUX)
Table 3-10-A. MUX Part Numbers ........................................................................................... 3-10-1Table 3-10-B. MUX 8000513 Jumper Settings (SONET/SDH) ............................................... 3-10-4
Section 3-11–Synchronizer/Desynchronizer (SYNDES)
Table 3-11-A. SYNDES Part Numbers ..................................................................................... 3-11-1Table 3-11-B. SYNDES Cabling Operational Parameters........................................................ 3-11-2Table 3-11-C. SYNDES Jumper Settings ................................................................................. 3-11-5
Section 3-12–Service Channel Unit (SCU)
Table 3-12-A. SCU Jumper Settings ......................................................................................... 3-12-4Table 3-12-B. SCU Switch S1 (CH1) and S2 (CH2) Settings For Digital Channels................ 3-12-5
Section 3-13–Orderwire Unit (OWU)
Table 3-13-A. OWU Jumper Settings ....................................................................................... 3-13-6Table 3-13-B. OWU Switch Settings ........................................................................................ 3-13-6
Section 3-14–Wayside Traffic Unit (WTU)
Table 3-14-A MLN7330 WTU Line Coding Jumper Settings................................................. 3-14-5Table 3-14-B MLN7330 WTU Line Buildout Switch Settings ............................................... 3-14-5Table 3-14-C 8000608-00 WTU Equalizer Control / Line Length Select Settings ................. 3-14-6Table 3-14-D 8000608-00 Line Code Select Settings.............................................................. 3-14-7
Section 3-15–Network Management Unit (NMU)
Table 3-15-A. NMU Jumper Settings........................................................................................ 3-15-3Table 3-15-B. NMU Switch S1 Settings ................................................................................... 3-15-4Table 3-15-C. NMU Switch S2 Settings ................................................................................... 3-15-4
Chapter 4–Equipment InstallationTable 4-A CM Accessory Kits ................................................................................................. 4-2Table 4-B Recommended Minimum Wire Gauge Size ........................................................... 4-5Table 4-C DS1 and Wayside Channel Connections ................................................................ 4-7Table 4-D DS3 and 155-Mbps Connections ............................................................................ 4-8Table 4-E DB15 TTL Interface Connections........................................................................... 4-9
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page xxv
Microwave Networks
Table 4-F DB25 Alarm/Control Relay Connections ............................................................... 4-9Table 4-G Modular (RJ11) Interface Connections................................................................. 4-10Table 4-H Network Port Connections .................................................................................... 4-11Table 4-I Local Access Port.................................................................................................. 4-14Table 4-J Modem Data Transfer Communication Requirements ......................................... 4-20Table 4-K DTE-to-DCE Cable Connections.......................................................................... 4-20Table 4-L DTE-to-DTE Cable Connections .......................................................................... 4-20
Chapter 5–AlignmentTable 5-A. RF Shelf Module Requirements (numbers denotes quantities) .............................. 5-2Table 5-B. SP Shelf Module Requirements .............................................................................. 5-2Table 5-C. Fuse Ratings............................................................................................................ 5-9Table 5-D. Recommended Test Equipment ............................................................................ 5-20Table 5-E. Test Equipment Electrical and Functional Specifications .................................... 5-20Table 5-F. Voltage and Alarm Checks ................................................................................... 5-22Table 5-G. Frequency, Transmitter Power, and Monitor Checks ........................................... 5-22Table 5-H. RSL, AGC, and System Gain................................................................................ 5-23Table 5-I. AGC Readings ...................................................................................................... 5-23
Chapter 6–MaintenanceTable 6-A. Recommended Test Equipment .............................................................................. 6-2Table 6-B. Test Equipment Electrical and Functional Specifications ...................................... 6-2Table 6-C. Fuse Ratings............................................................................................................ 6-5Table 6-D. Troubleshooting Flow Chart Matrix ....................................................................... 6-6
Site Engineering–
Appendix A–T/I Curves
Appendix B–QuikLink ScreensTable B-A. Keyboard/keypad Functions ...................................................................................B-3Table B-B. Local Access Port Codes.........................................................................................B-3Table B-C. Local Display Screen Index ....................................................................................B-4Table B-D. Radio Frequency and Capacity .............................................................................B-10
Appendix C–Configuration TablesTable C-A. 8209302-00 Access Panel Configuration Settings..................................................C-2Table C-B. MGN8112 Access Panel Configuration Settings....................................................C-2Table C-C. SP Backplane Jumper Settings................................................................................C-3Table C-D. TXU IF BPF/LO Board Jumper Settings................................................................C-3Table C-E. RXU Control Board MLN7905A Jumper Settings.................................................C-4Table C-F. ACU Jumper Settings..............................................................................................C-4Table C-G. ACU DIP Switch Settings.......................................................................................C-5Table C-H. MOD 8000514-00 Configuration Settings (SONET/SDH) ....................................C-5Table C-I. DEMOD 8000515-00 Configuration Settings (SONET/SDH)...............................C-6
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page xxvi
Microwave Networks
Table C-J. MUX 8000513-00 Configuration Settings (SONET/SDH) ....................................C-6Table C-K. SYNDES 8000516-00 Configuration Settings (SONET/SDH)..............................C-6Table C-L. SCU Jumper Settings ..............................................................................................C-6Table C-M. SCU Switch S1 (CH1) and S2 (CH2) Settings .......................................................C-6Table C-N. OWU Jumper Settings ............................................................................................C-7Table C-O. OWU Switch Settings .............................................................................................C-8Table C-P. MLN7330 WTU Jumper Settings ...........................................................................C-8Table C-Q. MLN7330 WTU Switch Settings............................................................................C-8Table C-R. 8000608-00 WTU Equalizer Control / Line Length Select Settings ......................C-8Table C-S. 8000608-00 WTU Line Code Select Settings.........................................................C-9Table C-T. MLN7329 (E1) Jumper Settings .............................................................................C-9Table C-U. MLN7329 (E1) WTU Switch Settings....................................................................C-9Table C-W. NMU Switch S1 Settings ......................................................................................C-10Table C-X. NMU Switch S2 Settings ......................................................................................C-10Table C-V. NMU Jumper Settings...........................................................................................C-10
Appendix D–Alarm CodesTable D-A. Alarm Codes ...........................................................................................................D-1
Appendix E–Setting Frequency SwitchesTable E-A. Synthesizer Oscillator Frequency Ranges............................................................... E-1Table E-B. CM7 Synthesizer Switch Settings in 20-MHz Increments ..................................... E-3Table E-C. Switch Settings, 2 MHz Increments........................................................................E-4Table E-D. Synthesizer Frequency Bands ................................................................................. E-5Table E-E. 20-MHz Synthesizer Switch Settings .....................................................................E-6Table E-F. Synthesizer Frequency Bands ................................................................................. E-7
Appendix F–Glossary
Appendix G–CM SNMPTable G-A. SNMP Components.................................................................................................G-2Table G-B. Component Descriptions and Part Numbers...........................................................G-2Table G-C. Front Panel Network Interface Components...........................................................G-2Table G-D. SNMP NMU LED Descriptions .............................................................................G-4Table G-E. SNMP NMU Push-button Reset Switch Descriptions............................................G-4Table G-F. SNMP NMU Jumper Descriptions .........................................................................G-4Table G-G. Ethernet Port Pins....................................................................................................G-6Table G-H. SCE Cable Pin Assignments ...................................................................................G-7Table G-I. Local Access Port....................................................................................................G-7Table G-J. MIB Performance Table (perfTable) Variables ....................................................G-11Table G-K. MIB Configuration Table (confTable) Variables .................................................G-12Table G-L. MIB Fault Manager (faultManager) Variables .....................................................G-12Table G-M. MIB Diagnostics (diagnostics) Variables .............................................................G-13Table G-N. Telnet Command Definitions................................................................................G-15
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 1-1
1.0 IntroductionThe CM7/8, 155-Mbps Digital Microwave radio (CM7/8) provides bandwidth-efficient transmission of voice and data for all common carriers, cellular communications, and private network communications. The system is a 155.52-Mbit/second transport radio capable of OC-3 (optical) STM1/STS3 (electrical) selections.
The CM7/8 operates in frequency bands ranging from 7.125 to 8.5 GHz. Figure 1-1 shows the rack-mounted CM7/8 radio.
Major sections in this chapter are:
1. Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
2. CM7/8 Protection Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
3 SONET Optical Data Conversion. . . . . . . . 1-4
4. Channel Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
5. FCC Compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
6. Equipment Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
7. Transmission Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
8. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Chapter 1General Information
Figure 1-1. CM7/8 SONET SDH Digital Microwave Radio
Chapter 1 General Information
Page 1-2 8/5/03 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
2.0 CM7/8 Protection FeaturesThe CM7/8 155-Mbps radio (CM7/8) delivers as much as 101.5 dB of system gain (typical for 10-
3 BER). The CM7/8 design allows you to easily upgrade from lower capacities, and its protection configurations easily altered or added to in the field. This efficient design serves to make operation, installation, and maintenance easier, while optimizing the CM7/8 performance and reliability.
2.1 Protection
The CM7/8 is a high capacity digital microwave radio available in hot-standby, space diversity, and frequency diversity protected configurations, as well as a non-protected version. The service channels can be configured to be protected or non-protected as desired. This protection availability makes the CM7/8 capacities well-suited for a wide range of communication applications.
Figure 1-2 illustrates protected switching. Other features of the design include:
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (128-QAM)
modulation scheme that improves spectral performance, and meets CTIA requirements for spectral efficiency.
Forward Error Correction (FEC) provides error correction for traffic channels and service channels.
Errorless Space Diversity Switch Errorless receiver switching; may be used as part of a protection configuration.
Reverse Channel Switching protects against silent transmitter failures.
Dispersive Fade Margin radio system is engineered to recover from signal dispersion.
Automatic Power Control (APC) regulates transmitter power output; uses only adequate power for normal operation and increases output power during a severe fade.
APC also extends the life of the radio’s power amplifiers by reducing amplifier power consumption during normal operation.
Complete Front Access to all user interfaces after installation, enabling the user to have easy access to the hardware for desired changes.
Microwave Networks, Inc.
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 1-3
MO
DB
DE
MO
DB
MO
D A
DE
MO
DA
F-1
245a
TX
A
RX
A
RX
B
Ant
enna
Por
tR
F D
ist
Filt
er
RF
Dis
tF
ilter
TX
B
LO LO
SY
NT
HE
SIZ
ER
SY
NT
HE
SIZ
ER
RF
-TX
Onl
ine
Con
trol
MU
X-T
XO
nlin
eC
ontr
olS
CU
A
Tx
Rx
SY
ND
ES
A
SY
ND
ES
B
SC
U B
Rx
Tx
MU
X A
MU
X B
DS
1/D
S3/
OC
-3
Ser
vice
Cha
nnel
s
Rx
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Tx
WT
U A
Tx
Rx
WT
U B
Tx
Rx
#1 #2
RF
-Rx
Onl
ine
Con
trol
SC
U/W
TU
Onl
ine
Con
trol
SC
U-R
xO
nlin
eC
ontr
olM
ux-R
XO
nlin
eC
ontr
ol
WT
U-R
XO
nlin
eC
ontr
ol
WT
U-R
XO
nlin
eC
ontr
ol
Way
side
Cha
nnel
Figu
re 1
-2. C
M7/
8 15
5-M
bp
s H
ot S
tan
db
y S
yste
m B
lock
Dia
gram
Not
e: M
UX
and
DE
MU
X fu
nctio
ns a
re p
erfo
rmed
on
the
MU
X b
oard
s. S
YNC
, DE
SYN
C, a
nd b
i-di
rect
iona
l opt
ic to
ele
ctri
cal c
onve
rsio
n fu
ncti
ons
are
perf
orm
ed o
n th
e SY
ND
ES
boar
d.
Chapter 1 General Information
Page 1-4 8/5/03 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
3.0 SONET Optical Data ConversionWhen configured to process SONET OC-3 data, the CM7/8 radio performs bi-directional data conversion using a conversion transceiver located on the SYNDES board. For OC-3 data entering the CM7/8 radio from a customer router, the OC-3 data is converted and then multiplexed and modulated before being sent to the transmitter and an antenna for RF transmission to a far end SONET radio. For RF data being transmitted and received from the far end SONET radio, the data is first demodulated and demultiplexed before entering the conversion transceiver. The converted RF-to- OC-3 data is then sent to the customer router for SONET data processing and subsequent distribution.
4.0 Channel CapacityTransmission standards evolved from different basic-rate signals in the non-synchronous hierarchy. TDM, Time Division Multiplexing, in North America combines twenty-four 64 kbps channels (DS-0s) into one 1.54 Mbps DS-1 signal. International TDM multiplexes thirty-two 64 kbps channels (E-0s) into one 2.048 Mbps E-1 (CEPT format) signal.
155-Mbps standards accommodate both the 1.5-Mbps and the 2-Mbps non-synchronous hierarchies in a single synchronization standard. SONET specifies a basic transmission rate of 51 Mbps and SDH specifies a basic rate of 155.52 Mbps. SONET and SDH converge at the SDH 155.52-Mbps base level, defined as STM-1 (Synchronous Transport Module-1). The base level for SONET is STS-1 (or OC-1) and is equivalent to 51.84 Mbps. Thus SDH STM-1 is equivalent to SONET STS-3 (3 x 51.84 Mbps = 155.52 Mbps).
The CM7/8 155-Mbps radio transports 155.52 Mbps data, thus carries the equivalent of 2016 voice channels. When equipped with one of the optional Wayside Traffic Units (WTU), the radio can carry an additional DS1 or E1 channel and a 9600-bps asynchronous data channel with no loss of performance.
The radio uses 128 QAM modulation and has a 30 MHz RF channel bandwidth.
5.0 FCC ComplianceTable 1-A lists the CM7/8 SONET FCC specifications. The CM7/8 radio is capable of transmission in the 7.125 to 8.5-GHz band.
Table 1-A. CM7/8 SONET FCC Specifications
ItemCM7/8SONET
FCC Part 101
Radio Frequency Range 7.125 to 8.5 GHz
FCC Identifier LBW-CM7/8HC-OC-3
Frequency Stability 10 ppm
Maximum Transmission Rate
165.85 Mbps
ChannelBandwidth
30 MHz
Emission Designator
30M0D7W
Microwave Networks, Inc.
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 1-5
6.0 Equipment DescriptionFigure 1-3 shows a typical CM7/8 radio in protected configuration. The front cover has been removed to show the plug-in modules. The CM7/8 radio includes radio Frequency (RF) and Signal Processing (SP) equipment sections.
The RF section of the radio consists of RF Distribution and the RF shelf containing the RF modules. RF modules include the Transmitter Unit (TXU), the Receive Unit (RXU), and the RF Power Supply Unit (RF PSU). The SP section of the radio cabinet consists of the Access Panel and the SP shelf containing the SP modules. These units are used for IF signal processing, orderwire, and alarm and control.
Figure 1-3. CM7/8 Digital Microwave Radio in Hot-Standby Configuration
Chapter 1 General Information
Page 1-6 8/5/03 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
The radio front covers are removable, allowing access to the modules before and after installation. With the front and rear covers in place, the CM7/8 radio meets FCC Part 15 regulations for emissions and is also compliant with industry standards regarding radio interference susceptibility from external sources.
The cabinet mechanical design allows for air flow through the radio to maintain proper system temperature, and meets all performance specifications with the covers in place. Always replace the covers after maintenance or repair activity.
All of the standard and optional modules contained in the CM7/8 radio are listed in Table 1-B. See Table 3-A for part numbers associated with these modules. See Chapter 4 for equipment installation instructions before removing or replacing modules.
Table 1-B. CM7/8 SONET Sections and Modules
Section Module
RF Section RF Distribution
Transmitter Unit (TXU)
Receiver Unit (RXU)
RF Power Supply Unit (RF PSU)
SP Section Access Panel
SP Power Supply Unit (SP PSU)
Alarm and Control Unit (ACU)
Modulator (MOD)
Demodulator (DEMOD)
Multiplexer (MUX)
Synchronizer/Desynchronizer (SYNDES)
Service Channel Unit (SCU) (Optional)
Orderwire Unit (OWU) (Optional)
Wayside Traffic Unit (WTU) (Optional, available on DS3 and higher capacity radios only)
Network Management Unit (NMU) (Optional)
Microwave Networks, Inc.
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 1-7
7.0 Transmission EngineeringRF channel separation, radio system gain, and interference considerations may affect the perfor-mance of the radio.
7.1 RF Channel Separation
Typically, at all sites, radio frequencies should be grouped such that each radio transmitter fre-quency is above the radio receiver frequency. The most common T/R frequency separations on a common antenna (same polarization) are 490 and 500 MHz.
7.2 Radio System Gain
The radio system gain is the transmitter power in dBm minus the receiver sensitivity or threshold in dBm for a 10-6 or 10-3 BER. For example, on a high power 7-GHz radio, the maximum transmitter power is +31.0 dBm, and the typical receiver threshold at 10-3 is-70.5 dBm. Therefore, the typical system gain at 10-3 is +31.0 - (-70.5) = 101.5 dB.
7.3 Interference Considerations
The CM7/8 receivers have substantially higher interference immunity than FDM/FM receivers. The interference in an analog system is apparent in the voice channels in direct proportion to the level of the interference relative to the message carrier. In a digital receiver such as the CM7/8, the interference is only apparent when it is of sufficient level such that the T/I ratio of the digital receiver has been violated. For a definition of T/I ratio, refer to Appendix A.
Transmission engineering considerations for hub operations, two-frequency plan repeaters, cross-polarized operation and intersystem coordination must take into account the differential fading that is quite likely to occur between the desired carrier and the interference.
8.0 SpecificationsElectrical and mechanical specifications for the CM7/8 Digital Microwave radio are listed in Tables 1-C and Table 1-D.
These specifications apply to equipment connected back-to-back, unless otherwise stated. Specifi-cations are subject to change without notice. Weights and dimensions are approximate. Power and threshold are guaranteed engineering specifications at 25°C at the antenna flange.
8.1 Transmitter Power
The CM7/8 transmitter has a rated power output as outlined in Table 1-C. The power output is mea-sured at the antenna connection to the radio. No additional branching losses need be added.
8.2 Receiver Sensitivity
The CM7/8 1x1 Hot Standby receiver has a minimum threshold receive signal level (measured at the antenna connection) as outlined in Tables 1-C. No additional branching losses need be added. The receiver dynamic range is also listed in these tables.
Chapter 1 General Information
Page 1-8 8/5/03 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
* These values are for the A side Tx. B Tx values are 1 dB lower than those listed**These values are for the A side radio. B side hot-standby values are 10 dB higher than those listed. Threshold values are 0.5 dB better on non-protected (NN) radios
Specifications apply to the main side a protected radio connected back-to-back, unless other-wise stated. Specifications are subject to change without notice. Power and threshold are guar-anteed engineering specifications at 25°C at the antenna flange.
Table 1-C. CM7/8 SONET/SDH Radio Specifications
Specification CM7/8 SONET
System (Monitored Hot Standby)
Typical System Gain -- BER =10-3 (APC High)
D-High Power (DHP) 101.5/100.5 dB
High Power (HP) 98.5 dB
Standard Power (SP) 93.5 dB
Modulation Type 128 QAM
Transmission Rate 165.85 Mbps
Channel Bandwidth 30 MHz
Dispersive Fade Margin
10-3 BER 49 dB
10-6 BER 47 dB
Residual BER <10-13
Antenna Waveguide Flange Type CMR112FRequired Antenna VSWR (Return Loss) 1.43:1 (15 dB)
Transmitter Power Output
Standard Power: APC High* 23 dBm
APC Low* 13 dBm
High Power: APC High* 28 dBm
APC Low* 18 dBm
D-High Power: APC High* 31/30 dBm
APC Low 21/20 dBm
Frequency Range (GHz) 7.125 to 8.5
Frequency Stability ±0.001%
Receiver Threshold
10-3 BER: Typical** -70.5 dBm
Guaranteed** -69.5 dBm
10-6 BER: Typical** -68.5 dBm
Guaranteed** -67.5 dBm
Dynamic Range BER = 10-6, Typical 49.5 dB
Forward Error Correction BCH Block Coding
IF 70 MHz
RF Input BER = 10-6, Typical -20 dBm
Maximum RF Input -10 dBm
Microwave Networks, Inc.
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 1-9
Table 1-D. General Specifications
Specification ValuePhysical InterfaceSTS-3 155.52 Mbps
75-Ω unbalanced BNC connectorOC-3 155.52 Mbps, 1310 nm, SC connectorMultimode standard, Single mode optionalTransmitter meets SONET OC-3 and ITU G.957 mask patterns. Transmit signal complies with ANSI T1.102-1993; BER threshold per ETSI EN301 785Optical Input Level
Non-Protected SystemHot Standby System
Multimode Single mode-32.5 to -14 dBm -32.5 to -8 dBm-28.5 to -10 dBm -28.5 to -4 dBm
(includes 4dB margin for loss through internal splitter)Output Level
Non-Protected SystemHot Standby System
Multimode Single mode-19 to -14 dBm -14 to -8 dBm -23 to -18 dBm -18 to -12 dBm
(includes 4dB for loss through internal splitter)Digital Service ChannelDigital Interfaces
Quantity 2Maximum Data Rate 19.2 kbps (asynchronous)
Analog Voice FrequencyQuantity 2Frequency Range 300 to 3400 HzInput (Tx) Level -3.5 dBm (-16 dBm option)Output (Rx) Level -3.5 dBm (+7 dBm option)Idle Channel Noise (narrow band) 23 dBrnC
Electrical (MHSB)Input Voltage Range ±20 to ±60 VdcPower Consumption (typical)
Std. Pwr. APC Low/High (Non-protected) 110/120 WStd. Pwr. APC Low/High (Hot Standby) 190/200 WHigh Pwr. APC Low/High (Non-protected) 155/215 WHigh Pwr. APC Low/High (Hot Standby) 270/330 WD-High Pwr. APC Low/High (Non-protected) 170/250 WD-High Pwr. APC Low/High (Hot Standby) 285/345 W
Status/Control/AlarmsExternal Alarm Inputs Quantity (NMU equipped) 4 (8) Type Std. - TTLExternal Control Outputs Quantity 4 Type Form-C Dry Contact (NO, NC, COMM) Contact Rating 0.5 A - 30 Vdc Quantity - NMU equipped 4 Type Std. - TTLRelay Alarm Outputs Quantity 4 Contact Rating 0.5 A - 30 Vdc Type Form-C Dry Contact (NO, NC, COMM)
Chapter 1 General Information
Page 1-10 8/5/03 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
Specifications apply to the main side a protected radio connected back-to-back, unless other-wise stated. Specifications are subject to change without notice. Power, threshold, and system gain are guaranteed engineering specifications at 25°C at the antenna flange.
Operating EnvironmentAmbient Temperature 0° to +50°C (32° to 122°F)Humidity 95% (no condensation)Altitude AMSL 15,000 ft. (4,500 m)MechanicalHeight 33.25 in. (845 mm) Width 17.25 in. (438 mm)Depth 10.25 in. (260 mm)
Table 1-D. General Specifications (Continued)
Specification Value
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual Page 2-1
1.0 IntroductionThis chapter covers CM7/8 SONET/SDH radio principles of operation including signal flow through the radio, available configurations for switching and loopback, and using the radio features. In addition, this chapter covers:
2.0 RF Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 2-33.0 Signal Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 2-54.0 Equipment Configurations. . . . . . . Page 2-75.0 Protection Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 2-116.0 Loopbacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 2-197.0 Automatic Power Control . . . . . . . Page 2-27
The CM7/8 SONET radio connects two distant points in a communication system by converting the user input signals to a form that can be carried by microwave. The CM7/8 then transmits the converted signal by microwave from one radio to another. After the signal reaches the distant CM7/8 radio, that CM7/8 converts the signal back into its original form.
1.1 Transmitting
This section covers the CM7/8 SONET/SDH radio transmit functions.
Synchronizer/Desynchronizer (SYNDES) Module - accepts 155.52-Mbit/second optical input from the access panel, sends the signal through line decoding that converts the signal to non-return to zero (NRZ) format, and sends the clock and NRZ data stream to the MUX (multiplexer).
Service Channel Unit (SCU) - receives two voice and two data service channels from the Access Panel. The SCU converts them to four 64 kbps channels which are applied to the Multiplexer.
Multiplexer (MUX) - performs both multiplexer and demultiplexer functions as described in Chapter 1, Paragraph 3.0.
On the transmit side, the MUX receives the NRZ signal from the SYNDES and multiplexes the signal together with:
• four 64 kbps service channels
• other overhead control bits
• two 64 kbps internal overhead channels
• if equipped, two channels (1DS1/1E1 + 9600-bps asynchronous data) from the Way-side Traffic Unit (WTU)
It converts them into a symbol stream suitable for input to the Modulator.
Modulator (MOD) - receives input from the MUX and mixes it with the 70-MHz carrier to generate a multiple level QAM signal. The output of the MOD is 70 MHz and is connected directly to the Transmitter.
Transmitter Unit (TXU) - accepts the modulated 70-MHz transmit signal from the MOD and delivers it to the RF Distribution filter.
Chapter 2Principles of Operation
Chapter 2 Principles of Operation
Page 2-2 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
Internal to the TXU, the signal goes through a double up-conversion process that utilizes the first on-board local oscillator and RXU frequency synthesizer to provide the second local oscillator. The resultant 6-GHz signal is further amplified and applied to the TXU output.
Three output power configurations are available for the CM7/8 radio: standard power (SP), high power (HP), and D-high power (DHP). The HP and DHP option provides 6.5 dB greater output power for a given capacity and channel bandwidth. DHP provides 9 dB more output power during severe fade conditions. During fades the TXU Automatic Power Control (APC) feature increases output power to maintain the RF link. See“Automatic Power Control” on page 2-27.
1.2 Receiving
This section discusses the receiving functions of the CM7/8 Digital Microwave radio.
Receiver Unit (RXU) - accepts the received 6-GHz signal from the RF Distribution filter and delivers a 70-MHz signal to the DEMOD. Internal to the RXU, the signal goes through a low noise pre-amplification stage and a downconversion process that utilizes the on-board frequency synthesizer to provide a local oscillator. The resultant 70-MHz signal is amplified, filtered, and applied to the DEMOD.
Demodulator (DEMOD) - performs the complementary function to the MOD in the far end transmitter. It accepts a multiple level QAM signal centered at 70 MHz from the Receiver. The DEMOD outputs the recovered data directly to the demultiplexer section of the MUX. Figure 1-3 in Chapter 1 shows the DEMOD electrically connected. An optional baseband ATDE automatically equalizes channel distortions which result from multi-path fading.
Demultiplexer (MUX module) - the Multiplexer performs both multiplexer and demultiplexer functions. On the receive side, the MUX receives the symbol stream from the DEMOD and demultiplexes this signal into the 155.52-Mbit signal, four 64 kbps service channels, two 64 kbps internal overhead channels, and in the case of the 28DS1 or DS3 radio, two signals (1DS1 and 9600 bps) for the WTU. The 155.52-Mbit signal is then sent to the SYNDES module.
Four of the six 64 kbps channels are used in the SCU. Of the remaining two 64 kbps channels, one channel is used for inter-site communications and the other channel is for the Network Management System.
Desynchronizer (SYNDES module) - receives a data stream from the MUX. These signals are clocked into an elastic buffer, the output of which is clocked by a recovered smooth clock provided by a PLL.
The resultant smoothed data and clock are fed to the line decoder for NRZ coding. The resultant 155.52-Mbit signal then connects to the outputs of the SYNDES and routed to the Access Panel for customer connection. The two signals (1DS1/1E1 + 9600 bps) from the optional WTU are also routed to connectors on the Access Panel.
Service Channel (SCU) - receives four 64 kbps channels and converts two to voice frequency and two to data channels. These are routed to the Access Panel for customer connection.
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual Page 2-3
2.0 RF ModulesThe following sections provide a brief description of the RF components. The radio cabinet is configured so that the A side modules are on the left, and the B side modules are on the right. The modules can be configured for various protection options by changing the waveguide branching network.
Table 2-A lists RF module requirements for available radio configurations. Figure 2-1 illustrates a protected RF section of the radio cabinet.
2.1 Branching Waveguide
This component provides the interconnection between the antenna waveguide port and the transmit and receive RF filters. Both transmit and the receive signals are in the 6-GHz frequency band.
Five branching network configurations are available: Hot Standby transmitter and Hot Standby receiver (HH), Hot Standby transmitter and Space Diversity receiver (HS), Non-Protected Transmitter and Space Diversity Receiver (NS), Frequency Diversity Transmitter and Frequency Diversity Receiver (FF), and Non-protected transmitter and Non-protected receiver (NN). The waveguide is attached to the back cover of the radio. Simplified block diagrams of the five standard RF configurations are shown in Figures 2-3 to 2-7.
F-1207
RF IN
RXU
AGC MON
RF LPBK
LO FREQADJ
LPBK LO IN
IF OUT
RX ALM
GND
LO MON
TX LO OUT
OFF
RF OUT
TXU
TX MON
TX LO IN
TX ALM
TX POWER ADJ
IF IN
LPBK LO OUT
RF IN
RXU
AGC MON
RF LPBK
LO FREQADJ
LPBK LO IN
IF OUT
RX ALM
GND
LO MON
TX LO OUT
OFF
RF OUT
TXU
TX MON
TX LO IN
TX ALM
TX POWER ADJ
IF IN
LPBK LO OUT
Figure 2-1. RF Shelf; Hot-Standby Tx/Rx and Hot-Standby Tx/Space Diversity Rx
Chapter 2 Principles of Operation
Page 2-4 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
2.2 Transmitter Unit (TXU)
The TXU is a removable plug-in module that comes in three output power options: Standard, High power, and D-high power. The RXU interfaces with the Rx filter using a semi-rigid coaxial cable. It is connected to the Demodulator (DEMOD) at an IF interface using flexible coaxial cable.
2.3 RF Power Supply Unit (RF PSU)
The RF PSU is a removable plug-in module that supplies the power to the TXU and RXU modules. When using a hot-stanby configuration for protection two RF PSUs will be needed, one for the main radio and one for the hot-standby unit. When using a non-protected configuration, only one RF PSU is needed.
When protection is desired for the transmitter or receiver operations, it is possible to establish a configuration on the RF shelf of two transmitters (main and hot-standby transmitters), two receivers (main and hot-standby receivers), and two RF power supply units. See Figure 2-1.
Table 2-A. RF Shelf Module Requirements (numbers denote module quantities)
Configuration TXU RXU RF PSU
Hot Standby Transmitter/Hot Standby Receiver (HH)
2 2 2
Hot Standby Transmitter/Space Diversity Receive (HS)
2 2 2
Non-Protected Transmitter/ Space Diversity Receiver (NS)
1 2 2
Frequency Diversity Transmitter/Frequency Diver-sity Receiver (FF)
2 2 2
Non-Protected Transmitter/Non-protected Receive (NN)
1 1 1
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual Page 2-5
3.0 Signal ProcessingThe following sections provide a brief description of the components of the SP section of the radio cabinet. For a detailed description of the Access Panel, refer to individual module descriptions in Chapter 3.
3.1 Access Panel
The CM radio provides the interface for the customer to connect and monitor all signal connections, except the RF signals and battery connections. The Access Panel provides the following features:
• 50-pin TELCO connector for 28 x DS1 signals (not on 155.52-Mbit only version).
• 75-ohm BNC connectors for 3 x DS3 signals, and a 155.52-Mbit electrical interface
• A duplex SC connector for 155.52-Mbit optical signals
• Four fuses for RF PSU A and B, SP PSU A and B.
• DB9 connector to interface with a VT100/VT220 terminal or equivalent computer.
• 4-position, 4-pin modular jack to the orderwire handset.
• Two 6-position, 6-pin modular jacks to interconnect other equipment compatible with NMS software.
• Six 4-position, 4-pin modular jacks for the service channels, the orderwire, and bridge legs.
• 4-position, 4-pin modular jack for the WTU DS1 channel.
• A DB15 and a DB25 connection for connecting signals External Alarm and Auxiliary TTL through the radio to the network management system.
3.2 Signal Processing Modules
These modules are plugged into the area below the Access Panel. They provide the interface between the customer traffic and the RF modules. The shelf is optimized for the protected configuration. The A-side modules are on the left and the B-side modules are on the right. Detailed descriptions of the modules can be found in Chapter 3.
Table 2-B lists SP shelf module requirements for the available configurations. Numbers in the table denote quantities of each module. Figure 2-2 shows the Signal Processing section of the radio shelf in protected configuration.
Chapter 2 Principles of Operation
Page 2-6 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
3.3 ATDE and Dispersive Fade Margin
The ATDE function, incorporated into the DEMOD, is a multiple-tap transversal equalizer that improves dispersive fade margin (DFM)—the receiver’s ability to resist dispersive fading. Digital microwave radios are vulnerable to fading caused by multi-path propagation. In multi-path propagation, microwave signals arriving at the receive site from reflective layers or areas are delayed relative to the direct signal. All signals combine at the receive antenna and can cause amplitude and phase distortion of the direct signal.
Table 2-B SP Shelf Module Requirements
Configuration MOD DEMOD MUX SYNDES SP PSU ACU NMU* SCU OWU* WTU*
Hot Standby/Hot Standby (HH)
2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 or 2* 1 2
Hot Standby/Space Diver-sity (HS)
2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 or 2* 1 2
Non-protected/Space Diver-sity (NS)
1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1
Frequency Diversity/Fre-quency Diver-sity (FF)
2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1
Non-protected/Non-protected (NN)
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
* Optional modules. SCU can be protected or non-protected. OWU and NMU are non-pro-tected. The NMU module is installed on the ACU unit. First SCU standard, the protected SCU is optional.
PSU SCU ACU MOD DEMOD MUX SYNDES SYNDESWTU PSUSCUOWUMODDEMODMUX WTU
F-0100A
Radio BRadio A
Figure 2-2. Signal Processing Shelf in Protected Configuration
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual Page 2-7
Normally this distortion is minimal and easily handled by the receiver because the direct signal is stronger than the reflected signals. However, under fading conditions the direct signal may be attenuated and the distortion increased to the point where frequency selective notches result and dispersive fading is present. The ATDE equalizes amplitude and delay distortions of microwave links with excessive multi-path activity.
4.0 Equipment ConfigurationsCM7/8 equipment configurations include channel capacities, protection configurations, and repeater arrangements.
4.1 Protection
For standby protection of the radio equipment, traffic is automatically transferred from in-service to standby facilities in the event of malfunction of the in-service equipment. A manual transfer switch is provided as a menu item on the local access port for off-line equipment maintenance of the primary or standby equipment. See Appendix B for local access port menu and screen selection.
The CM7/8 radio operates with Hot Standby, Space Diversity, Frequency Diversity or Non-protected transmitters and receivers.
1. Hot Standby Transmitter, Hot Standby Receiver (HH): In this protection configuration, a single antenna port on the radio connects to the antenna system and the radio is equipped with two of each module; one for primary and one for standby. Figure 2-3 illustrates signal flow in this configuration.
!"#$%$&'( )*++, -
!"#$%$&'( )*++, -
Figure 2-3. Hot Standby Tx/Rx (HH) Signal Flow
Chapter 2 Principles of Operation
Page 2-8 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
2. Hot Standby Transmitter, Space Diversity Receiver (HS): This configuration is similar to the Hot Standby Transmitter/Hot Standby Receiver, except for the addition of a second antenna port for the B Receiver and the ability to perform errorless receiver switching based on differ-ences in the signal quality coming into the two receivers.
Figure 2-4 illustrates signal flow in this configuration.
3. Non-protected Transmitter, Space Diversity Receiver (NS): This configuration is similar to the Hot Standby Transmitter/ Space Diversity Receiver, except that this protection configura-tion offers no RF Unit, receiver redundancy. Figure 2-5 illustrates signal flow in this configu-ration.
4. Frequency Diversity Transmitter, Frequency Diversity Receiver (FF): In this configura-tion both the A and B radios operate on separate frequencies, an option that is used most often in international applications. Figure 2-6 illustrates the FF configuration sig-nal flow.
5. Non-protected Transmitter, Non-protected Receiver (NN): This protection configuration offers no redundancy in the RF Unit. Figure 2-7 illustrates signal flow in this configuration.
FromMOD
A
ToDEMOD
A
F-1133
TX A
RX A
RX B
RF DistFilter
RF DistFilter
TX B
LO
LO
SYNTHESIZER
SYNTHESIZER
RF DistFilter Antenna Port
Antenna Port
FromMOD
B
ToDEMOD
B
± (20 to 60) VDC Power Supply A To TX A / RX A
± (20 to 60) VDC Power Supply B To TX B / RX B
Figure 2-4. Hot-Standby Tx, Space Diversity Rx (HS) Signal Flow
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual Page 2-9
ToDEMOD
A
FromMODA
F-1131C
TX A
RX A
RX B
Antenna PorRF DistFilter
RF DistFilter
LO
SYNTHESIZER
SYNTHESIZER
ToDEMOD
B
± (20 to 60) VDC Power Supply A To TX A / RX A
± (20 to 60) VDC Power Supply B To TX B / RX B
Figure 2-5. Non-Protected Tx, Space Diversity Rx (NS) Signal Flow
!"#$%$&'( )*++, -
!"#$%$&'( )*++, -
Figure 2-6. Frequency Diversity Tx/Rx (FF) Signal Flow
Chapter 2 Principles of Operation
Page 2-10 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
4.2 Repeater Arrangements
Connect two terminals back-to-back at the 155.52-Mbit level to configure the radio as a repeater.
Figure 2-8 shows a back-to-back terminal configuration for the CM7/8 radio.
± (20 to 60) VDC Power Supply A To TX A / RX A
ToDEMOD
A
FromMOD
A
F-1132b
TX A
RX A
Antenna PortRF DistFilter
RF DistFilter
LO
SYNTHESIZER
Figure 2-7. Non-protected Tx/Rx (NN) Signal Flow
Figure 2-8. Back-to-Back Terminal Configuration
.
.
.
.
.
.
#$/
00 1
00 1
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual Page 2-11
5.0 Protection SwitchingThe CM7/8 is available in Hot-Standby or Hot-Standby/Space Diversity configurations with switching protection. The Alarm and Control Unit provides protection switching for both transmitters and receivers.
5.1 Monitored Hot Standby Tx/Rx Switching (HH)
The CM7/8 radio provides various levels of protection (Figure 2-9), although it may also be configured in a non-protected status. The hot standby configuration is often selected because it is easy to configure and a stable method of protection.
In the hot-standby configuration, two radios are set up with identical hardware, so that either radio can function as the primary or standby radio. All performance specifications are met regardless of on-line status.
One radio is designated as the main radio, radio A, and the other radio is designated as the hot-standby radio, or radio B. In the event of an operation failure, operations will switch from radio A to radio B. Performance is unaffected once a switchover has occurred.
To/FromAntenna
F-0715aa
Coupler
TXU
RXU
RXU
TXU
MOD
DEMOD
DEMOD
MOD
TX
RX
RX
TX
TX
RX
TX
RX
RX
TX
RX
TX
SCU/WTU
SCU/WTU
SYNDES
SYNDES MUX
MUX
DS1/DS3/OC-3
WTU/SCU
MUX RXONLINE
CONTROL
WTU/SCURX
CONTROL
WTU/SCUSEL
CONTROL
MUX TXONLINE
CONTROL
RF RXONLINE
CONTROL
RF TXONLINE
CONTROL
1
(Side A)
(Side A)
(SideB)
(SideB)
(SideB)
(SideB)
(Side A)
(Side A)
2
3
(Side A)
(SideB)
(Side A)
(SideB)
(Side A)
(SideB)
Figure 2-9. Monitored Hot Standby Switching Diagram
Chapter 2 Principles of Operation
Page 2-12 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
5.2 Automatic Switching vs. Manual Switching
A switchover between the A and B radios can occur automatically or manually.
Automatic switching occurs when:
a module fails and operations switch automatically to the other unit, or in a space diversity configuration, a fade affects one of the two receive paths more severely than the other.
Manual switching is a user-controlled switchover used for maintenance and testing purposes. Manual switching is available for any level of operations that may be protected by automatic switching.
CAUTION
Prior to manually switching a CM7/8 radio or removing a module, be sureto confirm the online status of the radio. To do this, execute the followingseries of menu selections, beginning at the Main menu: (For a completemenu diagram and full menu screens, see Appendix B.)
1. Select Alarm and Status (020) and press <Enter>.
2. Select System (021) and press <Enter>.
3. Select Show TX and RX Path (040) and press <Enter>.
The screen clearly identifies the on-line status of the radio.
Note: As a shortcut for displaying Screen 040, the user may from anyscreen simply enter “040”and press <Enter.>
Certain modules of the CM7/8, such as the SYNDES, SCU, WTU and MUX contain both transmit and receive signal processing sections.
In modules containing both transmit and receive signal processing, only the portion of the module that fails will switch. A failure in the transmit portion of one of these modules will cause a switching of only the transmit section, while leaving the receive section in its current state.
To provide more efficient protection for transmitting and receiving operations, you can route transmit traffic through the B radio SYNDES and B radio MUX, and route receive traffic through the A radio SYNDES and A radio MUX. Thus, in the event of a failure, you can switch the surviving direction (transmit or receive) off the failed module at a scheduled low usage period, rather than during a high usage period.
5.2.1 What Happens During an A SYNDES Module Failure
If the entire A radio is on-line and the A radio SYNDES module experiences a failure in its transmit section, only the transmit section of the B radio SYNDES and B radio MUX
!
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual Page 2-13
switch online. The A radio MOD, A radio DEMOD, A radio TXU, A radio RXU, and A radio SCU remain on-line, as do the receive sections of the A radio SYNDES and A radio MUX.
5.3 Monitored Hot-Standby Transmit Switching
The CM7/8 radio features multiple transmitting and receiving switch levels.
5.3.1 Transmitter Switch Levels
The CM7/8 radio Transmit side contains four switch levels.
1. SYNDES MUX,
2. TXU-MOD,
3. SCU,
4. and WTU.
See Figure 2-10.
To/FromAntenna
F-0715aa
Coupler
TXU
RXU
RXU
TXU
MOD
DEMOD
DEMOD
MOD
TX
RX
RX
TX
TX
RX
TX
RX
RX
TX
RX
TX
SCU/WTU
SCU/WTU
SYNDES
SYNDES MUX
MUX
DS1/DS3/OC-3
WTU/SCU
MUX RXONLINE
CONTROL
WTU/SCURX
CONTROL
WTU/SCUSEL
CONTROL
MUX TXONLINE
CONTROL
RF RXONLINE
CONTROL
RF TXONLINE
CONTROL
1
(Side A)
(Side A)
(SideB)
(SideB)
(SideB)
(SideB)
(Side A)
(Side A)
2
3
(Side A)
(SideB)
(Side A)
(SideB)
(Side A)
(SideB)
Figure 2-10. Monitored Hot Standby Switching
Chapter 2 Principles of Operation
Page 2-14 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
5.4 Transmitter SYNDES-MUX Switch
As shown in Figure 2-10, the 155.52-Mbit signal enters the transmit sections of both A and B radio SYNDES modules. The OUTPUT of the transmit section of the A radio SYNDES goes to the INPUT of the transmit section of the A radio MUX. Similarly, the OUTPUT of the transmit section of the B radio SYNDES goes to the INPUT of the transmit section of the B radio MUX.
In the SYNDES-MUX switch the MUX-TX Online control selects the OUTPUT for the A/B MOD’s INPUT. The MUX and SYNDES are switched together. Thus, the OUTPUTS of both the A and B radio MUX can be switched to be applied to the INPUT of either the A or B radio MOD.
Switchover Example: During a failure of the transmit section of the A radio MUX, the transmit section of the B radio MUX and the B radio SYNDES are placed on-line.
5.5 Transmitter TXU-MOD Switch
The second switch plane on the transmit side is the TXU-MOD switch. The output from the A side MOD goes to the input of the A side TXU. Similarly, the output of the B side MOD goes to the input of the B side TXU. After conversion and amplification in the TXU, the TXU-MOD switch plane is used to determine whether the A or B TXU should be on. In this way, the MOD and TXU switch together. For example, if the A side MOD fails, the B side MOD and B side TXU take over operation.
Switchover Example: During a switchover caused by a failure of the A radio MOD, the switching logic connects to the output of the B radio MOD and the B radio TXU to the antenna.
5.6 Transmitter SCU Switch
The third transmitter switch level is the SCU switch level. This switch level is valid only when protected SCUs are equipped. This level is provided to allow switching of the protected SCUs without impacting the primary traffic on the radio.
Switchover Example: In the event of a failure in the A radio SCU, the B radio SCU is placed on-line.
5.7 Transmit WTU Switch
WTU switch, the fourth transmit switch level, is valid only when protected WTUs are equipped and protected. Protection of the WTU allows switchovers of the WTUs in the event of a failure without impacting the primary traffic on the radio.
Switchover Example: In the event of a failure in the A radio WTU, the B radio WTU is placed online.
5.8 Performing Manual Switchovers
This section provides the necessary steps for performing manual switching. The CM7/8 radio requires the installation of a computer/terminal or modem for monitoring and controlling the system. Instructions for connecting this computer/terminal or modem to the CM7/8 are included in Chapter 4, “Equipment Installation.” Detailed information about the various available screens is found in Appendix B, ” Screens.”
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual Page 2-15
5.8.1 Performing a Manual SYNDES-MUX Switchover
Perform the SYNDES-MUX switchover manually from the Main menu, by performing the following steps.
1. Select Control and Maintenance (070) and press <Enter>.
2. Select Path Switching (071) and press <Enter>.
3. Move cursor to MUX-SYNDES.
4. Select whether you want to:
a. switch paths automatically
b. switch radio A on-line
c. switch radio B on-line
d. lock the current selection on-line.
5. Press <Enter>.
For a complete menu diagram and full menu screens see Appendix B.
5.8.2 Performing a Manual TXU-MOD Switchover
To perform the TXU-MOD switch manually from the Main menu, perform the following steps. Select Control and Maintenance (070) and press <Enter>.
1. Select Path Switching (071) and press <Enter>.
2. Move cursor to TXU-MOD.
3. Select whether you want to:
a. switch paths automatically
b. switch radio A on-line
c. switch radio B on-line
d lock the current selection on-line.
4. Press <Enter>.
For a complete menu diagram and full menu screens see Appendix B.
5.8.3 Performing a Manual RXU-DEMOD Switchover
Perform a manual RXU-DEMOD switchover from the Main menu, by following these steps.
1. Select Control and Maintenance (070) and press <Enter>.
2. Select Path Switching (071) and press <Enter>.
3. Move cursor to RXU-DEMOD.
4. Select whether you want to
a. switch paths automatically
b. switch radio A on-line
Chapter 2 Principles of Operation
Page 2-16 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
c. switch radio B on-line,
d. lock the current selection on-line.
5. Press <Enter>.
Note: This level of switching is primarily used in space diversity receiver configurations, and as such, is always errorless (no frame errors; no bit errors.)
For a complete menu diagram and full menu screens see Appendix B.
5.8.4 Performing a Manual SCU Switchover
Perform a manual SCU switchover from the Main menu by following these steps.
1. Select Control and Maintenance (070) and press <Enter>.
2. Select Path Switching (071) and press <Enter>.
3. Move cursor to SCU.
4. Select whether you want to:
a. switch paths automatically
b. switch radio A on-line
c. switch radio B on-line
d. lock the current selection on-line.
5. Press <Enter>.
For a complete menu diagram and full menu screens see Appendix B.
5.8.5 Performing the WTU Switch Manually
If the WTU has been configured in a protected state, you can perform the WTU switch manually from the Main menu, perform the following steps.
1. Select Control and Maintenance (070) and press <Enter>.
2. Select Path Switching (071) and press <Enter>.
3. Move cursor to WTU.
4. Select whether you want to:
a. switch paths automatically
b. switch radio A on-line
c. switch radio B on-line
d. lock the current selection on-line.Press <Enter>
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual Page 2-17
.
For a complete menu diagram and full menu screens see Appendix B.
5.9 Hot-Standby Protected Receive Switching Levels
The receive side of the radio also has four switching levels:
1. RXU-DEMOD
2. SYNDES-MUX
3. SCU
4. WTU
5.9.1 Receiver RXU-DEMOD Switch
As shown in Figure 2-11, the received signal is split and applied to both RXUs. The first stage in each RXU is the preamplifier. The output is applied to each RXU's downconverter sections.
The A radio RXU then sends its amplified 70-MHz signal to the A radio DEMOD while the B radio RXU sends its amplified 70 MHz signal to the B radio DEMOD. The outputs of the A and B radio DEMOD can switch to either receive section of the A or B side MUX. This level of switching is called the RXU-DEMOD switch level, provided primarily for space diversity configurations.
To/FromAntenna
F-0715aa
Coupler
TXU
RXU
RXU
TXU
MOD
DEMOD
DEMOD
MOD
TX
RX
RX
TX
TX
RX
TX
RX
RX
TX
RX
TX
SCU/WTU
SCU/WTU
SYNDES
SYNDES MUX
MUX
DS1/DS3/OC-3
WTU/SCU
MUX RXONLINE
CONTROL
WTU/SCURX
CONTROL
WTU/SCUSEL
CONTROL
MUX TXONLINE
CONTROL
RF RXONLINE
CONTROL
RF TXONLINE
CONTROL
1
(Side A)
(Side A)
(SideB)
(SideB)
(SideB)
(SideB)
(Side A)
(Side A)
2
3
(Side A)
(SideB)
(Side A)
(SideB)
(Side A)
(SideB)
Figure 2-11. Monitored Hot Standby Switching (Repeated)
Chapter 2 Principles of Operation
Page 2-18 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
5.9.2 Receiver SYNDES-MUX Switch Level
The second switch level on the receive side is the SYNDES-MUX level. The output from the receive section of the A-radio MUX is applied to the input of the receive section of the A-radio SYNDES.
Similarly, the output from the receive section of the B-radio MUX is applied to the input of the receive section of the B-radio SYNDES. The SYNDES-MUX switch level determines whether the output from the receive section of the A-radio SYNDES or B-radio SYNDES is sent to the terminal block. A module failure involving the receiver section of the MUX, SYNDES, or both causes this level of switching.
5.9.3 Receiver SCU Switch
The third receiver switch is the SCU switch. This switch is only valid only when protected SCUs are used. This switch allows switching of the protected SCUs without impacting the primary traffic on the radio. In the event of a failure in the A radio SCU, B radio SCU is placed online.
5.9.4 Receive WTU Switch
The fourth receiver switch is the WTU switch. This switch level is valid only when protected WTUs are equipped. This level is provided to allow switching of the protected WTUs without impacting the primary traffic on the radio.
In the event of a failure in the A radio WTU, the B radio WTU is placed on line.
5.10 Monitored Hot-Standby Transmitter, Space DiversityReceiver Switching (HS)
The CM7/8 Monitored Hot-Standby Transmitter, Space Diversity Receiver (HS) radio configuration is very similar to the Monitored Hot-Standby Transmitter/Receiver (HH) radio configuration. Only the antenna branching network differs between Space Diversity and Hot-Standby radio configurations. For specific Space Diversity signal flow details, refer to Figures 2-4 and 2-12.
Note: The Space Diversity protection switching function is equivalent to the Hot Standby radio configuration.
For details of the protection switching operation, refer to Section 5.1.
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual Page 2-19
6.0 LoopbacksThe CM7/8 Loopback modes, shown in Figure 2-14, fall into two general classifications: local and remote.
Local loopback refers to a connection that causes loopback to occur on the local radio and permits observation at the local radio. Remote loopback refers to a connection that causes loopback to occur on the remote radio and permits observation at the local radio.
Loopback modes available on the CM7/8 are:
Loopback is a method of testing and troubleshooting segments of the CM7/8 system transmit and receive functions. Access loopbacks through the Local Access Port on the
RF Local Loopback IF Local Loopback MUX Local Loopback
SYNDES Local Loopback SYNDES Remote Loopback
SCU Local Loopback SCU Remote Loopback
WTU Local Loopback, WTU Remote Loopback
To/FromAntenna
F-0715aa
Coupler
TXU
RXU
RXU
TXU
MOD
DEMOD
DEMOD
MOD
TX
RX
RX
TX
TX
RX
TX
RX
RX
TX
RX
TX
SCU/WTU
SCU/WTU
SYNDES
SYNDES MUX
MUX
DS1/DS3/OC-3
WTU/SCU
MUX RXONLINE
CONTROL
WTU/SCURX
CONTROL
WTU/SCUSEL
CONTROL
MUX TXONLINE
CONTROL
RF RXONLINE
CONTROL
RF TXONLINE
CONTROL
1
(Side A)
(Side A)
(SideB)
(SideB)
(SideB)
(SideB)
(Side A)
(Side A)
2
3
(Side A)
(SideB)
(Side A)
(SideB)
(Side A)
(SideB)
Figure 2-12. Hot Standby Tx, Space Diversity Rx (HS) Switching
Chapter 2 Principles of Operation
Page 2-20 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
front of the Access Panel. This port allows access to a fully menu-driven interface by a VT100 compatible terminal, making it easy to locate the various parameters to monitor or control. Loopbacks on main and standby side of the protected configurations remain independent of each other.
Important: When a remote loopback is requested, the loopback is performed on the far-end radio, and not the radio from which the request was initiated. In a remote loopback, the far end traffic is looped back toward the local radio.
6.1 Traffic Requirements
The transmit and receive traffic may be routed through different parts of the radio. However, if you intend to initiate local loopbacks without interfering with the on-line traffic, be sure that the transmit traffic and the receive traffic are routed through the same part of the off-line radio.
6.2 How to Perform a Loopback
The Loopback for each piece of equipment or function is discussed in each section. The Loopback menus, submenus, and loopback screens are provided in Appendix B.
Important: Before performing any loopbacks, determine the on-line status of the system using screen <40>.
When the radio is in any local loopback mode, the manual LED on the access panel blinks at a one-second interval. This is to alert the user that the system is set up for loopbacks. When any remote loopback mode is in effect, this LED blinks at both the local and remote radios.
To initiate the loopback function perform these steps for each area of equipment you want to test, then follow the remaining procedures shown on screens and in each section of this manual.
On your computer/terminal system monitoring screen:
1. Select <Control and Maintenance (70)> and press <Enter>.
2. Select <Loopback> and press <Enter>.
3. Select the screen number for the equipment you want to test, and <Enter>.
4. Select whether you want to test radio A or B, if you have two units in the configuration.
5. Follow any remaining steps.
6.3 RF Local Loopback
In RF Local Loopback, the TXU monitor port output signal is applied to the adjacent RXU. The RF Local Loopback test helps isolate waveguide, antenna-feed, or path-related problems. A successful loopback ensures that the entire terminal is working normally up to the RF waveguide filters.
Note: The RF Local Loopback test affects all traffic on the selected radio. On protected sys-tems, perform RF Local Loopback on the off-line radio. Figure 2-13 shows the RF loopback circuit setup.
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual Page 2-21
6.3.1 Initiating the RF Local Loopback
Perform the following procedure from the Main menu to initiate RF Local Loopback:
1. Select Path Switching (071) and press <Enter>.
2. Set the desired TXU and its adjacent RXU online.
3. Connect the OFFLINE TX MON output from the desired TXU to the RF IN port on its adjacent RXU by using two 20 dB pads and a low-loss coaxial cable.
4. Connect the LPBK LO OUT from the desired TXU to LPBK LO IN port on its adjacent RXU.
5. Flip the RF Loopback switch to the ON position on the RXU being tested.
6. Select Reset Statistics (006) and press <Enter>.
7. Press <Enter> to clear performance counters on radio A, radio B, or both sides.
8. Select number 4, Performance Monitoring, then press <Enter>.
The performance counters should record no errors on the radio under loopback test. The AGC and RSL levels are not accurate when performing loopback testing. Adjustments SHOULD NOT be made based upon these levels.
Note: Items 1, 2, and 3 are not required on a non-protected radio
Figure 2-13. RF Loopback Circuit Setup
.
2(
3
45
3
.
2
.
.
.
65
3.
#$%1
#$78.
$78.
((
((
#$7
. .
Chapter 2 Principles of Operation
Page 2-22 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
6.4 IF Local Loopback
Note: IF Loopback is not supported in 3DS3, SONET/SDH, and 100BaseT radios.
In the IF Local Loopback, the MOD is connected to the DEMOD. As Figure 2-14 shows, a signal is input on the local radio and looped back to be output from the local radio. This aids in determining whether a problem is in the RF section or the SP section of the radio. The A and B radio loopbacks are independent.
Note: The IF Local loopback affects all data and WTU /SCU traffic on the selected radio.
IF Local Loopback can be performed on the on-line radio, off-line radio, or both radios at once. If performed on the off-line radio, the on-line radio can still carry live traffic without interruption.
To establish IF Local Loopback, use an external 50 ohm cable (P/N 3085397H01), and connect it between the Mod and Demod MCX connectors.
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual Page 2-23
TX
A
RX
A
RX
B
Ant
enna
Por
t
TX
B
LO LO
RF
-TX
On-
line
Con
trol
RF
Dis
tF
ilterR
F D
ist
Filt
er
SY
NT
HE
SIZ
ER
SY
NT
HE
SIZ
ER
SC
U A
Tx
Rx
SY
ND
ES
A
SY
ND
ES
B
SC
U B
Rx
Tx
MU
X A
MU
X B
DS
1/D
S3
Ser
vice
Cha
nnel
sR
x
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Tx
MO
D B
DE
MO
DB
MO
D A
DE
MO
DA
Rx
Tx
F-1
246
WT
U A
Tx
Rx
WT
U B
Tx
Rx
DAT
A C
H
WT
U L
ocal
Loop
back
WT
U R
emot
eLo
opba
ck
SC
U R
emot
eLo
opba
ck
MU
X L
ocal
Loop
back
IF L
ocal
Loop
back
IF L
ocal
Loop
back
SY
ND
ES
Rem
ote
Loop
back
SC
U R
emot
eLo
opba
ck
WT
U R
emot
eLo
opba
ckW
TU
Loc
alLo
opba
ck
SC
U L
ocal
Loop
back
SY
ND
ES
Loc
alLo
opba
ck
MU
X L
ocal
Loop
back
SY
ND
ES
Rem
ote
Loop
back
SY
ND
ES
Loc
alLo
opba
ck
SC
U L
ocal
Loop
back
RF
Loc
alLo
opba
ck
DS
1/D
S3/
OC
-3
Figu
re 2
-14.
R
F L
oop
bac
k C
ircu
it S
etu
p
Chapter 2 Principles of Operation
Page 2-24 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
6.5 MUX Local Loopback
In the MUX Local Loopback , the transmit and receive sides of the MUX are connected together. See Figure 2-14. A signal, input on the local radio, goes to the Transmit side of the MUX. It then loops back through the receive side of the MUX to the output of the local radio. This determines whether a problem occurs within or after the MUX/SYNDES section.
The MUX Local Loopback can be performed on the on-line radio, off-line radio, or both radios at once. If it is performed on the off-line radio, the on-line radio still carries live traffic without interruption.
To initiate the MUX Local Loopback, perform the following procedure from the Loopback menu.
1. Select MUX Local Loopback (083) and press <Enter>.
2. Select whether you want to the A radio or the B radio, and press <Enter>.
6.6 SYNDES Loopback
6.6.1 Local Loopback
The SYNDES local loopback identifies wiring problems between the SYNDES and the customer cross-connect point. In SYNDES local loopback (Figure 2-14), the transmit and receive sides of the SYNDES connect. A 155.52-Mbit signal is input on the local radio and sent to the SYNDES transmit side.
The SYNDES local loopback can be performed on the on-line radio, but any tributary you loopback will disrupt traffic normally carried on that channel.
To initiate the SYNDES local loopback, perform the following procedure from the loopback menu, screen (081).
1. Select SYNDES Loopbacks (084) and press <Enter>.
2. Select Local online, and press <Enter>.
3. Select the tributary you want to loop and press <Enter>.
6.7 Remote Loopback
In SYNDES remote loopback, the receive and transmit sides of the remote SYNDES are connected together. As shown in Figure 2-14, a signal from the local radio access panel and sent through the microwave link to the receive side of the remote SYNDES. It then loops back through the transmit side of the remote SYNDES, back through the microwave link, to be output from the local radio. Remote loopback adds the ability to check the far-end and local radio RF sections for problems.
It is important to note that when a remote loopback is requested, the loopback is performed on the far end radio and not the radio from which the request was initiated. In a remote loopback, the far end traffic is looped back toward the local radio.
To initiate the SYNDES remote loopback, perform the following procedure from the loopback screen (081).
1. Select SYNDES Loopbacks (084) and press <Enter>.
2. Select Remote and press <Enter>.
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual Page 2-25
3. Select the tributary you want to loop, or enter 99 for all tributaries, and press <Enter>.
6.8 Service Channel Unit Loopback
6.8.1 Local Loopback
In the SCU Local Loopback, the transmit and receive sides of the SCU are connected together. As shown in Figure 2-14, a signal is input on the local radio and sent to the transmit side of the SCU. It is then looped back through the receive side of the SCU to be output of the local radio. This aids in identifying problems with wiring between the SCU and external equipment. The A and B radio loopbacks are independent.
The SCU Local Loopback can be performed on the on-line radio, off-line radio, or both radios at once. To initiate the SCU Local Loopback, perform the following procedure from the Loopback screen menu.
1. Select SCU Loopbacks (085) and press <Enter>.
2. Select Local Side A or Local Side B and press <Enter>.
Note: The MUX must be installed in the SP shelf to perform the Local Loopback.
6.8.2 Remote Loopback
In the SCU Remote Loopback, the transmit and receive sides of the SCU are connected together. As shown in Figure 2-14, a signal is input on the local radio and sent to the receive side of the remote SCU. It then loops back through the tansmit side of the remote SCU to be output from the local radio. This enables you to test far end and local radio SCU, MUX, MOD, DEMOD, and RF sections for problems without interrupting data tributaries.
Note: When a remote loopback is performed, be sure that the radio to be is on-line. The remote SCU’s Tx and Rx path must not be crossed when performing an SCU remote loop-back. The VF receive output signal is about 3 dB higher than the through path loss.
It is important to note that when a remote loopback is requested, the loopback is performed on the far end radio and not the radio from which the request was initiated. In a remote loopback the far end traffic is looped back toward the local radio.
To initiate the SCU Remote Loopback, perform the following procedure from the Loopback screen menu.
1. Select SCU Loopbacks (085) and press <Enter>.
2. Select Remote Loopback, Digital or Analog, and press <Enter>.
6.9 WTU Loopback
6.9.1 Local Loopback
In WTU Local Loopback, the transmit and receive sides of the WTU are connected together. As shown in Figure 2-14, a signal is input on the local radio and sent to the Transmit side of the WTU. It is then looped back through the Receive side of the WTU to be output from the local radio. This aids in identifying problems with wiring between the WTU and external equipment.
Chapter 2 Principles of Operation
Page 2-26 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
WTU Local Loopback can be performed on the on-line radio, off-line radio, or both radios at once. To initiate WTU Local Loopback, perform the following procedure from the Loopback screen menu.
1. Select WTU Loopbacks (086) and press <Enter>.
2. Move the cursor to Local Side A or Local Side B.
3. Choose whether you want to:
a. turn the loopback off
b. set the local loopback on the DS1 Channel
c. Set the local loopback on the Data channel
4. Press <Enter>.
6.9.2 Remote Loopback
In WTU Remote Loopback, transmit and receive sides of the WTU are connected together. As shown in Figure 2-14, a signal is input on the local radio and sent to the Receive side of the remote WTU. It is then looped back through the Transmit side of the remote WTU to be output from the local radio. This provides the ability to far-end WTU for problems.
Note: The remote WTU Tx and Rx path must not be crossed when performing a WTU re-mote loopback.
Important: When a remote loopback is requested, the loopback is performed on the far-end radio, and the far end traffic is looped back toward the local radio.
To initiate the WTU Local Loopback, perform the following procedure from the Main menu.
1. Select Control and Maintenance (070) and press <Enter>.
2. Select Loopback/Monitoring (081) and press <Enter>.
3. Select WTU Loopbacks (086) and press <Enter>.
4. Move the cursor to Remote Loopback.
5. Choose whether you want to:
a. turn the loopback off
b. set the remote loopback on the DS1 channel
c. set the remote loopback on the 9600-baud data channel
6. Press <Enter>.
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual Page 2-27
7.0 Automatic Power ControlAutomatic Power Control (APC) is used in the CM7/8 radio to minimize power consumption, maximize equipment reliability, ease coordination of the product into areas with other similar equipment, provide protection against fades, and continue to deliver high overall, on-demand system gain.
For example, the SONET radio normally operates at +13 dBm power output, but in cases of severe fade the radio automatically adjusts to +23 dBm. In a CM7/8 radio with Automatic Power Control, the transmit power is held 10 dB lower than maximum for the majority of the time.
During a fade, however, the transmitter can increase its output power by 10 dB with the DHP option (Page 2-2), to reduce the effects of that fade. Holding the transmitter power lower allows the power amplifiers to run cooler and, therefore, extend their lives. It also reduces the input power consumption and eases frequency coordination. The latter is due to the fact that the CM7/8 “APC low” transmitter power is used for interference analysis while the “APC high” transmitter power is used for path calculation of reliability. Note that the DHP option operates only in the APC high mode.
In the CM7/8 SONET radio, APC is normally automatic and requires no user intervention. The two criteria used to determine when to set APC high are BER performance and RSL. The BER must be worse than 10-11 and the RSL must be within 15 dB of the specified threshold before APC turns on. This prevents APC from coming on due to module failures or selective fading. APC stays on as long as the fade exists. APC goes low when the fade condition stops.
The APC function can be enabled and disabled with the APC Option switch (Switch 3, Rocker 8) on the Alarm and Control Unit (ACU).
7.1 Manually Activating the Automatic Power Control for Loopback
If you wish to manually activate the APC, in order to check radio or path performance, follow these steps from the Main menu:
1. Select Control and Maintenance (070) and press <Enter>.
2. Select APC (087) and press <Enter>.
3. Select manual APC and set time from 1 - 15 minutes.
4. After time-out of when finished tests, return APC to AUTO mode.
You can force the APC to be turned on for an indefinite period. This can be done in one of two ways:
From the Main menu (002):
1. Select Control and Maintenance (070) and press <Enter>.
2. Select APC (087) and press <Enter>.
3. Select Manual APC and set for “99 = Forever.”
Chapter 2 Principles of Operation
Page 2-28 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
Using the above method will result in APC always being turned on until you choose to turn it either off or back to the Auto Mode, via Screen 87. However if the radio or ACU power is cycled, the APC will default back to the Auto Mode and the transmitter power will decrease by 10 dB. To avoid this, set the radio to APC always ON, even after a power cycle or ACU reset. To set APC always on:
1. Verify on the ACU that switch 3-rocker 8 is set to the closed position (APC option enabled.)
2. On the ACU, set switch 2-rocker 7 to the open position (Enable APC Manual ON at power up.)
Note: Setting the APC to “Manual ON” or “Manual OFF,” (as is done in all of the above steps) causes the “Manual” status LED on the Access Panel to light.
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 08/04/03 Page 3-1
1.0 IntroductionRadio modules and their part numbers are listed in Table 3-A. The table also lists the section in this chapter that describes each module.
Table 3-A. CM7/8 SONET/SDH Modules
Section # Module Part Number
3-1 Radio Cabinet MHN6126
Access Panel, optical & electrical 28DS1/3DS3,/155-Mbit
MGN8112
Access Panel, optical only 8209190-00
Access Panel, optical, SNMP option 8209296-00
Access Panel, electrical, SNMP option 8209296-01
SP Backplane 0185509F06
RF Backplane 0185520K02
Equipment Rack 8209119-xx
Accessory Kit MLN7730
3-2 RF Distribution See Section 3-2
3-3 Transmitter Unit (TXU), Std. Pwr. MTL850x (7GHz)MTL853x (8GHz)
Transmitter Unit (TXU), High Pwr. MTL851x (7GHz)MTL854x (8GHz)
Transmitter Unit (TXN), DHP Pwr. MTL852x (7GHz)MTL855x (8GHz)
3-4 Receiver Unit (RXU), Band 7-1 MRL8166
Receiver Unit (RXU), Band 7-2 MRL8167
Receiver Unit (RXU), Band 7-3 MRL8168
Receiver Unit (RXU), Band 7-4 MRL8169
Receiver Unit (RXU), Band 8-1 MRL8170
Receiver Unit (RXU), Band 8-2 MRL8171
Receiver Unit (RXU), Band 8-3 MRL8172
Receiver Unit (RXU), Band 8-4 MRL8173
3-5 Radio Frequency Power Supply Unit (RF PSU) MPN8187
3-6 Signal Processing Power Supply Unit (SP PSU) MPN6050
3-7 Alarm and Control Unit (ACU) MLN7195
ACU Software MVN4025
3-8 Modulator (MOD) 8000514-00
3-9 Demodulator (DEMOD) 8000515-00
Chapter 3Module Descriptions
Chapter 3 Module Descriptions
Page 3-2 08/04/03 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
Each section divides into three subsections:
1. General Information describes the module's purpose and its application in the radio, as well as any optional versions of the module.
2. Description of Function contains a block diagram and description of the module's operation.
3. Front Panel Functions illustrates and describes all front panel functions related to that module which can be controlled by the user, including jumper and switch locations and settings.
Note: The first drawing in each section is representative and does not contain all of the module components.
3-10 Multiplexer (MUX) – DS1 WTU Operation 8000513-00
Multiplexer (MUX) – E1 WTU Operation 8000513-01
3-11 Synchronizer/Desynchronizer (SYNDES): Optical Multi-mode (MM) Operation
8000516-01
Synchronizer/Desynchronizer (SYNDES):Electrical Operation
8000516-02
Synchronizer/Desynchronizer (SYNDES): Enables Optical Single-mode (SM) Operation
8000516-03
Synchronizer/Desynchronizer (SYNDES) Optical Multi-mode (MM) Dual Output
8000516-04
Synchronizer/Desynchronizer (SYNDES) Optical Single-mode (SM) Dual Output
8000516-05
3-12 Service Channel Unit (SCU) Optional MLN7876
3-13 Orderwire Unit (OWU) Optional MLN7201
3-14 Wayside Traffic Unit (WTU): Optional, Enables DS1 Operation
MLN7330
Wayside Traffic Unit (WTU): Optional, Enables E1 Operation
MLN7329
3-15 Network Management Unit (NMU) Optional MLN1532
Table 3-A. CM7/8 SONET/SDH Modules (Continued)
Section # Module Part Number
CM SONET/SDH 2/27/04 Page 3-1-1
1.0 Introduction
The CM 155-Mbps digital microwave radio cabinet includes the access panel, RF distribution, signal processing (SP), and radio frequency (RF) sections.
2.0 Access PanelThe access panel is located at the top of the radio cabinet. The panel contains:
• operator controls
• alarm indicators
• office battery power distribution with four fuses
• Sub-D connectors for the local access port
• Connector panels for 155 Mbps data (optical and electrical)
• RJ11 jacks for service channels, orderwire, wayside traffic, and status/control extender
• Sub-D connectors for customer interface
Table 3-1-A. lists the Access Panel part numbers.
See Figure 3-1-1 to Figure 3-1-4 for the location of terminal blocks and other interface connectors.
Table 3-1-A. CM SONET\SDH Access Panels
Part Number Capacity Version
8209302-00 28DS1, 3DS3, 100BaseT,OC3/STM (155 Mbps)
NMS interface is included with optional NMU. Optical or 100BaseT Ethernet interfaces are installed as purchased.
MGN8112B 28xDS1,1-3DS3, 155 Mbps Optical Wayside on TELCO connectors,TTL and Relay I/O on DB connectors.
8209120-00 155-Mbps Optical/Electrical8209296-00 155 Mbps Optical SNMP option8209296-01 155 Mbps Electrical SNMP option
Section 3-1Radio Cabinet
Chapter 3 Radio Cabinet
Page 3-1-2 2/27/04 CM SONET/SDH
Figure 3-1-1 8209309-00 – Universal Access Panel for 28DS1, 3DS3, 100BaseT and SONET\SDH
Microwave Networks
CM SONET/SDH 2/27/04 Page 3-1-3
Figure 3-1-2 MGN8112 Early-Model Access Panel for 28xDS1, 3xDS3 and SONET/SDH
Figure 3-1-3 8209120-00 – Access Panel for SONET/SDH Optical & Electrical
Chapter 3 Radio Cabinet
Page 3-1-4 2/27/04 CM SONET/SDH
2.1 Principles of Operation
The access panel provides front access to indicators, controls, connections, and fuses required to operate the radio. The fuses, Figure 3-1-5, protect the radio against power surge.
The access panel also has a Local Access Port that interfaces the radio to a Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT). The LMT displays system status and alarms, and accepts commands for control and configuration of the radio and individual modules. The Local Access Port also provides access, through the LMT, to an event log and up to 7-days of performance statistics. Statistics include Bit Error Rate (BER), Errored Seconds (ES), and severely Errored Seconds (SES).
Figure 3-1-4 8209296-00 – Access Panel for SONET/SDH Optical & Electrical and SNMP NMS
Battery A
Battery B
Power Distribution
RF A
SP A
RFB
SP B
P9
TB1 TB1
RFA
SPA
RFB
SPB
0780-0494
Figure 3-1-5 Power Distribution Diagram
Microwave Networks
CM SONET/SDH 2/27/04 Page 3-1-5
2.2 Access Panel Features
Figure 3-1-6 shows the radio indicators, controls, and test points that the text below describes. See Chapter 4, Installation, for connector pin designations and Appendix G for SNMP connection.
INOUTHANDSET WTU LOCAL ACCESS
STATUS
20 - 28
11 - 19
+CH 25-28
WAYSIDE
CH 13-24
CH 1-12
28 DS1 I/O
MANUAL
INOUTOC-3 3DS3/SONET SYNDES
DS3 CH1 DS3 CH2 DS3 CH3
SYNDES
ACO
SONETSONET
MON OUT IN
SONET
AA
14V248V
NORMAL
05
ARF
TTL I/O
ALARM/CONTROL RELAYS
MINOR
FAILSECTION
DTE DCE
A53A
MAJOR
A5A3
AA5
10
RFAPS BSPB
4V284 V
NETWORK
251
26
26
1
1
J23 50
25
J22 50
25
26 J21 50
EASTWEST
16
5
9
25
15
13
8
14
9
1
1OUT
IN
1 32
VF 1
VF 2
SPKRDGTL CH2
1 32 SCEDGTL CH1
HANDSET WTU LOCAL ACCESS
STATUS
20 - 28
11 - 19
MANUAL
OUT3DS3/SONET SYNDES
DS3 CH1
SYNDES
ACO
SONETSONET
MON OUT IN
SONET
AA
14V248V
NORMAL
05
ARF
TTL I/O
ALARM/CONTROL RELAYS
MINOR
FAILSECTION
DTE DCE
A53A
MAJOR
A5A3
AA5
10
RFAPS BSPB
4V284 V
NETWORK
EASTWEST
16
5
9
25
15
13
8
14
9
1
1OUT
IN
1 32
VF 1
VF 2
SPKRDGTL CH2
1 32 SCEDGTL CH1
MLN8112B
8209120
INOUT
INOC-3
DS3 CH2 DS3 CH3
8209296
8
15
1
9
113
1425
all modules installed
3 5 8 9
12131415
18
19
1 2 4 6 7
1017
without modules installed
16 11
18
8209309-00
251
26 50
251
26 50
251
26 50
251
26 50
251
26 50
251
26 50
Figure 3-1-6 Access Panel Features
Chapter 3 Radio Cabinet
Page 3-1-6 2/27/04 CM SONET/SDH
The 8209302-00 access panel is the latest model for universal use on DS1, DS3, SONET, and 100BaseT radios. The factory installs an NMS interface with the optional Network Management Unit (NMU). OC-3 and 100BaseT Ethernet interfaces get installed to match radio capacity. The following are the interface kits for the access panel. The accessory kit includes cable, hardware, and assembly instructions. P4 NMU Kit8708191-01
• SNMP NMU Kit 8708262-01• 100BaseT Kit, Non-Protected 8708262-02• 100BaseT Kit, Protected 8708262-03• Access Panel Accessory Kit 8708220-xx
Table 3-1-B. lists configuration switch settings for the 8209302-00 access panel. Table 3-1-C. list configuration switch settings for the early-model MGN8112.
1. DS1 Connectors – J21, J22, & J23. 50-pin TELCO connectors for 100-Ω balanced DS1 line signals. J23 Includes wayside channel connections for the optional WTU. Jumpers on the Line I/O board behind the access panel route the out-of-band wayside for use on data channel 1 I/O pins (Chapter 4). This is not available on the 155-Mbps electrical access panel.s.
2. DS3 and SONET Electrical Connectors – 50-Ω BNC connectors for DS3 or 155-Mbps data I/O. Jumpers on the rear of the access panel set DS3 configuration.
8209120 & 8209296 – SONET electrical signals enter and leave the top-row connectors as labeled. Bottom-row connectors remain unused.
3. Network Ports – For P4 (MNI proprietary) Network: Two modular jacks that connect propri-etary network management data between co-located radios and to Telescan network manage-ment system. Uni- or omni-directional configuration requires an associated Network Management Unit (NMU) and the configuration of the Network Bridge Interface.
Network Ports – For SNMP: Two modular jacks connect radio support data to an Ethernet net-work. The LINK indicator lights when the radio is connected to an Ethernet network. The blink-ing ACTY, activity, indicator shows data transfer. For more SNMP network information, see Appendix G.
4. LED Indicators
Jumpers E3, E4, E5, E61-2 Wayside Channel2-3 DS1 CHNL 1 (for 4, 8, 12DS1 configurations)
Jumpers E1 & E2
1-2 for 1DS3 2-3 for 3DS3
East West Port Configuration
E4 (in) E10 (in) ACU/NMU—Master/SlaveE5 E12 East/West—Omni-directional
MAJ LED Red LED indicates a service-affecting alarm. MIN LED Yellow LED indicates a non-service-affecting alarm.SECTION FAIL Red LED indicates an upstream or downstream major alarm.
Microwave Networks
CM SONET/SDH 2/27/04 Page 3-1-7
5. Fuses – Four telecommunications type fuses (GMT) for A Radio RF, A Radio SP, B Radio RF, B Radio SP.
6. VF Connectors – VF1, VF2. Each VF channel has three four-position, four-pin modular jacks used for orderwire VF bridge connections.
7. DGTL CHn Jack – DGTL CH1, CH2. Four-position, four-pin modular jack used for digital channel connections. These channels accommodate 150 bps to 19.2 kbps asynchronous data at RS232 levels. Set data rates with jumpers on the SCU.
8. SCE Jack – Four-position, four-pin modular jack used for Status and Control Extender (SCE) connections. The SCE extends the Alarm/Control relays to provide system alarm, status, and performance information to, and controls from third-party remote alarm monitoring equipment. See the SCE Operation Manual, order P/N 6885104E05.
9. TTL I/O – DB15 for TTL input and output to the NMU.
10. ALARM/CONTROL RELAY - DB25 connector provides system alarm, status, and perfor-mance information to, and controls from third-party remote alarm monitoring equipment.
11. SPKR Jack – Four-position, four-pin modular jack used for external speaker connections.
12. DTE/DCE Switch – Place in DCE, Local Access port connects to a DCE with a 1-to-1 cable. Place in DTE, Local Access port connects to a DTE with a 1-to-1 cable.
13. LOCAL ACCESS Port – DB9 connector for cable interface with the Local Maintenance Ter-minal (LMT), a VT100/VT220 or compatible terminal, or computer for local access of radio control and monitoring.
14. WTU Jack – WTU Channel 1 connector.
15. HANDSET Jack – Four-position, four-pin modular telephone jack for the orderwire handset provided with the optional OWU.
16. SYNDES Connectors – SYNDES connections on 28xDS1 radios.
17. SYNDES Connector – SYNDES connections on 3xDS3 and SONET/SDH electrical radios.
18. OC-3 In/Out Connectors - SC type duplex connections for 155-Mbit optical data.
19. LAN A/B Connectors–RJ45 jacks for up-link (MDI) and down-link (MDI-X) Ethernet connec-tion
ACO (Alarm Cut Off) Switch and LED
Switch turns audible major and minor alarm relays (and optionally, the visual major and minor alarm relays) off. Green LED lights when ACO activates.
MANUAL LED Yellow LED indicates a protection switch not in AUTO. LED blinks at one-second intervals during active loopbacks.
NORM LED Green LED indicates normal radio operation.
Supply Power A Side B Side48V 5 Amp 3 Amp24V 10 Amp 5 Amp
MAJ LED Red LED indicates a service-affecting alarm.
Chapter 3 Radio Cabinet
Page 3-1-8 2/27/04 CM SONET/SDH
Table 3-1-B. 8209302-00 Configuration Switch Settings
SWITCH 1DS3 3DS3 28DS1100BaseT
+ 1DS3SONET
ElectricalSONETOptical
S3-1 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS3-2 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFFS3-3 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS3-4 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS3-5 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFFS3-6 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS3-7 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFFS3-8 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS4-1 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS4-2 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFFS4-3 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS4-4 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFFS4-5 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFFS4-6 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFFS4-7 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFFS4-8 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFFS5-1 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFFS5-2 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS5-3 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFFS5-4 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS5-5 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFFS5-6 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS6 P1 P2 P2 P1 P2 P2
Microwave Networks
CM SONET/SDH 2/27/04 Page 3-1-9
Table 3-1-C. MGN8112 Access Panel Switch Settings
Rocker Setting Function Enabled Rocker Setting Function Enabled
DS1 Line (rear of the access panel)
1 On DS1 line 1 unequipped 15 On DS1 line 15 unequippedOff DS1 line 1 equipped Off DS1 line 15 equipped
2 On DS1 line 2 unequipped 16 On DS1 line 16 unequippedOff DS1 line 2 equipped Off DS1 line 16 equipped
3 On DS1 line 3 unequipped 17 On DS1 line 17 unequippedOff DS1 line 3 equipped Off DS1 line 17 equipped
4 On DS1 line 4 unequipped 18 On DS1 line 18 unequippedOff DS1 line 4 equipped Off DS1 line 18 equipped
5 On DS1 line 5 unequipped 19 On DS1 line 19 unequippedOff DS1 line 5 equipped Off DS1 line 19 equipped
6 On DS1 line 6 unequipped 20 On DS1 line 20 unequippedOff DS1 line 6 equipped Off DS1 line 20 equipped
7 On DS1 line 7 unequipped 21 On DS1 line 21 unequippedOff DS1 line 7 equipped Off DS1 line 21 equipped
8 On DS1 line 8 unequipped 22 On DS1 line 22 unequippedOff DS1 line 8 equipped Off DS1 line 22 equipped
9 On DS1 line 9 unequipped 23 On DS1 line 23 unequippedOff DS1 line 9 equipped Off DS1 line 23 equipped
10 On DS1 line 10 unequipped 24 On DS1 line 24 unequippedOff DS1 line 10 equipped Off DS1 line 24 equipped
11 On DS1 line 11 unequipped 25 On DS1 line 25 unequippedOff DS1 line 11 equipped Off DS1 line 25 equipped
12 On DS1 line 12 unequipped 26 On DS1 line 26 unequippedOff DS1 line 12 equipped Off DS1 line 26 equipped
13 On DS1 line 13 unequipped 27 On DS1 line 27 unequippedOff DS1 line 13 equipped Off DS1 line 27 equipped
14 On DS1 line 14 unequipped 28 On DS1 line 28 unequippedOff DS1 line 14 equipped Off DS1 line 28 equipped
Network Bridge Interface Jumpers
West East Port Configuration West East Port ConfigurationE4 (in) E10 (in) ACU/NMU—Master/Slave E5 E12 East/West—Omni-direc-
tional
See Appendix G for SNMP network management.
Chapter 3 Radio Cabinet
Page 3-1-10 2/27/04 CM SONET/SDH
3.0 SP Shelf BackplaneThe SP Backplane is the interface between the SP modules. Each module plugs directly into the SP Backplane.
3.1 Jumpers
The SP Backplane contains 11 jumpers that determine capacity configuration for the radio. Only two jumpers are needed to configure the radio for desired capacity. Jumper E1 is always installed. The second jumper needs to be installed according to the radio capacity.
For example, if a 4 DS1 terminal configuration is desired, set the jumpers as follows:
E1 strapped to enable terminal operation.E7 strapped to enable 28xDS1 operation.
These jumpers are manipulated from the front of the SP Backplane. Front presentation of these jumpers ensures that configurations can be changed without requiring rear access to an installed radio. Refer to Figure 3-1-5 for jumper locations.
To access the jumpers, remove the A PSU from the SP section of the shelf. Reaching through the front of the shelf, set each jumper as either strapped or unstrapped, according to Table 3-1-C.
Table 3-1-D. SP Backplane Jumper Settings
Jumper Setting Function Enabled
E1 Strapped Enables Terminal operation
E2 Not used
E3 Not used
Figure 3-1-7. SP Backplane Jumper Locations (as viewed through the chassis)
E4E5E6E7E8E9
E10E17
E1E2E3J1
J2 J3
J4
J6
J5
J7
J8
J10 J12 J14 J16
J9J11 J13
J15
J17J18
J19
J20J21
J22
J23
. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .
. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .
. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .
. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .
. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .
. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .
. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .
. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .
. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .
. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .
. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .
. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .
. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .
. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .
. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .
. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .
. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .
. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .
. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .
. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .
. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .
. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .
. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .
F-0699a
Microwave Networks
CM SONET/SDH 2/27/04 Page 3-1-11
4.0 RF Shelf BackplaneThe RF Backplane is the interface between the Transmitter Units, Receiver Units, and RF Power Supply Units. Each of these modules plugs directly into the RF Backplane. Figure 3-1-6 illustrates connector placement on the RF Backplane.
E4 Strapped* Enables 4 DS1/4DS1N operation
E5 Strapped* Enables 8 DS1 operation
E6 Strapped* Enables 12 DS1/8DS1N operation
E7 Strapped* Enables 28DS1/1DS3/3DS3/SONET operation
E8 Not used
E9 Not used
E10 Not used
E17 Not used
*Select only one jumper according to desired channel capacity.
Table 3-1-D. SP Backplane Jumper Settings (Continued)
Jumper Setting Function Enabled
TXU A
J6
RXU A
J5
RF PSU A
J4 J3
RXU B
J2
TXU B
J1
. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .
F-1238
. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .
RF PSU B
Figure 3-1-8 RF Shelf Backplane (viewed through chassis from front of the cabinet)
Chapter 3 Radio Cabinet
Page 3-1-12 2/27/04 CM SONET/SDH
5.0 Equipment RackThe standard radio rack (2 meter) can accommodate two protected radios.
5.1 Installing Auxiliary Equipment in the Rack
Auxiliary equipment should be installed two-rack units below the radio cabinet to allow ease of cable routing and to provide sufficient thermal air flow from the radio. For dual- protected radio configurations two rack units are required between the radio cabinets.
If you wish to add a trim fuse pad to the rack, install it 1 rack unit above the radio cabinet.
Note: The only auxiliary equipment mounted above the rack is a trim fuse panel, which is mounted 1 rack unit above the radio cabinet.
6.0 Installation KitsTable 3-1-D lists the contents of the installation kit packed with the radio.
Table 3-1-E. MLN7730 Accessory Kit
Item Quantity
Spare GMT fuse, 3 Amp 2
Spare GMT fuse, 5 Amp 2
Spare GMT fuse, 10 Amp 2
Tuning tool 1
5/16 wrench 1
Wrist strap - static control 1
BNC Cable assembly 1
CM7/8 System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 3-2-1
1.0 General InformationRF Distribution components of the CM7/8 radio are the transmit filter, receive filter(s), and a waveguide branching network.
The transmit filter and receive filter(s) use a five-cavity waveguide filter design. Each TXU and RXU connect to these waveguide filters through semi-rigid coaxial cables. The transmit and receive bandpass filters are center-tuned to customer-specific frequencies. Configuration options are determined by the waveguide branching network. Configuration options are:
• Transmit Hot Standby, Receive Hot Standby (HH)
• Transmit Hot Standby, Receive Space Diversity (HS)
• Transmit Non-protected, Space Diversity (NS)
• Transmit Frequency Diversity, Receive Frequency Diversity (FF)
• Transmit Non-protected, Receive Non-protected (NN)
Table 3-2-A lists available frequency bands of the transmit and receive bandpass waveguide filters.
Table 3-2-B lists available versions of the branching network.
Table 3-2-A. Transmit and Receive Bandpass Filter Options
Frequency Band (MHz) Transmit Filter Part Number Receive Filter Part Number
HH/HS NN/FF/NS HH NN/HS/FF/NS
7100 - 7450 MFL8201 MFL8191 MFL8221 MFL8211
7450 - 7800 MFL8202 MFL8192 MFL8222 MFL8212
7800 - 8150 MFL8203 MFL8193 MFL8223 MFL8213
8150 - 8500 MFL8204 MFL8194 MFL8224 MFL8214
Table 3-2-B. Waveguide Branching Network Options
Part Number Version
MLL8177A Transmit Hot Standby, Receive Hot Standby (HH)
MLL8178A Transmit Hot Standby, Receive Space Diversity (HS)
Transmit Non-protected, Receive Space Diversity (NS)
MLL8180A Transmit Frequency Diversity, Receive Frequency Diversity (FF)
MLL8179A Transmit Non-protected, Receive Non-protected (NN)
Section 3-2RF Distribution
Chapter 3 RF Distribution
Page 3-2-2 8/5/03 CM7/8 System User’s Manual
2.0 Description of FunctionFor each configuration (HH, HS, NS, FF, NN), the RF Distribution routes signals differently.
Figure 3-2-1 shows a functional block diagram of the RF Distribution for the Hot Standby Transmitter and Hot Standby Receiver (HH) configuration. The RF Distribution routes signals from the transmitters in the RF section to the common antenna connection, and from the common antenna connection to the receivers in the RF section. A circulator connects both portions to a common antenna.
See Figures 3-2-2 through 3-2-5 for signal flow in the other configuration options..
Figure 3-2-2 shows a functional block diagram of the RF Distribution for the Hot Standby Transmitter and Space Diversity Receiver (HS) configuration.
Figure 3-2-3 shows a functional block diagram of the RF Distribution for the Non-protected Trans-mitter and Space Diversity Receiver (NS) configuration.
Figure 3-2-4 shows a functional block diagram of the RF Distribution for the Frequency Diversity Transmitter and Frequency Diversity Receiver (FF) configuration.
Figure 3-2-5 shows a functional block diagram of the RF Distribution for the Non-protected Transmitter and Non-protected Receiver (NN) configuration
TX A
RX A
F-1135
To / FromAntenna
TX B
RX B
ON-LINE MON
Figure 3-2-1. RF Distribution Block; TX/RX Hot Standby (HH)
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 3-2-3
Figure 3-2-2. RF Distribution Block; TX Hot Standby, RX Space Diversity (HS)
TX A
RX A
F-1134B
From Space DiversAntenna
To / FromAntenna
RX B
ON-LINE MON
TX A
RX A
F-1134B
From Space DiversAntenna
To / FromAntenna
RX B
ON-LINE MON
Figure 3-2-3. RF Distribution Block; TX Non-Protected, RX Space Diversity (NS)
Chapter 3 RF Distribution
Page 3-2-4 8/5/03 CM7/8 System User’s Manual
TX A MON
TX A
TX B MON
TX B
RX A MON
RX A
RX B MON
RX B
To/FromAntenna
Figure 3-2-4. RF Distribution Block; TX/RX Frequency Diversity (FF)
Figure 3-2-5. RF Distribution Block; TX/RX Non-protected (NN)
TX A MON
TX A
RX B MON
RX B
To/FromAntenna
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 3-2-5
2.1 Transmit Section
For all configurations, the output from the Transmitter Unit (TXU) is fed through a coaxial cable directly into the transmit filter.
2.2 Receive Section
For all configurations, the receive signal is sent directly from the receive filter through a coaxial cable to the Receiver Unit (RXU).
Chapter 3 RF Distribution
Page 3-2-6 8/5/03 CM7/8 System User’s Manual
3.0 User OperationFor troubleshooting and monitoring purposes, you should be aware of the RF Distribution’s front panel functions and wiring and cable connections.
3.1 Front Panel Functions (HH)
Refer to Figure 3-2-6 for the locations of the following components for the Hot Standby/Hot Standby version of the branching network.
1. RF IN - Transmit filter input port that feeds the signal from Transmitter Unit A (TXU A) to the branching network.
2. On-line MON-coupled transmit signal sets the online transmitter power level.
3. RF IN - Transmit filter input port that feeds the signal from Transmitter Unit B (TXU B) to the branching network.
4. RF OUT - Receive filter output port which sends the signal to Receiver Unit A (RXU A).
5. RF OUT - Receive filter output port which sends the signal to Receiver Unit B (RXU B) This signal is 10 dB lower than the signal sent to RXU A.
dB
ON LINE
MON
RXTX dB
ON LINE
MON
RXTX
Figure 3-2-6. Front Panel Functions of the Transmit and Receive Waveguide Filters (HH)
RFIN
31
2
4 5
RFOUT
RFIN
RFOUT
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 3-2-7
3.2 Front Panel Functions (HS)
Refer to Figure 3-2-7 for the locations of the following components for the Hot Standby/Space Diversity version of the branching network.
1. RF IN - Transmit filter input port that feeds the signal from Transmitter Unit A (TXU A) to the branching network.
2. RF IN - Transmit filter input port that feeds the signal from Transmitter Unit B (TXU B) to the branching network.
3. RF OUT - Receive filter output port which sends the signal to Receiver Unit A (RXU A).
4. RF OUT - Receive filter output port which sends the signal to Receiver Unit B (RXU B).
5. On-line MON-coupled transmit signal used to set the online transmitter power level.
Figure 3-2-7. Front Panel Functions of the Transmit and Receive Waveguide Filters (HS)
5
3 4
1 2
Chapter 3 RF Distribution
Page 3-2-8 8/5/03 CM7/8 System User’s Manual
3.3 Front Panel Functions (NS)
Refer to Figure 3-2-8 for the locations of the following components for the Hot Standby/Hot Standby version of the branching network.
1. RF IN - Transmit filter input port that feeds the signal from Transmitter Unit A (TXU A) to the branching network.
2. RF OUT - Receive filter output port which sends the signal to Receiver Unit A (RXU A).
3. RF OUT - Receive filter output port which sends the signal to Receiver Unit B (RXU B).
4. On-line MON-coupled transmit signal sets the online transmitter power level.
Figure 3-2-8. Front Panel Functions of the Transmit and Receive Waveguide Filters (NS)
TX
RF OUT RF INRF IN
RX RX
1
4 2 3
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 3-2-9
3.4 Front Panel Functions (FF)
Refer to Figure 3-2-9 for the locations of the following components for the Hot Standby/Hot Standby version of the branching network.
1. RF IN - Transmit filter input port that feeds the signal from Transmitter Unit A (TXU A) to the branching network.
2. RF IN - Transmit filter input port that feeds the signal from Transmitter Unit B (TXU B) to the branching network.
3. RF OUT - Receive filter output port which sends the signal to Receiver Unit A (RXU A).
4. RF OUT - Receive filter output port which sends the signal to Receiver Unit B (RXU B).
5. On-line MON-coupled transmit signal sets the online transmitter power level.
6. On-line MON-coupled transmit signal sets the online transmitter power level.
4 6
21
5 3
Figure 3-2-9. Front Panel Functions of the Transmit and Receive Waveguide Filters (FF)
Chapter 3 RF Distribution
Page 3-2-10 8/5/03 CM7/8 System User’s Manual
3.5 Front Panel Functions (NN)
Refer to Figure 3-2-10 for the locations of the following components for the Non-protected/Non-protected version of the branching network.
1. RF IN - Transmit filter input port that feeds the signal from Transmitter Unit A (TXU A) to the branching network.
2. On-line MON-coupled transmit signal used to set the online transmitter power level.
3. RF OUT- Receive filter output port which sends the signal to Receiver Unit A (RXU A).
Figure 3-2-10. Front Panel Functions of the Transmit and Receive Waveguide Filters (NN)
32
1
CM7/8 System Users Manual Page 3-3-1
1.0 Physical DescriptionThe Transmitter Unit (TXU) receives an IF signal and converts it to a regulated RF signal at the Tx frequency. The Transmitter Unit resides in the RF shelf of the radio. Figure 3-3-1 shows the TXU. Table 3-3-A lists the TXU part numbers. The “x” in the TXU part number varies with the Tx/Rx spacing option as set by the TX IF BPF/LO board. See Table 3-3-B.
Table 3-3-A. TXU Part Numbers
Part Number Output Power Tx Frequency (GHz)
CM7 CM8 CM7 CM8MTL850x MTL853x Standard 7.1 to 7.9 7.7 to 8.5MTL851x MTL854x High 7.1 to 7.9 7.7 to 8.5MTL852x MTL855x DHP 7.1 to 7.9 7.7 to 8.5
Table 3-3-B. Tx/Rx Spacing OptionsX in TXU P/N T/R Spacing (MHz)
0 119, 1261 150, 151.614, 154,160,1612 175, 1823 1964 2455 300
Figure 3-3-1. Transmitter Unit
Section 3-3Transmitter Unit (TXU)
Chapter 3 Transmitter Unit
Page 3-3-2 CM7/8 System Users Manual
2.0 Functional Description The Transmitter unit accepts the modulated 70 MHz signal from the Modulator, prepares the signal for transmission, and delivers it for RF Distribution. While moving through the Transmitter, the signal goes through a conversion process performed by the first on-board local oscillator and RXU frequency synthesizer, then the second local oscillator. The resultant RF signal is further amplified and sent to the output.
Figure 3-3-2 shows a functional block diagram of the Transmitter Unit.
3.0 Front Panel FunctionsRefer to Figure 3-3-3 for the locations of the following indicators, controls, and test points:
1. RF OUT Connector - Sends the regulated signal to the RF Distribution Tray.
2. TX MON Connector - A switched sample of the regulated signal used for RF local loopback and off-line TXU monitoring.
3. TX LO IN Connector - Receives the LO signal from the synthesizer on the adjacent RXU.
4. TX ALM - Red LED that indicates the TXU is in alarm. This LED is controlled by the ACU.
5. TX PWR ADJ - Potentiometer that adjusts the TXU power level.
F-1137
To Switch
TX Alarm
RF OUT
MUX Out
BPF
TX Power Adjust
Switch Confirm
APC
IF In
IF Loopback LO
LO Input from RXU
PLL AlarmSwitch Control
+12.3 VDC
-6 VDCGround
TX Alarm Control
+11 VDC REG
+5 VDC REG
-5 VDC REG
Pre-distorter
BPF
Active BiasActive Bias
APC
MUXTX Power Mon
APC Confirm
TX Power Alarm
TX MON
+ +
+
+
Fan Alarm
PREDISTORTER
Figure 3-3-2. TXU Block Diagram
CM7/8 System Users Manual Page 3-3-3
Microwave Networks
6. IF IN Connector - Receives 70 MHz IF signal from the MOD.
7. LPBK LO OUT Connector - Sends the first conversion LO signal to the adjacent RXU for RF local loopback testing. Also used for measuring the first conversion LO frequency.
Figure 3-3-3. Transmitter Unit Front Panel
Chapter 3 Transmitter Unit
Page 3-3-4 CM7/8 System Users Manual
4.0 Setting TXU Boards
4.1 TXU Alarm/Control Board MLN8146 and MLN8147
The Alarm/Control board used in the standard and high power radio, MLN8146, and the Alarm/Control board (Figure 3-3-4) used in the DHP radio, MLN8147, does not have user-configuration jumpers. The TXU senses the operating band and output power configuration from a circuit in the power amplifier.
Figure 3-3-4. TXU Alarm/Control Board
CM7/8 System Users Manual Page 3-3-5
Microwave Networks
4.2 TX IF BPF/LO Board Jumpers
The IF BPF/LO board has up to three configurable jumpers and two jumpers for factory test. Figure 3-3-5 shows the jumper locations and Table 3-3-C lists the Tx/Rx frequency spacing options, board part numbers, and jumper settings. Settings not listed indicate that the jumper is not on the board.
Jumper E3 is for factory test only. Always set 1 to 2 for normal operation.
Table 3-3-C. TXU IF BPF/LO Board Jumper Settings
T/R Spacing SP/HP DHP E6 E5 E4
119 MHz MLN8175 MLN8175 1-2
126 MHz MLN8175 MLN8175 2-3
150 MHz MLN8110 MLN8110 1-2 1-2 1-2
151.614 MHz MLN8110 MLN8110 1-2 1-2 2-3
154 MHz MLN8110 MLN8110 1-2 2-3 2-3
160 MHz MLN8110 MLN8110 2-3 1-2 1-2
161 MHz MLN8110 MLN8110 2-3 1-2 2-3
168 MHz MLN8108 MLN8209 1-2
175 MHz MLN8108 MLN8208 1-2 1-2
182 MHz MLN8108 MLN8108 2-3 2-3
196 MHz MLN8107 MLN8107 1-2
245 MHz MLN8106 MLN8106 1-2 1-2
266 MHz MLN8106 MLN8206 2-3 2-3
300 MHZ MLN8176 MLN8176 2-3 1-2
305.56 MHz MLN8176 MLN8276 2-3 2-3
311.32 MHz MLN8176 MLN8276 1-2 1-2
IF BPF/LO Board
E5E4 E6
E3
R89
R88
DHPconfiguration
only
Vary withconfiguration
Figure 3-3-5. TX IF BPF/LO Board Jumper Locations
Chapter 3 Transmitter Unit
Page 3-3-6 CM7/8 System Users Manual
CM7/8 System Users Manual Page 3-4-1
1.0 General InformationThe Receiver Unit (RXU) accepts an input signal at the Rx frequency and converts it to an IF signal. The Receiver Unit resides in the RF shelf of the radio. Figure 3-4-1 shows the RXU. RXU part numbers are listed in Table 3-4-A.
The RXU has two frequency setting switches, S1 and S2. See Appendix E, Frequency Switch Settings, for instructions on how to change the frequency of your system.
Table 3-4-A. RXU Part Numbers
RXU Part Number LO Band Rx LO Frequency (GHz)
SynthesizerPart Number
CM7 CM8 CM7 CM8 CM7 CM8 CM7 CM8
MRL8166 MRL8170 7-1 8-1 7030-7235 7850-8030 MLL8156A MLL8160A
MRL8167 MRL8171 7-2 8-2 7235-7440 8030-8210 MLL8157A MLL8161A
MRL8168 MRL8172 7-3 8-3 7440-7645 8210-8390 MLL8158A MLL8162A
MRL8169 MRL8173 7-4 8-4 7645-7850 8390-8570 MLL8159A MLL8163A
Figure 3-4-1. Receiver Unit (RXU)
F-1243
Section 3-4Receiver Unit (RXU)
Chapter 3 Receiver Unit
Page 3-4-2 CM7/8 System Users Manual
2.0 Description of FunctionThe Receiver Unit accepts the received 7/8-GHz RF signal from the RF Distribution filter and delivers a 70-MHz signal to the Demodulator. Internal to the receiver, the signal goes through a pre-amplification stage and a downconversion process that utilizes the on-board frequency synthesizer to provide a local oscillator. The resultant 70-MHz signal is amplified and applied to the Demodulator.
Figure 3-4-2 is a functional block diagram of the Receiver Unit.
3.0 Front Panel FunctionsRefer to Figure 3-4-3 for the locations of the following indicators, controls, and test points:
1. RF IN Connector - Accepts input signal between -77 dBm and -25 dBm at the Rx frequency.
2. LO FREQ ADJ DIP Switch - Coarse-adjusts the LO frequency. This switch may be used to increase the range of the LO FREQ ADJ capacitor.
3. LO FREQ ADJ Capacitor- Fine-adjusts the LO frequency, and therefore, the receive frequency.
4. IF OUT Connector - Supplies 70-MHz IF signal at -10 dBm.
RF Loopback LO
F-1138
RX Alarm
LO Alarm
MAN
RSL Setpoint 1
RF In
RFLoopback
Switch
LO MON
+12.3 VDC
-6 VDCGround
RX Alarm Control
+11 VDC REG
+5 VDC REG
-5 VDC REG
Linearizer
MUX
234
Active Bias
AGC Alarm
AGC MON
GroundDip Switches
SynthesizedOscillator
PLL Alarm
LO Output for TXURF<LO RF>LO
LO FREQ SET
LOFREQ
ADJ
IF OUTBPF
MUX Out
AGC MON
+ +
+
+
Figure 3-4-2. Receiver Functional Block
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 System Users Manual Page 3-4-3
5. LPBK LO IN Connector - Receives the first conversion LO signal from the adjacent TXU for RF local loopback testing.
6. AGC MON - Test point that measures AGC voltage (RSL).
7. RX ALM - Red LED that indicates the RXU is in alarm. This LED is controlled by the ACU.
8. GND - Ground connection for test points on the RXU.
9. LO MON Connector - Samples the LO signal for frequency checking and status. The level of this signal is typically -5 dBm, and will not exceed +5 dBm. The LO frequency is equal to either the RX frequency minus 70 MHz or the RX frequency plus 70 MHz.
10. TX LO OUT Connector - Sends the LO signal from the synthesizer to the adjacent TXU.
11. RF LPBK Switch - Used to configure the RXU for RF local loopback operation.
F-1162
RF IN
RXU
AGC MON
RF LPBK
LO FREQADJ
LPBK LO IN
IF OUT
RX ALM
GND
LO MON
TX LO OUT
OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
11
9
10
Figure 3-4-3. Front Panel Functions of the RXU
Chapter 3 Receiver Unit
Page 3-4-4 CM7/8 System Users Manual
3.1 RXU Control Board MLN7905A Jumpers
The Receiver Unit Control board, located on the left side of the RXU, contains four jumpers. Figure 3-4-4 shows jumper locations. Table 3-4-B lists jumper settings.
Table 3-4-B. RXU Control Board MLN7905A Jumper Settings
Jumper Setting Label Function
E1 1-2 RF<LO2-3 RF>LO
Sideband Option Sets unit for upper or lower sideband. Depends on band-width option.
E2 2-3 AUTO MAN/AUTO Factory test and adjustment.
E3, E4 2-3 1DS1/DS3 (10 MHz)1-2 3DS3 (30 MHz)
Bandwidth Option Sets appropriate channel bandwidth for system capac-ity.
3
3DS3
E3
1
MDS1/DS3
RF>LO
E1
F-1250
AUTO
1
E2
MAN
DS1
S1
LBCK
LBCKLO IN
IF OUT
J4
J3
RF<LO
3
1 3
3
3DS3
E4
1
MDS1/DS3
Figure 3-4-4. Jumper Locations for MLN7905
CM System User’s Manual 02/20/02 Page 3-5-1
1.0 General InformationThe RF Power Supply Unit (RF PSU) mounts in the RF shelf. This section describes the power supply features and operation.
The RF PSU, P/N MPN8187A, is a two output, 156-watt supply that converts battery power into regulated voltages to power the RF units. Figure 3-5-1 shows the power supply. This supply replaced the 125-watt MPN7160.
rfpsu
Figure 3-5-1. RF Power Supply Unit
Section 3-5RF Power Supply Unit (RF PSU)
Chapter 3 RF Power Supply Unit
Page 3-5-2 02/20/02 CM System User’s Manual
2.0 Functional DescriptionEach side of a protected RF shelf (A and B) has its own power supply. The regulated voltages are low in order to minimize power consumption. This single unit can accept either positive or negative primary voltage from -20 to -60 Vdc or +20 to +60 Vdc.
Figure 3-5-2 is a functional block diagram of the RF PSU.
Figure 3-5-2. RF PSU Block Diagram
3
Filter
Filter
8
Filter
Filter
DC/DCConverter
ACUInterface
P. S.Alarm
Input -BAT
-BAT Test Point
Input +BAT
+BAT Test Point
Alarm ControlFrom ACU
MonitoredSignals
ControlSignals
+12.3 VDC
+12.3 VDC Test Point
-6 VDC
-6 VDC Test Point
F-0700-0594
Microwave Networks
CM System User’s Manual 02/20/02 Page 3-5-3
3.0 RF PSU Board FeaturesThere are no user configuration jumpers on the RF Power Supply board as Figure 3-5-3 shows. Access the alarm and test points from the front panel. The following text describes these features.
1. ALM LED – Indicates the RF Power Supply is in alarm. ACU controls this red alarm LED.
2. GND Test Point – Ground connection for all test points on the RF PSU
3. +12.3 V Test Point – Voltage test point.
4. -6 V Test Point – Volt-age test point.
5. +BATT – Positive bat-tery test point.
6. -BATT – Negative test point.
Figure 3-5-3. RF Power Supply Board
Chapter 3 RF Power Supply Unit
Page 3-5-4 02/20/02 CM System User’s Manual
CM System User’s Manual Page 3-6-1
1.0 General InformationThe Signal Processing Power Supply Unit (SP PSU) converts battery voltage into regulated outputs that supply power to the SP shelf of the radio. The SP PSU, part number MPN6050, is located in the SP shelf of the radio. Figure 3-6-1 shows the SP PSU.
F-0777-0
Figure 3-6-1. SP Power Supply Unit
Section 3-6SP Power Supply Unit (SP PSU)
Chapter 3 SP Power Supply Unit
Page 3-6-2 CM System User’s Manual
2.0 Functional DescriptionEach side of a protected signal processing shelf (A and B) has its own power supply. The regulated voltages are low in order to minimize power consumption. This single unit can accept either positive or negative primary voltage from -20 to -60 Vdc or +20 to +60 Vdc.
Figure 3-6-2 is a functional block diagram of the SP PSU.
3 3
Window Comparator
3
Alarm
GND
+5.4V
-6V
+6V
DC/DCConverter
InputFilter
+BAT In
-BAT In
Out to ACU3
10
ACUInterface& MUX
From ACU
OutputFilter
OutputFilter
OutputFilter
+6V Test Point
-6V Test Point
+5.4V Test Point
GND Test Point
+BAT Test Point
-BAT Test Point
Figure 3-6-2. SP PSU Block Diagram
Microwave Networks
CM System User’s Manual Page 3-6-3
3.0 Front Panel FunctionsNote: In order to achieve proper operation of the power supply, a minimum of 25% maximum load must be applied to each output voltage supply.
Refer to Figure 3-6-3 for the locations of the following indicators, controls, and test points:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Figure 3-6-3. Front Panel Functions of the SP PSU
1. ALM LED - Red LED that, when lit, indicates the SP Power Supply is in alarm. The alarm may be due to external fuse failure or internal failure. This LED is controlled by the ACU.
2. GND Test Point — Ground point for all testequipment.
3. +5.4 V Test Point — Measuring point for +5.4 V output voltage.
4. +6.0 V Test Point — Measuring point for +6.0 V output voltage.
5. -6.0 V Test Point — Measuring point for -6.0 V output voltage.
6. +BAT — The battery supply voltage; measures between 6 and 7
7. -BAT — see #6 above.
Chapter 3 SP Power Supply Unit
Page 3-6-4 CM System User’s Manual
CM System User’s Manual 11/6/03 Page 3-7-1
1.0 Physical DescriptionThe Alarm and Control Unit (ACU) supervises the operation of the CM6 radio system. It collects alarm and status information from each module in the system and, based on this input, performs protection switching and initiates alarms, sets, and starts. The ACU maintains an alarm log and statistical history of radio operation. It also interfaces with the Status and Control Extender (SCE), and the Network Management System (NMS). The ACU, part number MLN7195 revision E or later, resides in the SP shelf of the radio. Figure 3-7-1 shows the ACU.
The optional Network Management Unit (NMU) is mounted onto the ACU. See Section 3-15 in this chapter for details on NMU operation.
The ACU software part number is MVN4025. The programmed IC is installed at location U29 on the ACU module.
F-0327-r0494
OptionalNMU
Figure 3-7-1. Alarm and Control Unit
Section 3-7Alarm and Control Unit
Chapter 3 Alarm and Control Unit (ACU)
Page 3-7-2 11/6/03 CM System User’s Manual
2.0 Functional DescriptionThe ACU collects performance signals from other modules in the radio. These signals are digitized by an Analog to Digital converter on the ACU. The ACU compares the digitized value with stored limits. Any signal that is out of limit is logged as an alarm.
The ACU also collects digital alarm signals from modules in the radio. When the ACU detects a digital signal in the alarm state, the alarm is logged.
When an analog or digital alarm occurs, the ACU sends a signal to the module in alarm to light its ALM LED. The ACU also performs protection switching, as appropriate, based on the alarms.
The ACU contains counters that monitor FEC and parity error signals from the MUX. The ACU uses these counts in its decision process during automatic power control activation and protection switching, and to calculate bit error rate.
The ACU maintains a 512 event history (which in the NMS software is referred to as the Alarm Log) and a 7-day count of performance statistics. All access to the ACU's performance log, event history, and manual controls are made via the Local Access Port on the Access Panel. See Appendix B for Local Maintenance Screens.
Figure 3-7-2 is a functional block diagram of the ACU.
Microwave Networks
CM System User’s Manual 11/6/03 Page 3-7-3
Control Communications Channel
ADC
P I/O
P I/O
Counter
S I/O
S I/O
S I/O
S I/O
S I/O
S I/O
ACUProcessor
Analog from all Modules
Alarms from all Modules
LED Control to all Modules
Parity ErrorsFEC Errors
ACU-ACU Communications Channel
Local Display Unit RS232
EEPROM Channel
Status and Control Extender PanelRS 232
Comm. Channel to NMS Processor
ADC = Analog to Digital ConverterP I/O = Parallel Input / OutputS I/O = Serial Input / Output
Figure 3-7-2. ACU Block Diagram
Chapter 3 Alarm and Control Unit (ACU)
Page 3-7-4 11/6/03 CM System User’s Manual
3.0 Front Panel FunctionsRefer to Figure 3-7-3 for the location of the following indicator:
3.1 Jumpers and Switches
The ACU contains six jumpers and four switches; two push switches and two DIP switches. Refer to Figure 3-7-4 for jumper and switch locations. Table 3-7-A lists jumper settings. Jumper E4 selects the function of the Alarm Cut-off switch. Jumper E5 selects the type of alarm to be displayed in the event of an ACU failure. Table 3-7-B lists switch settings for DIP switches S2 and S3. Switch S1 is for factory test only. Switch S4 is for resetting the system software
1
F-0774-0494
2
Figure 3-7-3. Front Panel Functions of the ACU
1. ALM LED(ACU) — Red LED, indicates that the ACU needs to be checked and possibly replaced after checking that the NMU is functioning and not causing a false alarm reading on the ACU. First, ver-ify that the NMU is properly inserted by pulling and reinserting the NMU module. Then verify that the ACU is properly inserted by pulling its module and reinserting.
2. ALM LED (NMU)— Red LED, indicates that the NMU needs to be checked along with the ACU and possibly replaced. Verify the NMU is properly insert-ed by pulling the module and then reinserting it.
!IMPORTANT: When switch S4 is pressed, all user defined system
are replaced with default configurations. Re-enter systemconfiguration if default configurations are not usable.configurations
Microwave Networks
CM System User’s Manual 11/6/03 Page 3-7-5
Table 3-7-A. ACU Jumper Settings
Jumper Setting Function Enabled
E1 1-2 Normal operation
2-3 Factory test
E2 1-2 Normal operation
2-3 Factory test
E3 1-2 Normal operation
2-3 Factory test
E4 1-2 ACO disables audible and visual
2-3 ACO disables audible only
E5 1-2 ACU fail causes minor alarm only
2-3 ACU fail causes major and minor alarm
E6 1-2 4-Port NMU (NMU Rev C or later)
2-3 Normal NMU (NMU Rev A or B)
Figure 3-7-4. ACU Jumper and Switch Locations
Chapter 3 Alarm and Control Unit (ACU)
Page 3-7-6 11/6/03 CM System User’s Manual
Table 3-7-B. ACU DIP Switch Settings
Switch Rocker Setting Function Enabled
NOTE: Switches can be marked OPEN or DOWN. OPEN/DOWN is OFF as labeled on the board
S2 1 Closed Service channel not equipped
Open Service channel equipped
2 Closed Service channel non-protected
Open Service channel protected
3 Closed WTU non-protected
Open WTU protected
4 Closed ATDE not equipped
Open ATDE equipped
5 Closed Orderwire not equipped
Open Orderwire equipped
6 Closed WTU not equipped
Open WTU equipped
7 Closed*Open
APC On at Power Up Mode – DisabledAPC ON at Power Up Mode – Enable
8 Closed Status and Control Extender not equipped
Open Status and Control Extender equipped
S3 1, 2, 3 Closed, Closed, Closed TX Hot Standby; RX Hot Standby
Closed, Closed, Open TX Hot Standby; RX Space Diversity
Closed, Open, Closed TX Space Diversity; RX Space Diversity
Closed, Open, Open TX Non-protected; RX Non-protected
Open, Closed, Closed TX Non-protected; RX Space Diversity
Open, Closed, Open TX Frequency Diversity; RX Frequency Diversity
4, 5 Closed, Closed 2 GHz
Closed, Open 6 and 11 GHz (CM)
Open, Closed 10 GHz
Open, Open 7/8 GHz
6,7 Closed, Closed 48 Vdc battery
Open, Closed 24 Vdc battery
8 Closed APC option enabled
Open APC option disabled
* Set S3, 8 to Closed for feature to work. With current radio firmware: Manual LED will not light. Screen 087 (Appendix B) is disabled.
CM SONET/SDH Page 3-8-1
1.0 General InformationThe Modulator (MOD), shown in Figure 3-8-1, generates the modulated IF signal of the CM radio.
2.0 Description2.1 Physical
The MOD resides in the SP shelf of the radio. Table 3-8-A lists the MOD part number..Table 3-8-A. MOD Part Numbers
Part Number Version
8000514-00 155 Mbps
Figure 3-8-1. Modulator
Section 3-8Modulator (MOD)
Chapter 3 Modulator
Page 3-8-2 CM SONET/SDH
2.2 Functional
The MOD (modulator) accepts parallel data from the MUX (multiplexer), converts the data to an analog signal, then mixes the signal with a 70-MHz carrier to generate a QAM signal. This signal goes to the RF shelf for upconversion and transmission.
Figure 3-8-2 shows the MOD functional block diagram.
To/FromACU
TXBase Band
Filter
70 MHzXTAL OSC
DAC
CLKPLL
DataCLK
ACU Select
TXBase Band
FilterDAC
A & BSelectMUX
IFFilter
Loop BackBuffer
IF OutputBuffer
MixerSumming
Amp.
Data &CLK From
MUX A
"Q"Data
Diff. Amp.
Diff. Amp."I"
Data
0 Degree
90 DegreeHybrid
-90 Degree
MonitoredSignals
+6V-5V Reg.
-6VACU
Interface
Data &CLK From
MUX B
ControlSignals
+5V Reg.
Loop BackControl
ToDEMOD
ToDEMOD
70 MHzIF Out
To RF Shelf
Figure 3-8-2. MOD Block Diagram
Microwave Networks
CM SONET/SDH Page 3-8-3
3.0 Front Access FunctionsFor monitoring and troubleshooting the MOD use the indicators, controls, and test points shown in Figure 3-8-3.
Note: The I and Q Base Band outputs of the MOD are root-raised cosine signals. In order to get a clear EYE pattern, these signals should be sent through the root-raised cosine filter on the DEMOD.
1
2
3
F-0150-O
Figure 3-8-3. Front Panel Functions of the MOD
1. MCX Connector - IF ouput to the RF shelf(50 ohms).
2. ALM LED - Red LED that indicates the module is in an alarm condition. Controlled by the ACU.
3. I Base Band Out - Analog Base Band output. 75ohms
4. Q Base Band Out - Analog Base Band output. 75 ohms.
5. Test Point. Pin 1 is the 70-MHz frequency monitor. Pin 2 is ground (50 ohms).
Chapter 3 Modulator
Page 3-8-4 CM SONET/SDH
4.0 8000514 MOD Jumpers (SONET/SDH)Modulator 8000514 contains 5 jumpers, but no user combination settings. Refer to to Figure 3-8-4. Table 3-8-B lists the factory default settings of these jumpers.
Figure 3-8-4. MOD 8000514 Jumper Locations (SONET/SDH)
Table 3-8-B. MOD 8000514 Jumper Settings (SONET/SDH)
Jumper Setting Function Enabled
E1 Open For factory tests
E2 Not a jumper I Base Band Out connector
E3 Not a jumper Q Base Band Out connector
E4 Not a jumper 70-MHz Monitor connector
E5 Not a jumper Clk OUT connector
C B A1
MONITOR
NULL
I CARRIER
NULLQ CARRIER
70 MHZ Q PWRADJ
ADJI PWR
DLY ADJI/Q CLK
VC
O
ST
RE
SS
GND
GND
PWA 8000514- REVQAM MODULATOR
TADIRAN MICROWAVE NETWORKSMADE IN U.S.A.
32
SERIAL NO.
GND
GND
+5V
-5V
+3V3
GNDGND
ABC
NORM NORM
P1
CW W
CC
W
R75
CW W
CC
W
R67
CW
W
CCW
R137
CW
W
CCW
R95
CW
W
CCW
R133
TP1
TP
2
TP3
U8
U6
U9
U5
U14
Y1
U17 U18
J1
TP4
+5V4
TP5TP6
TP7
D5
MH3
E9E8E7E6
E4
E1
MH
4
I BB OUT
Q BB OUT
CLK OUT
GND
GND
GND
E3
E2
E5
IF OUTTO RF
Microwave Networks
CM SONET/SDH Page 3-8-5
E6 Open For factory test
E7 Installed Connects Q DAC to Base Band filter
E8 Open For factory test
E9 Installed Connects I DAC to Base Band filter
Table 3-8-B. MOD 8000514 Jumper Settings (SONET/SDH) (Continued)
Jumper Setting Function Enabled
Chapter 3 Modulator
Page 3-8-6 CM SONET/SDH
CM SONET/SDH Page 3-9-1
1.0 General InformationThe DEMOD, shown in Figure 3-9-1 resides in the SP shelf of the radio. Strapping options on the SP Backplane set the DEMOD to operate in 128 QAM mode.
Note: Your actual DEMOD board may look different than the one shown in Figure 3-9-1.
Table 3-9-A lists the DEMOD part number.
Table 3-9-A. DEMOD Part Numbers
Part Number Version
8000515-00 155 Mbps
$900
Figure 3-9-1. Typical Demodulator
Section 3-9Demodulator (DEMOD)
Chapter 3 DEMOD
Page 3-9-2 CM SONET/SDH
2.0 Functional DescriptionThe DEMOD (demodulator) accepts a QAM signal centered at 70 MHz from the RXU, then outputs data and an associated clock directly to the demultiplexer section of the MUX.
Built-in amplitude slope equalization provides first order multipath compensation. The Adaptive Time Domain Equalizer (ATDE) function provides higher order compensation.
Figure 3-9-2 shows a Demodulator functional block diagram for the SONET/SDH board.
Microwave Networks
CM SONET/SDH Page 3-9-3
Figure 3-9-2. DEMOD Block Diagram (SONET/SDH)
QU
AD
RA
TUR
ED
EMO
DU
LAT
OR
Sheet 1
70 MH
z IF IN
FRO
M R
XU
Q B
AS
EBA
ND
FIL
T.
Sheet 1
I BA
SEB
AN
D F
ILT
.S
heet 1
I B/B
INP
UT
JP12
Q B
/B IN
PU
TJP
21S
heet 1
SLO
PE E
QU
ALIZE
R A
ND
CO
AR
SE AG
C A
MPS
Slope S
tressJP
17
I Slope Eq
DiasableJP
9
Q Slope E
qD
iasableJP
23
Sheet 2
AD
APT
IVE
TIM
ED
OM
AIN
EQU
AL
IZER
IAG
CO
UT
QA
GC
OU
T
CO
AR
SEA
GC
DET
ECTO
R
Sheet 4
I and Q M
ON
ITOR
I EY
EJP
15Q
EY
EJP
16
I_AG
C, Q
_AG
C
Q A
/DS
heet 1
I0-I3
Q0-Q
3
DEC
ISION
CO
RR
ELA
TOR
S
ATD
EC
ON
FIG A
ND
CO
NTR
OL L
OO
PS
AT
DE D
isableS
1-3
B/B
INP
UT
EN
AB
LE
JP11
Sheet 2
I Eye Q
ualityJP
15Q
Eye Q
ualityJP
16
VC
XO
Mon.
TP
15/JP24
SY
MB
OL
CL
OC
K
BU
S D
RIV
ER
SS
heet 3
TO
MU
XE
SS
ymbol C
lockJP
14
I and Q F
ine AG
Cand O
FFS
ET
Sheet 3
I and Q A
/DR
eference Voltages
Sheet 1
I Offset
JP3
I Gain
JP4
Q G
ain
Q O
ffset
CA
RR
IER A
ND
QU
AD
RA
TUR
EC
ON
TRO
LV
OL
TAG
ES
Sheet 2
VC
O T
uneJP
5
70 MH
z Monitor
JP10
External V
CO
JP
8
Quad C
ontrol
JP6
MU
XSE
LEC
T
Sheet 2
FLN
ER
RO
RS
FRO
MM
UX
ES
AC
U B
US
AC
UIN
TER
FAC
E
AN
AL
OG
BU
S
STR
ESS V
OL
TA
GE
S
Sheet 2
LIN
EA
R R
EG
.
Sheet 3
GN
D+
6V-6
V
+5V
-5V
TP
1T
P4
TP
8T
P10
TP
13T
P14
I AG
CT
P5
Q A
GC
TP
15
VC
O
Sheet 1
VC
XO
Sheet 2
I A/D
Sheet 1
DIR
EC
TED FP
GA
SW
ITC
H R
EG
.S
heet 3
GN
D5V
4
3V3
2V5
PREFILTERS AND TIMING EST.
INTE
GR
AT
OR
Sheet 2
ATD
E CO
NTR
OL
DA
TA
FRO
M A
TDE
I and Q A
/DInput O
ffset Voltages
Sheet 1
JP2
JP1
Chapter 3 DEMOD
Page 3-9-4 CM SONET/SDH
3.0 Front Panel FunctionsRefer to Figure 3-9-3 for the locations of the following indicators, controls, and test points:
Figure 3-9-3. Front Panel Functions of the DEMOD
1. I EYE Test Point — I axis eye pattern monitor port (50 ohms), and ground associated with the IEYE Test Point.
2. ALM LED — Red LED that indicates that the Demodulatoris in alarm due to an internal fault or a fault in the RXU or MUX. This LED is controlled by the ACU.
3. CLK Test Point — Symbol rate clock monitor to synchronize eye pattern monitoring (50 ohms), and ground associated with CLK test point.
4. MCX Connector — IF input from the RXU (50 ohms).
5. QEYE Test Point — Q axis eye pattern monitor port(50 ohms), and ground associated with QEYE Test Point (item 7).
Microwave Networks
CM SONET/SDH Page 3-9-5
3.1 8000515 DEMOD Jumper (SONET/SDH)
Refer to to Figure 3-9-4. Demodulator 8000515 has no jumpers.
Figure 3-9-4. DEMOD 8000515 Jumper Locations (SONET/SDH)
1
TADIRAN MICROWAVE NETWORKS DEMODULATOR
PW
A8000515-
RE
V
SE
RIA
LN
O.
I_C
OA
RS
E
AG
C
AG
C
Q_EYE
I_EYE
INJECT_BB INJECT_I_BB
DISABLE
I_SLOPE_
DIS
AB
LE
Q_S
LO
PE
_
INJECT_Q_BB
70MHZ_MON
IF INPUT
TO DEMOD
VCO_TUNE
I_FINE_GAIN
I_FINE_OFF
Q_FINE_OFF
Q_FINE_GAIN
EXT_LO
QUAD_CONTROL
I_E
YE
_Q
UA
LIT
Y
Q_E
YE
_Q
UA
LIT
Y
SLO
PE
_S
TR
SYM_CLK
SPARE
GND
GND
1
I_OTR
Q_OTR
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
MCLK
3
2 1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
2 2
WC
CW
CW
W
CW
CC
W
W
CW
CC
W
W
WI_
OF
FS
ET
Q_O
FF
SE
TS
LO
PE
DE
T.
JP8
R312
CW
CC
W
R359
CW
W
CC
WR
249
TP12
TP8
TP4
TP13
TP3
TP1
TP5
TP10
TP14
TP9
TP2
TP7
TP11
S1J1
JP21
JP3
JP2
JP1
JP5
JP6
JP
15
JP
16
JP9
JP17
JP23
JP11 JP12
JP20
JP7
JP13
JP14
JP4
JP10
JP
24
CW
R427
R428
TP15
D11
P1
Chapter 3 DEMOD
Page 3-9-6 CM SONET/SDH
CM SONET/SDH Page 3-10-1
1.0 General InformationThe Multiplexer (MUX) multiplexes/demultiplexes several low-bit-rate channels into/from a high speed data stream. The MUX, shown in Figure 3-10-1, resides in the SP shelf of the radio. Table 3-10-A lists the MUX part numbers.
Table 3-10-A. MUX Part Numbers
Part Number Version
8000513-00 155 Mbps with DS1 WTU
8000513-01 155 Mbps with E1 WTU
$$/:
Note: Your actual MUX board may look different than the one pictured in Figure 3-10-1.
Figure 3-10-1. Typical Multiplexer
Section 3-10Multiplexer (MUX)
Chapter 3 Multiplexer
Page 3-10-2 CM SONET/SDH
2.0 Functional DescriptionOn the transmit side, the MUX receives NRZ data and clock signals from the SYNDES unit, multiplexes these signals together with the four 64 kbps service channels and the two (fast channel and NMS) 64 kbps internal overhead channels, and creates a symbol stream suitable for the input to the MOD.
On the receive side, the MUX receives the symbol stream from the DEMOD, demultiplexes this signal into NRZ data and clock signals, which it sends to the SYNDES. Figure 3-10-2 shows a MUX functional block diagram
.
FromServiceChannel
SCSDElasticBuffer
CH1-CH4
FromSYNDES
GapBuffer
ToModulator
A
To/FromACU
BitMultiplexer
Scram-bler FEC
TD
FrameGenerator
ACUInterface
BitDemultiplexer
RCDe-
scramblerFECCKT
Err
orle
ssS
witc
h
Framer
DTPhase
Resolve
PhaseResolve
FromDemodulator
A
FromDemodulator
B
ToServiceChannel
FIFO
DT
ToSYNDES
TC
ToModulator
B
FromACU
TimingGenerator
CK
TXCKControl &Monitored
Signals
Loopback Control
RD
SYNC
CK
DT
CK
ToACU
SD SC DT CKPhase Info
FramerPhase Info
PLLRXCK
Frame Sync
F-1251
Bit LineRotator
MUXLoopback
Figure 3-10-2. MUX Operations Block Diagram
Microwave Networks
CM SONET/SDH Page 3-10-3
3.0 Front Panel FunctionsRefer to Figure 3-10-3 for the Alarm LED location on the Multiplexer module Front Panel.
1.ALM LED — Red LED that indicates the Multiplexer is in alarm. This alarm may be due to a fault within the MUX or a fault in the associated SYNDES, MOD, or DEMOD. This LED is controlled by the ACU.
Figure 3-10-3. ALM LED on the Front Panel
1
Chapter 3 Multiplexer
Page 3-10-4 CM SONET/SDH
4.0 8000513 MUX Jumpers (SONET/SDH)Refer to Figure 3-10-4 for jumper locations. Table 3-10-B lists default jumper settings.
Figure 3-10-4. MUX 8000513 Jumper Locations (SONET/SDH)
Table 3-10-B. MUX 8000513 Jumper Settings (SONET/SDH)
Jumper Setting Function Enabled
JP4 1-2 FEC Enabled, normal operation
2-3 FEC Disabled
X13
FO
RH
AN
DLIN
G/P
AC
KA
GIN
G
ELE
CT
RO
STA
TIC
SE
NS
ITIV
E
DE
VIC
ES
OB
SE
RV
EP
RE
CA
UT
ION
S
DS1
JP4
TP1
GND4
GND2
GND3
GND1
TP6 TP7 TP8
U1
U10
U11
U12
U13
U14
U15
U16
U18
U2
U21
U22
U23
U25
U26U28
U3 U4
U5
U6
U7
U8
U9
Y1
P1
P2
U29
RN6
RN3
RN1
RN2
RN4
RN5
U30
JP2
MADE IN U.S.A.
SO
NE
TM
ULT
IPLE
XE
R/
DE
MU
LT
IPLE
XE
R
PW
A8
00
05
13
-R
EV
FECONOFF
1
111
10
20
15
5
25
30
5
10
15
20
25
30
11C B A
1
TADIRAN MICROWAVE NETWORKS
PECRXCK
VCOCLK
TXCK
FECTXCK
ABC
CM SONET/SDH Page 3-11-1
1.0 General Information
The SYNDES (synchronizer/desynchronizer) module is the interface between asynchronous signal inputs and outputs at the 155 Mbps connections, and the synchronized signal traffic to and from the MUX. The SYNDES module is bidirectional; that is, it has circuitry that handles data on the radio transmission and reception directions. From the radio perspective, transmission takes place with incoming signals from the customer—they are transmitted. Reception takes place with radio signals that are then returned to the customer—they are received. Subsection 2.0 of this Section describes module description. Subsection 4.0 discusses configuring your SYNDES module with jumpers and switches. Figure 3-11-1 illustrates a typical SYNDES module.
Table 3-11-A lists the SYNDES module part numbers.
Table 3-11-A. SYNDES Part Numbers
Part Number Version
8000516-01 Optical, Multi-mode (MM)8000516-02 Electrical mode8000516-03 Optical, Single-mode (SM)8000516-04 Optical Multi-mode (MM) Dual Output8000516-05 Optical Single Mode (SM) Dual Output
$#0
Figure 3-11-1. Typical SYNDES Module
Section 3-11Synchronizer/Desynchronizer (SYNDES)
Chapter 3 SYNDES
Page 3-11-2 CM SONET/SDH
2.0 Functional Description
The SYNDES plugs into the signal processing shelf. It takes customer signal traffic and formats it into radio transportable data. Signal preparation and conversion functions that the SYNDES performs include:
• CMI encoding/decoding
• Monitors the transmitting/receiving process (AIS)
• Maintains a synchronized signal flow
• Line status control—controls which lines turn on and off
Each SYNDES board supports either an optical or electrical interface as shown in Table 3-11-A. Table 3-11-B lists the SYNDES optical and electrical interface cabling, and their operational parameters.
2.1 Transmit
For optical signals the transceiver (Figure 3-11-2) recovers 155.52-MHz clock from the data and converts the serial data into a data nibble at one-forth the incoming rate. For electrical input the transformer coupled interface signals are CMI encoded. The transceiver conditions the CMI data stream, and generates a recovered clock and data stream. Recovered clock is converted to all zeros for the optical operation, or all ones for the electrical operation for insertion into the data stream.
The data is then clocked out of the transceiver to a MUX interface. The transceiver transforms the recovered clock and data stream at 155.52 MHz and converts it to a 38.88-MHz data stream. The MUX receives the 4-bit nibble interface data and clock.
2.2 Receive
A MUX interface inputs 4-bit nibbles of data to the SYNDES using a clock line and a gap line. The interface validates the data and moves the data to a FIFO. As the FIFO data is shifted into the SYN-DES module, the VCXO crystal frequency adjusts to a rate required to keep the FIFO half full. With no optical signal, or when the CPU determines that the radio is inoperative, the MUX inter-face sends an alarm indication signal (AIS) of all zeros into the data stream to the transceiver. AIS means dark fiber for NRZ optical signals, and all 1’s for the electrical CMI coder.
The transceiver takes the 4-bit data nibble and the clock and creates a 155.52 MHz clock and data stream for the optic and electrical interfaces. Code mark inversion (CMI) coding is used for electrical signals, while non return to zero (NRZ) coding and decoding is used for optical interface.
Table 3-11-B. SYNDES Cabling Operational Parameters
Part Number(s)*
* Dual Output Only: Both A & B SYNDES simultaneously have active TX's
Conductor Inside / Outside Fiber Size
Optical Frequency
8000516-01/04 (MM) 62.5 / 125 micron 1310 Nm, 1261 Nm min. 1360 Nm max.
8000516-02 75-ohm BNC
8000516-03/05 (SM) 9 / 125 micron 1310 nm, 1261 Nm min. 1360 Nm max.
Microwave Networks
CM SONET/SDH Page 3-11-3
The optical transceiver takes the serial differential 155.52 MHz data and turns it into light for the multimode SC connector fiber. The electrical interface is transformer-coupled levels with CMI code with a nominal 1-volt level into 75 ohms.
The monitor port provides an exact copy of the electrical output for monitoring performance of the output drive signal.
RXNibble
fromMUX
TXNibbleto
MUX
MUX
Clock Recovery
Op
ticT
ran
sce
ive
r
VCXO38.88MHz
FIFO
HALF FULL
Reduce Jitter
ACU Control
and StatusElectricalInterface
OR
ACUNibble
Figure 3-11-2. SYNDES Block Diagram
Chapter 3 SYNDES
Page 3-11-4 CM SONET/SDH
3.0 SYNDES Front Access
The SYNDES has an alarm LED that lights in an alarm condition. The alarm LED, illustrated in Figure 3-11-3, is controlled by the ACU. An example of a SYNDES alarm would be when the AIS detects the absence of clock data when transmitting. The AIS sends a message of all one’s to the ACU to initiate an alarm. The LED lights up to indicate the alarm condition.
.
1.ALM LED -Red LED that indicates the SYNDES is in alarm. This LED is controlled by the ACU.
1
Figure 3-11-3. SYNDES Front Panel LED Alarm Function
Microwave Networks
CM SONET/SDH Page 3-11-5
4.0 SYNDES Jumpers
Refer to Figure 3-11-4 for jumper locations. Table 3-11-C lists the jumper settings.
Table 3-11-C. SYNDES Jumper Settings
Jumper Setting Function Enabled
JP3 1-2 Normal
2-3 Reports customer input data ‘PRESENT’ to the ACU. No ALARM will be reported even without input. Useful during installing when you know that the no input exists and do not want the input alarm.
Figure 3-11-4. Jumper Locations for SYNDES Module
FOR HANDLING/PACKAGING
ELECTROSTATIC
SENSITIVE
DEVICES
OBSERVE PRECAUTIONS
L1
LD1
T1
T2
T3
U9
U4
U8
U10
U3
U11
P2
P1X
12
U1
U5
U6
U2
R2
R3
R4
C1
C2
U13
Y1
TP1
TP3
TP2
TP4
U12
JP3
TADIRAN MICROWAVE NETWORKS
PWA 8000516- REVMADE IN U.S.A.
CM SONET SYNDES
C B A
C AB
+ + +
GN
D
TD
+
TD
-
+5
+5
SD
RD
-
RD
+
GN
D
OUT IN
5
10
15
20
25
30
5
10
15
20
25
30
1
1
1
C
1
EQ
UIP
NONEQUIP
50 ohm
Test line for:
Chapter 3 SYNDES
Page 3-11-6 CM SONET/SDH
CM System User’s Manual 11/06/03 Page 3-12-1
1.0 General InformationThe Service Channel Unit (SCU) provides two VF channels that operate from 300 Hz to 3400 Hz, and two 19.2 kbps data channels using an RS232C/RS423 electrical interface. The MLN7876 SCU, shown in Figure 3-12-1, resides in the SP shelf of the radio.
F-1240
Figure 3-12-1. Service Channel Unit
Section 3-12Service Channel Unit (SCU)
Chapter 3 Service Channel Unit
Page 3-12-2 11/06/03 CM System User’s Manual
2.0 Functional DescriptionThe SCU can be used in a 1x1 protection configuration, or it can be used unprotected by plugging the SCU into the A radio side of the SP shelf. The four 64 kbps channels on the SCU provide two VF (PCM) channels and two data ports. The two VF channels operate from 0.3 to 3.4 kHz.
The other two channels are presented as data channels which can accommodate up to 19.2 kbps asynchronous data each. The interface to the data channels is a three-wire (TX,RX,GND) RS232C/RS423-type connection at the Access Panel. See the Installation chapter of this manual for connector and pin designations.
Figure 3-12-2 shows a functional block diagram of the SCU.
On LineRelay
On LineRelay
SwitchControl
3 StateDrivers
HS PLL
PCMCODEC
PassThru
PCMCODEC
PassThru
+ 4
MUX
+ 4
DE-MUX
ACUInterface
PassThru
FRAME TX
CLOCK TX
CLOCK RX
FRAME RX
DATATX
DATARX
To/From ACU
From Clock Monitors
TIP1RING1
TIP1RING1
TIP2RING2
TIP2RING2
VF Interface
VF Interface
DATA1
DATA2
DATA1DATA2
AlarmRED LED
D2
To/FromMUX
ASYNC/SYNC
F-1244
Figure 3-12-2. SCU Block Diagram
Microwave Networks
CM System User’s Manual 11/06/03 Page 3-12-3
3.0 Front Panel FunctionsRefer to Figure 3-12-3 for the location of the following indicators:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
F-1241
1. CH1 INPUT GAIN — Sets input channel 1 signal level by measuring TP5 voltage at 1.46 ± 0.01 V peak-to-peak with -3.5 dBm, 1 kHz sine wave input. Note: Do not adjust. This is a factory setting.
2. CH2 INPUT GAIN — Sets input channel 2 signal level by measuring TP6 voltage at 1.46 ± 0.01 V peak-to-peak with -3.5 dBm, 1 kHz sine wave input. Note: Do not adjust. This is a factory setting.
3. CH1 OUTPUT GAIN — Sets output channel 1 signal lev-el by putting in -3.5 dBm, 1 kHz sine wave input, and ad-justing to -3.5 dBm output gain. Note: Do not adjust. This is a factory setting.
4. CH2 OUTPUT GAIN — Sets output channel 2 signal lev-el by putting in -3.5 dBm, 1 kHz sine wave input, and ad-justing to -3.5 dBm output gain. Note: Do not adjust. This is a factory setting.
5. ALM LED — Red LED that indicates the Service Channel Unit is in alarm. The alarm may be caused by an internal fault or a failure of the MUX module. This LED is controlled by the ACU.
6. Switch S1 — DIP switch used for asynchronous data in-put 1. See Table 3-12-B for switch setting information.
7. Switch S2 — DIP switch used for asynchronous data input 2. See Table 3-12-B for switch setting information.
Figure 3-12-3. Front Panel Functions of the SCU
Chapter 3 Service Channel Unit
Page 3-12-4 11/06/03 CM System User’s Manual
4.0 Configuring the SCUThe Service Channel Unit contains three jumpers and two DIP switches. Jumpers set voice fre-quency channels and the DIP switches configure the data channels. Refer to Figure 3-12-4 for jumper locations. Table 3-12-A lists jumper settings, and Table 3-12-B lists S1 and S2 switch settings.
Table 3-12-A. SCU Jumper Settings
Jumper Setting Function Enabled
J1 1-2 High gain (23 dB) on VF Channel 2, -16 dBm input, +7 dBm output
2-3 Low gain (0 dB) on VF Channel 2, -3.5 dBm input, -3.5 dBm output
J2 1-2 High gain (23 dB) on VF Channel 1, -16 dBm input, +7 dBm output
2-3 Low gain (0 dB) on VF Channel 1, -3.5 dBm input, -3.5 dBm output
J4 1-2 Oscillator test
2-3 Oscillator enabled
See Table 3-13-B on the following page for S1 & S2 DIP-switch settings.
Figure 3-12-4. SCU Jumper Locations and Dip Switch Settings
Microwave Networks
CM System User’s Manual 11/06/03 Page 3-12-5
Table 3-12-B. SCU Switch S1 (CH1) and S2 (CH2) Settings For Digital Channels
DIP-Switch Position
SettingSwitch logic: ON=closed; OFF=open
Channel Configuration
Factory defaults in bold: Not used, Normal, 2 stop bits, 1 parity bit, 8 data bits, 9.6 kbps
1 OFF Not used
2 ON Bypass data channel *
OFF Normal data channel operation
3 ON 1 stop bit
OFF 2 stop bits
4 ON No parity bit
OFF 1 parity bit
5 ON 7 bit data
OFF 8 bit data
6, 7, 8 ON, ON, ON 19.2 kbps data rate
ON, ON, OFF 9.6 kbps data rate
ON, OFF, ON 4.8 kbps data rate
ON, OFF, OFF 2.4 kbps data rate
OFF, ON, ON 1.2 kbps data rate
OFF, ON, OFF 0.6 kbps data rate
OFF, OFF, ON 0.3 kbps data rate
OFF, OFF, OFF 0.15 kbps data rate
* Bypass mode lets the SCU automatically adjust to the pattern and format of incoming data, but is not recommended for use above 2.4 kbps. In Normal operation SCU DIP-switch settings must match the pattern and format of incoming data.
Chapter 3 Service Channel Unit
Page 3-12-6 11/06/03 CM System User’s Manual
CM System User’s Manual Page 3-13-1
1.0 General InformationThe optional Orderwire Unit (OWU) works in conjunction with the Service Channel Unit (SCU) and an external handset to provide orderwire service over properly equipped radio links. The OWU, part number MLN7201, resides in the SP shelf of the radio. Figure 3-13-1 shows the OWU.
F-0119-O
Figure 3-13-1. Orderwire Unit
Section 3-13Orderwire Unit (OWU)
Chapter 3 OWU
Page 3-13-2 CM System User’s Manual
2.0 Description of FunctionThe OWU, when used in conjunction with the SCU, provides a full-featured DTMF signaling orderwire. It also provides two 4-way/4-wire bridges which can be used for either two 3 kHz channels, intended for VF communications, or one 7 kHz channel designed to accommodate split-band type alarm reporting systems, selectable station calling employing DTMF signaling, and bridging circuits to interconnect multiple radio links at junctions and repeater sites.
Orderwire service utilizes VF Channel 1 on the Service Channel Unit. In a repeater configuration you can set VF Channel 1 on the Service Channel Unit in the “through” mode with the LDU to eliminate the unnecessary digitized noise generated from the PCM coding/decoding process. This “through” mode is interrupted when the off-hook situation of the handset is detected.
The OWU works in either a protected or unprotected radio configuration, interfacing with single or redundant SCU modules. The OWU itself is not protected.
The levels of Channel 13 and Channel 23 of the VF bridges are adjusted using jumper J1.
The Orderwire handset connects to the Orderwire Handset Jack on the Access Panel. When not in use, the handset hangs from a hook on the right side of the radio.
To make a call using the Orderwire Handset, set the switch on the handle to the Talk position. With the handset keypad, dial the three digits of the station you wish to call. Speak into the microphone in the keypad.
To call all stations at once press the * key. To terminate a call press the # key.
Figure 3-13-2 is a functional block diagram of the Orderwire Unit
Microwave Networks
CM System User’s Manual Page 3-13-3
Sum &Output
Amplifier
T
R
Sum &Output
Amplifier
T
R
Sum &Output
Amplifier
T
R
Sum &Output
Amplifier
T
R
SumAmplifier
TR
Auxiliary OutputAmplifier
TR
Handset OutputAmplifier
Sum &Output
Amplifier
T
R
DTMF Decoder& Processor
AddressSwitches
PowerSupplyAlarm
Off-HookControl
HookSwitch
InputAmplifier
TR
+5-5-6
Buzzer
Sum &Output
Amplifier
T
R
Sum &Output
Amplifier
T
R
Sum &Output
Amplifier
T
RInputAmplifier
TR
InputAmplifier
TR
InputAmplifier
TR
InputAmplifier
TR
InputAmplifier
TR
InputAmplifier
TR
InputAmplifier
TR
InputAmplifier
TR
From Hook Switch(From Handset)
Handset VF Input-16 dBm/600 Ohm
(From Interface Panel)
SC 1 Input-3.5 dBm/600 Ohm
(From SCU)
VF 11 Input-3.5 dBm/600 Ohm(From Fuse Panel)
VF 12 Input-3.5 dBm/600 Ohm(From Fuse Panel)
VF 13 Input-16 or -3.5 dBm/600 Ohm
(From Fuse Panel)
SC 2 Input-3.5 dBm/600 Ohm
(From SCU)
VF 21 Input-3.5 dBm/600 Ohm(From Fuse Panel)
VF 22 Input-3.5 dBm/600 Ohm(From Fuse Panel)
VF 23 Input-16 or -3.5 dBm/600 Ohm
(From Fuse Panel)
Alarm Output (To ACU) Station Address Output(To ACU)
Off-Hook Out(To SCU/ACU)
Handset VF Output+7 dBm/600 Ohm(To Interface Panel)
Auxiliary VF Output-3.5 or +7 dBm/600 Ohm(To Fuse Panel)
SC 1 Output-3.5 dBm/600 Ohm(To SCU)
VF 11 Output-3.5 dBm/600 Ohm(To Fuse Panel)
VF 12 Output-3.5 dBm/600 Ohm(To Fuse Panel)
VF 13 Output-3.5 or +7 dBm/600 Ohm(To Fuse Panel)
SC 2 Output-3.5 dBm/600 Ohm(To SCU)
VF 21 Output-3.5 dBm/600 Ohm(To Fuse Panel)
VF 22 Output-3.5 dBm/600 Ohm(To Fuse Panel)
VF 23 Output-3.5 or +7dBm/600 Ohm(To Fuse Panel)
Gain Set
Gain Set
Low PassFilter
Gain Set
Figure 3-13-2. Order Wire Unit Operations
Order Wire Unit Block Diagram
Chapter 3 OWU
Page 3-13-4 CM System User’s Manual
3.0 Front Panel FunctionsRefer to Figure 3-13-3 for the location of the following indicator:
4.0 Handset Functions
4.1 Handset Functions
The Orderwire Unit comes with a handset which plugs into the Access Panel. Refer to Figure 3-13-4 for the locations of the following handset components.
1. Talk Switch — Activates or deactivates the handset. When the handset is not in use, set the switch to Off. This allows the buzzer to sound if that particular station is called. When the handset is in use, move the switch to the Talk position, thus dis-abling the buzzer. Note, however, that an “all call” signal activates the buzzer regardless of the switch setting.
2. Handset Keypad — Keypad for dialing other stations. The * key calls all stations. The # key terminates a call.
Note: The part number for the Handset is MLN7324A
Figure 3-13-3. Front Panel Functions of the OWU
1. ALM LED — Red LED that indicates the Orderwire Unit is in alarm. This LED is controlled by the ACU.1
Microwave Networks
CM System User’s Manual Page 3-13-5
.
4.2 Jumpers and Switches
The OWU contains two jumpers and three rotary switches. Refer to Figure 3-13-5 for jumper and switch locations. Table 3-13-A lists jumper settings. Table 3-13-B listsswitch settings.
1 2 3
4 5 6
7
*
8
0
9
#
Talk
Off
1
2
handset.cdr
Figure 3-13-4. Functions of the Orderwire Handset (MLN7324A)
E1
K1 K
2 K3
J12
1
40
39
F-0118-O
Figure 3-13-5. OWU Jumper and Switch Locations
Chapter 3 OWU
Page 3-13-6 CM System User’s Manual
1 Select one ring duration
2 Select one ring tone
3 Select one ring rate
4 Select one VF channel 23 gain adjust
5 Select one VF channel 13 gain adjust
6 Select one AUX out enable
7 Select one handset out enable
8 Select one AUX output level
Table 3-13-A. OWU Jumper Settings
Jumper Setting Function Enabled
E1 1-2 Factory setting
J1 1-2 Not used
3-4 Ring duration 4 seconds1
5-6 Ring duration 8 seconds1
7-8 Ring duration continuous1
9-10 Ring tone 2.5 KHz2
11-12 Ring tone 2.0 KHz2
13-14 Ring rate 2.2 Hz3
15-16 Ring rate 5.5 Hz3
17-18 VF channel 23 gain adjust (-3.5 dB In; -3.5 dB Out)4
19-20 VF channel 23 gain adjust (-16 dB In; +7 dB Out)4
21-22 VF channel 13 gain adjust (-3.5 dB In; -3.5 dB Out)5
23-24 VF channel 13 gain adjust (-16 dB In; +7 dB Out)5
25-26 AUX out enable on-hook (controlled by off-hook switch)6
27-28 AUX out enable continuous (AUX output always On)6
29-30 Handset out enable off-hook (controlled by off-hook switch)7
31-32 Handset out enable continuous (speaker always On)7
33-34 AUX output level -3.5 dBm (to hook up external speaker)8
35-36 AUX output level +7 dBm (to hook up external speaker)8
37-38 Not used
39-40 Not used
Table 3-13-B. OWU Switch Settings
Switch Function Enabled
K1 Sets third digit of the station ID
K2 Sets second digit of the station ID
K3 Sets first digit of the station ID
Microwave Networks
CM System User’s Manual Page 3-13-7
5.0 Orderwire, Service Channel, and BridgeConfiguration
When the Orderwire Unit is used with the SCU set up for dual narrow band VF, each SCU VF channel of the host radio is connected to one of the two VF bridges. This leaves three bridge legs available on each VF channel for connecting other radio SCUs or external equipment such as alarm systems. In the example shown in Figure 3-13-6, the two SCU VF channels and their associated VF bridges are completely isolated from one another.
Figure 3-13-7 shows the Orderwire used with the SCU set up for single wide band VF. The connection shown between VF13 and VF23 links the two bridges together to effectively provide four bridge legs available for connecting other radio SCUs or external equipment such as alarm systems. In this example, the second SCU VF channel is not applicable, though the bridge leg labeled SCU #2 is not available for other usage.
Figure 3-13-6. Orderwire When Used with SCU Set Up for Dual Narrow Band VF
OWU
SCU-A
VF#1
VF#2
SCU-B (protected)
VF#1
VF#2
Internal
VF
11
VF12VF13
SCU
1
VF 23
VF 22
VF 21
SCU 2
Chapter 3 OWU
Page 3-13-8 CM System User’s Manual
Note: The VF13 to VF23 connection is made externally at the terminal block and could be any two available bridge legs.
Figure 3-13-7. Orderwire When Used with SCU Set Up for Single Wide Band VF
OWU
SCU-A
VF#1
VF#2
SCU-B (protected)
VF#1
VF#2
Internal
VF
11
VF12VF13
SCU
1
VF 23
VF 22
VF 21
SCU 2
CM System User’s Manual 2/4/04 Page 3-14-1
1.0 General InformationThe optional Wayside Traffic Unit (WTU) is available with high-capacity CM radios. It provides an extra DS1 channel in addition to the data lines. The WTU, part number 8000608-00, or the earlier MLN7330, operates in the signal processing shelf. Figure 3-14-1 shows the current WTU.
The WTU receives one DS1 channel and, on the MLN7330, one asynchronous data channel and presents them to the MUX. It also receives data from the MUX and outputs one DS1 channel and the asynchronous data channel on the MLN7330. Using the WTU does not increase required bandwidth nor does it reduce radio performance. The WTU also meets DS1 pulse mask requirements of ANSI T1.403-1995.
Figure 3-14-1. Wayside Traffic Unit
Section 3-14Wayside Traffic Unit (WTU)
Chapter 3 Wayside Traffic Unit
Page 3-14-2 2/4/04 CM System User’s Manual
2.0 Description of FunctionIn the radio transmit direction (from customer into radio), the wayside DS1 signal enters from the access panel as Figure 3-14-2 shows. The signal goes to a line interface chip that equalizes (filters) the bipolar signal. Equalizer gain is set by configuration switch settings. The line interface recovers the clock and data.
The recovered signal goes to a loss of signal (LOS) circuit that detects a dead line. LOS occurs when there are no transitions on the incoming line.
Recovered clock and data then pass a decoder that converts the data from three level format (+, 0, –) to a single non-return to zero (NRZ) data line. The decoder uses either B8Z3 or AMI coding as set by the configuration switch. Bipolar violations are also detected in this circuit.
Decoded data and clock go to an AIS detector and out to the output buffer. The detection of the AIS signal occurs when three or more zeros are received in 2048 bit periods. An output buffer then sends the signal to the main and standby MUX.
On the radio receive side, the WTU accepts clock and NRZ data signals from the MUX. The module converts the clock signal and NRZ data signal into a DS1 format and, on the MLN7330, a second NRZ data signal into RS423 format. These signals route to the access panel for customer use. The module includes a 1x1 protection switch required for system maintenance. Wayside traffic switches independent of customer data.
In the receive direction, the MUX cards send gapped clock and data to a buffer in the WTU. Clock signals go to activity detectors. If the clocks have a gap that exceeds five clock periods, the detectors generate an alarm. The alarm can indicate a missing or failed MUX or signal path.
Clock and data from each MUX goes to a selector that delivers clock and data from the active (on-line) path to the WTU. A circuit checks the clock frequency to ensure the WTU is used with the correct radio configuration. If the DS1 WTU is placed in a radio with the International E-rate MUX (2.048 MHz,) the circuit generates a PLL alarm.
The selected clock and data also go to the AIS Generator that either passes the selected clock and data on or activates an Alarm Indication Signal (AIS). The AIS data pattern is all ones and the clock is the 1.544 MHz reference clock. The output of the AIS generator is sent to a line interface.
As the data enters the line interface chip, it passes through what the chip calls the remote loopback (RLB) switch. This switch, when selected, switches in data from the T1 line to implement local loopback for the system. Note: The local loopback function on the WTU board is the line interface chip's remote loopback and vise versa.
After the RLB switch, the data goes through a jitter attenuator that removes the jitter (gapped clocks) that comes from the MUX. The smoothed clock and data then goes to the B8ZS or AMI encoder. The encoded data goes to a predistorter pulse shaping circuit specified by SW1, 2, 3, and 4. It then proceeds through the line drivers and leaves the line interface chip.
Encoded data leaves the line interface chip to three places. The main output of the online WTU goes through a transformer to the DS1 wayside port on the access panel. When the WTU is offline, the signal goes to a 100-Ω dummy load. The dummy load matches line impedance on the additional destinations of the encoded data signal.
The encoded data also goes to a unity-gain amplifier that buffers the signal that then goes through a transformer and out to the DS1 monitor port at the access panel. The monitor port is a buffered output used for troubleshooting; it does not meet pulse waveform specifications.
Microwave Networks
CM System User’s Manual 2/4/04 Page 3-14-3
The encoded data from the line interface also goes to an activity detection circuit that alarms if one of the lines is stuck high or low. This provides an output driver monitor function.
DS1 Input
F-0133-O
LineInterfaceTransmit
De-Jitter AMI/B8ZSDecoder
3-StateDrivers
XFMR
NRZ Data
NRZ CLK
To MUX
ClkRecovery PLL
LineInterfaceReceive
LineCoder FIFO 3-State
Buffers
NRZ Data
NRZ CLK
FR CLK
From MUX
CodeSelect
ModuleFail
ACU Data
ACU ADDR
ACU R/W
To/From ACU
47.879MHzOSC
Thru/Cross Sel
Los
AIS ControlLB Select
XFMR
DS1Output
Alarmand
ControlInterface
ActivityDetector
Access Panel
Figure 3-14-2. Functional Blocks of the Wayside Traffic Unit
Chapter 3 Wayside Traffic Unit
Page 3-14-4 2/4/04 CM System User’s Manual
3.0 Front Panel FeaturesRefer to Figure 3-14-3 for the location of the Alarm LED.
4.0 MLN7330 Jumpers and Configuration SwitchThe early-model MLN7330 WTU has five jumpers and a configuration switch. Figure 3-14-4 shows jumper and switch locations. Table 3-14-A lists jumper settings, and Table 3-14-B lists switch settings.
1
F-0044-O
1. ALM LED — Red LED; indicates the WTU is in alarm. This LED is controlled by the ACU
Figure 3-14-3. WTU Alarm LED Location
Figure 3-14-4. MLN7330 WTU Jumper and Switch Locations
Microwave Networks
CM System User’s Manual 2/4/04 Page 3-14-5
Use a flat-head screw driver to change the rotary switch setting by turning the rotary dial till the marking line is even with the selected configuration setting for line buildout.
Table 3-14-A MLN7330 WTU Line Coding Jumper Settings*
Jumper Setting Function EnabledE1 1-2 Normal operation
1-3, 2-4, 3-4 Factory testE3 1-2 DS1 channel equipped
2-3 DS1 channel not equippedE6 1-2 Normal operation
1-3, 3-4 Factory testE8 1-2 DS1 channel - AMI line code
2-3 DS1 channel - B8ZS line codeE10 1-2 Asynchronous data channel receiver enabled
2-3 Asynchronous data channel receiver disabled* Jumpers not listed are not used
Table 3-14-B MLN7330 WTU Line Buildout Switch Settings
Switch Setting Function EnabledK2 0—8 not used
1 Channel Not Equipped9 DS1 line buildout 1 to 131 feetA DS1 line buildout 131 to 262 feetB DS1 line buildout 262 to 393 feetC DS1 line buildout 393 to 524 feetD DS1 line buildout 524 to 655 feet
Chapter 3 Wayside Traffic Unit
Page 3-14-6 2/4/04 CM System User’s Manual
5.0 8000608-00 Configuration SwitchThe current WTU has one eight-position configuration switch that Figure 3-14-5 shows. Table 3-14-C lists line buildout (length) settings, and Table 3-14-D listsline code settings. SW1-position 6 must stay on (closed) to enable WTU output.
BOLD SHOWS DEFAULT SETTINGS
Table 3-14-C 8000608-00 WTU Equalizer Control / Line Length Select Settings
Line Interface Unit Equalizer Control / Line Length Select0 = OFF (OPEN) I = ON (CLOSED)
SW1-1 SW1-2 SW1-3 SW1-4DS1 / T1Function
Pulse /Line Length Gain
1 1 0 1 SHORT HAUL 0-100 FT 0.6 dB 12 dB0 0 1 1 SHORT HAUL 133 – 266 FT / 1.2 dB 12 dB1 0 1 1 SHORT HAUL 266 – 399 FT / 1.8 dB 12 dB0 1 1 1 SHORT HAUL 399 – 533 FT / 2.4 dB 12 dB1 1 1 1 SHORT HAUL 533 – 655 FT / 3.0 dB 12 dB0 0 0 0 LONG HAUL 0.0 dB PULSE 36 dB0 1 0 0 LONG HAUL -7.5 dB PULSE 36 dB0 0 1 0 LONG HAUL -15.0 dB PULSE 36 dB0 1 1 0 LONG HAUL -22.5 dB PULSE 36 dB1 0 0 0 LONG HAUL 0.0 dB PULSE 26 dB1 1 0 0 LONG HAUL -7.5 dB PULSE 26 dB1 0 1 0 LONG HAUL -15.0 dB PULSE 26 dB1 1 1 0 LONG HAUL -22.5 dB PULSE 26 dB
SW1
Figure 3-14-5. 8000608-00 WTU Configuration Switch Location
Microwave Networks
CM System User’s Manual 2/4/04 Page 3-14-7
Table 3-14-D 8000608-00 Line Code Select Settings
Line Code (SW1–5)
OFF (OPEN) B8ZSON (CLOSED) AMI
Chapter 3 Wayside Traffic Unit
Page 3-14-8 2/4/04 CM System User’s Manual
CM System User Manual Page 3-15-1
1.0 General InformationThe Network Management unit (NMU, MLN7481B and C) supervises and monitors the communication equipment and acts as a network element in the Telescan network management system (NMS). The NMU board mounts on the ACU (Section 3-7). The MLN7481B normally ships as a option kit with its associated hardware (MLN1532A). NMU MLN7481C, or later, ships with systems that will be elements in a loop-protected network.
NOTE: For a description of the SNMP NMU see Appendix G.
2.0 Description of FunctionFigure 3-15-1 is a block diagram of the Network Management unit. The firmware, which controls the communication equipment from the microprocessor, is downloaded into an EEPROM via the network from the Telescan NMS operation and maintenance center or mediation device. Embedded OS is a real time multitasking operating system, which resides on the NMU in an EPROM. Embedded OS permits the application firmware to perform multiple tasks in real-time on the NMU.
The NMU performs the following functions:
• Collects node summary status information from the communication equipment, time and date stamps it, and forwards it to the NMS master.
• Monitors parity error counts and calculates BER and errored seconds.
• Allows local access with a laptop PC or modem, through an RS-232 port at 9.6 kbps with a data format of eight data bits, one start bit, one stop bit, and no parity.
• Communicates with the NMS through a digital bridge using four wire RS-485 or an RS-422 interface. The data is required to be driven asynchronously at 19.2 k with data format of eight data bits, one start bit, one stop bit, and odd parity.
• Supports downloading of application programs through the NMS to the NMU.
• Permits access of NMS over the embedded overhead without sacrificing system performance.
• Continuously monitors power and performance of the NMU.
• Controls the communication bridge, which enables access of CPU and embedded overhead channel to the NMS.
The network port on the access panel connects network management data to co-located radios and the Telescan network management system. Early-model and 4/8/12DS1 access panels only accept a uni-directional (RS485) connection. The unidirectional connection involves setting S2 on the NMU in a master/slave (3-port bridge) configuration. The high-capacity access panel—MGN8112A—accepts a unidirectional or omni-directional (RS-422) connection. The omni-directional connection is only available on the MLN 7487C, or later, NMU and involves setting S2 to a West/East (4-port bridge) configuration. Jumpers on the Network Bridge Interface set the access panel as a unidirectional or omni-directional interface (Page 3-1-2).
The NMU board has seven jumpers and two DIP switches. Figure 3-15-2 shows jumper and DIP switch locations.
Section 3-15Network Management Unit (NMU)
Chapter 3 Network Management Unit
Page 3-15-2 CM System User‘s Manual
UART
F-0242-r0594
TXD
RXD
188XLµP
ControlBus
AddressBus
DataBus
XRESET
DRAM
FLASH(Optional)
IntrController
#2
IntrController
#1
EPROM(BIOS)
(Emb. DOS)(Appl.)
RealTime Clock
CNT
GlueLogic
NMS Bridge
WDT
DATA BUS
RX
TX
RX
TX
NMSNMS
RS-485 INF.
CNT
Radio Service Channel
ParallelOUT
ParallelIN
UART
ExternalUserI/O
A/D
Control Bus
Address Bus
RFU RSL
TTLOutputs
TTLInputs
RS-232
DRV/Rcvr
LocalAccessRS-232
TXRX
RXS
13/Conf Sw
4
4
TXS
NMU Control
Timer/Counters
MRIU Control
MRIU
DRVRSBuffer
Buffer
Access PanelTB1
UART
UART
ACUComm
Figure 3-15-1. Network Management Unit Block Diagram
Microwave Networks
CM System User’s Manual Page 3-15-3
2.1 Jumpers
Figure 3-15-2 illustrates jumper locations. Refer to Table 3-15-A to determine NMU jumper settings.
Note: When upgrading to NMU capabilities, the U4 PROM p/n is MLN1532. When ordering a replacement for the U4 PROM, order MLN7481 and MVN4018A.
* Default settings
Table 3-15-A. NMU Jumper Settings
Jumper Setting Function Enabled
E1 1-2* Oscillator enabled
2-3 RTC test enabled
E2 1-2 Test enabled
2-3* Com port oscillator enabled
E3 1-2* Watchdog timer enabled
2-3 Watchdog timer disabled
E9 Jumper installed Normal operation
E10 Jumper installed Normal operation
E2E1
OP
EN
OP
EN
U3
F-0235c
CA
UT
ION
STA
TIC
SE
NS
ITIV
E
11
1E3
U4
S2
CLO
SE
D
S1
CLO
SE
D
E9 E10
Figure 3-15-2. Jumpers on the Network Management Unit (NMU)
Chapter 3 Network Management Unit
Page 3-15-4 CM System User‘s Manual
2.2 DIP Switches
The network site address must be set for the NMU. The address, a binary number assigned to the NMU reflecting its network site, is set using dip switch Set S1.
When the dip switches are set to open or closed (See Figure 3-15-3), a numeric value is established that the system can read. Set the rockers open or closed so that the sum represented by their numeric values equals the NMU address.
For example, to set the site address for site 26, set rockers 2, 4, and 5 to the Open position; all others should be set to Closed. The sum of the values for rockers 2, 4, and 5 is: 2 + 8 + 16 = 26
When the dip switch is set to Open, the address values are added to equal the site number. When the dip switch is set to Closed, the address values are not added.
The dip switch settings for Switch Set S1 are listed in Table 3-15-B.
DIP Switch Set S2 settings are listed in Table 3-15-C. S2 dip switch positions 5, 7, and 8 are used to configure NMU for 3-port or 4-port bridge configuration.
Table 3-15-B. NMU Switch S1 Settings
Rocker Function Open Closed
1 Site Address 1 Added Ignored
2 Site Address 2 Added Ignored
3 Site Address 4 Added Ignored
4 Site Address 8 Added Ignored
5 Site Address 16 Added Ignored
6 Site Address 32 Added Ignored
7 Site Address 64 Added Ignored
8 Site Address 128 Added Ignored
Table 3-15-C. NMU Switch S2 Settings
Function
Rocker Positions
1-4 5 6 7 8
Site Master Open Closed Open Closed Closed
Slave Open Open Open Closed Closed
4-Port Bridge* Open Open Open Open Open
* On NMU part number MLN7481C only
F-0793-0594
Open
Closed
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128Values
Open
Closed
Figure 3-15-3. DIP Switch S1 Values
CM System User’s Manual 2/27/04 Page 4-1
1.0 IntroductionChapter 4, “Equipment Installation,” describes radio equipment installation in the following stages:
1. Preparing the installation site
2. Unpacking the radio
3. Securing the radio rack or cabinet
4. Making any necessary connections to other equipment
5. Installing a computer/terminal to use for monitoring the system
6. Putting the equipment into operation
Other than this Introduction, major sections in this chapter are:
2.0 Preparing for Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 4-13.0 Rack Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 4-24.0 Access Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 4-65.0 Connecting Performance Monitoring Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 4-136.0 Antenna Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 4-21
2.0 Preparing for InstallationProper planning for the installation includes: locating an appropriate site, correctly unpacking the radio, and safely securing the radio rack or cabinet. Following the guidelines presented in this section will assure trouble-free use of your CM radio.
2.1 Location Considerations
When selecting a new site:
1. Locate the equipment in a controlled environment.
2. Ensure adequate overhead loading and floor support.
3. Provide sufficient light for installation and maintenance.
Chapter 4Equipment Installation
Chapter 4 Installation
Page 4-2 2/27/04 CM System User’s Manual
2.2 Unpacking the Equipment
CAUTION!
Disassemble the crate carefully to prevent damage to the radio
The CM radio and its accessory kit are shipped in one box with all plug-in modules mounted in their proper slots. Table 4-A lists the content of the radio kits:
Rack-mounted radio equipment is shipped in a special packing crate to minimize the effect of normal shocks received in shipment.
The crate should remain intact and sheltered until arrival at the installation site. However, the crate should be checked as soon as it is received for any signs of damage caused by shipping. Claims for damage during shipment should be made immediately to the responsible transportation company.
When more than one rack-mounted radio is delivered to a site, each rack-mounted radio is identifiable by the sales order attached to the rack. After you have carefully unpacked each crate in your order you may proceed to the rack-mounted radio installation process.
3.0 Rack InstallationNote: If the radio is to be installed into an area where no rear access is available, connect DC power as described in the External Connections section prior to securing the rack.
Once the rack-mounted radio is unpacked it must be secured, by being bolted to the floor. The rack-mounted radio comes installed in a self-supported or overhead-supported relay rack. An overhead-supported rack requires support to be provided at the top of the relay rack as well as being bolted onto the floor.
Table 4-A CM Accessory Kits
Item P/N Quantity
ACCESSORY, 24V/48V MLN7730FUSE, GMT, 120V, FAST BLO, 3 AMP 3110017-09 2FUSE, GMT, 120V, FAST BLO, 5 AMP 3110017-12 2FUSE, GMT, 120V, FAST BLO, 10 AMP 3110017-14 2TUNING TOOL ACCESSORY & INSTALLATION 6685389E36 1WRENCH, OPEN END, 1/4 x 5/16 INCH 6685389E37 1WRIST STRAP, STATIC CONTROL 6684760P01 1CABLE ASSY, BNC, 2PIN HDR, 72", 70MHz 3085465H03 1CABLE ASSY, DS3, PCB-BACKPLANE 3085397H01 2
Note: This cable is used for IF loopback testing. IF Loopback is not supported on 3DS3 or higher capacity radios.
RF LOOPBACK KIT MLN7898 1CABLE ASSY,COAX, BB AMP TO TX CONV, 9.50" 3085571J01 1CABLE ASSY,SMA(M)-SMA(M),.141 CONF, 7.50" 8108615-75 1ATTENUATOR, FIXED, 20dB, SMA, 12.5GHz, 2W 2180011-20 2
!
Microwave Networks
CM System User’s Manual 2/27/04 Page 4-3
Two wires should be run from both the A and B batteries to connect to TB1. For a single battery source and a protected system, add jumpers using 12 or 14 AWG stranded wires across +V of A to +V of B, and -V of A to -V of B terminals on TB1.
Figure 4-1 illustrates connecting the DC power to the back of the radio. Figure 4-2 illustrates the recommended connection for DC Power when two batteries are used. Figure 4-3 illustrates a battery source connection method with a single battery. It is recommended that you avoid using the connection method illustrated in Figure 4-4.
F-0738a
TB
1
A B
+V -V +V -V
Back of Radio
Top View
Figure 4-1 Customer DC Power Connections
TB1
A
B
+V
-V
+V
-V
F-0873a
BATT+
-
*Earth ground
Positive or Negative Voltagemay be Connected to Ground
CM-HC
G
*
*
Earth ground
BATT+
-
*
*
*
Figure 4-2 Recommended DC Power Connection for Dual Battery Source
Chapter 4 Installation
Page 4-4 2/27/04 CM System User’s Manual
IMPORTANT: Figure 4-4 illustrates battery source connection NOT RECOMMENDED for DC power.
;'
'
;'
'
$9:#
;
<=>*7
?>?'>,1(@72*7
(7
2
<
<
=>*7
<
Figure 4-3 DC Power Connection for a Single Battery Source
!
;'
'
;'
'
$9:/
;
<
=>*7
?>?'>
1=(2*7)77,*++,
(7$
2
<
<
<A
Figure 4-4 NOT RECOMMENDED DC Power Connection for Battery Source(s)
Microwave Networks
CM System User’s Manual 2/27/04 Page 4-5
3.1 Rack Ground Bar
Attached to the left front of the rack is a ground bar. This assembly accepts up to 6 AWG stranded grounding wire which has been hooked up to your 48-volt power cable. See Figure 4-5.
3.2 Power Cable Considerations
Cable size for power applications is determined by loop length of a power run, allowable voltage drop over that run, and the current to be carried. Current drains for the radio can be derived from the specifications in Chapter 1.
See Table 4-B for recommended minimum wire gauge sizes.
Table 4-B Recommended Minimum Wire Gauge Size
Loop Length ft. (m) Current (amps)
Feet Meters 10 20
20 6.1 14 AWG 14 AWG
40 12.2 14 AWG 10 AWG
60 18.3 10 AWG 8 AWG
80 24.4 10 AWG 8 AWG
100 30.5 10 AWG 6 AWG
Figure 4-5 Rack Ground Wiring
Ground Bus
Compression Clampfor # 6 AWG
OfficeGround
Front
Chapter 4 Installation
Page 4-6 2/27/04 CM System User’s Manual
4.0 Access Panels
4.1 General Description
Access panels for the CM 155-Mbps radio, Figure 4-6, have connections for 10/100BaseT, DS1, and DS3 lines; and 155-Mbps optical and electrical connections. Some of these connections do not apply to your application. Sub-D connections provide access to auxiliary alarm and relay controls. Modular connectors interface:
• voice frequency (VF) and data service channels• orderwire and audio bridge• alarm outputs• control outputs• external alarm inputs• ACU bridge connections• Network connections• auxiliary equipment connections• SCE connections
INOUT HANDSET WTU LOCAL ACCESS
STATUS
20 - 28
11 - 19
+CH 25-28
WAYSIDE
CH 13-24
CH 1-12
28 DS1 I/O
MANUAL
INOUTOC-3 3DS3/SONET SYNDES
3DS3 CH1 3DS3 CH2 3DS3 CH3
SYNDES
ACO
SONETSONETMON OUT IN
SONETAA
14V248V
NORMAL
05
ARF
TTL I/O
ALARM/CONTROL RELAYS
MINOR
FAILSECTION
DTE DCE
A53A
MAJOR
A5A3
AA5
10
SAPS BSPBP
4V284 V
NETWORK
251
26
26
1
1
J23 50
25
J22 50
25
26 J21 50EASTWEST
16
5
9
25
15
13
8
14
9
1
1OUT
IN
1 32
VF 1
VF 2
SPKRDGTL CH2
1 32 SCEDGTL CH1
INOUT HANDSET WTU LOCAL ACCESS
STATUS
20 - 28
11 - 19
MANUAL
INOUTOC-3 3DS3/SONET SYNDES
1DS1 2DS3 3DS3
SYNDES
ACO
SONETSONETMON OUT IN
SONETAA
14V248V
NORMAL
05
ARF
TTL I/O
ALARM/CONTROL RELAYS
MINOR
FAILSECTION
DTE DCE
A53A
MAJOR
A5A3
AA5
10
SAPS BSPBP
4V284 V
NETWORK
EASTWEST
16
5
9
25
15
13
8
14
9
1
1OUT
IN
1 32
VF 1
VF 2
SPKRDGTL CH2
1 32 SCEDGTL CH1
MLN8112
8209120
8209296
8209309
251
26
26
1
1
50
25
50
25
26 J21 50
Figure 4-6 155-Mbit/s Access Panels
Microwave Networks
CM System User’s Manual 2/27/04 Page 4-7
4.2 Access Panel Connections
Table 4-C lists the pin designations for the 50-pin DS1 and wayside channel connectors, J21 - J23. The DS3 and 155-Mbps electrical connections are 75-ohm BNC female connectors as Table 4-D lists. For 28 x DS1 or 1x DS3 set jumpers E1 and E2 on the back of the Access Panel to 1-2, but for 3DS3 set the jumpers to 2-3.
Table 4-E lists pin designations for the DB15 connector for TTL input and output. Table 4-F lists the pin designations for the DB25 connector for auxiliary alarm relays (Form C). See Table 4-G for pin designations of the RJ11 4-position 4-pin connectors; these include VF Channels, SCE, Digital Channels, AUX Interface, and speaker. See Table 4-H for pinouts of the Network Management port.
Table 4-C DS1 and Wayside Channel Connections
Connector Input Pins Output Pin
J21 J22 J23
Channel Tip Ring Tip Ring
1 13 25 39 14 26 1
2 14 26 40 15 27 2
3 15 27 41 16 28 3
4 16 28 42 17 29 4
5 17 W1* 43 18 30 5
6 18 44 19 31 6
7 19 45 20 32 7
8 20 46 21 33 8
9 21 47 22 34 9
10 22 48 23 35 10
11 23 49 224 36 11
12 24 50 25 37 12
GND 38 13
* Wayside channel
+CH 25-28
WAYSIDE
CH 13-24
CH 1-12
28 DS1 I/O
251
26
26
1
1
J23 50
25
J22 50
25
26 J21 50
Chapter 4 Installation
Page 4-8 2/27/04 CM System User’s Manual
Table 4-D DS3 and 155-Mbps Connections
Connection Description
Optical Connections
OC-3 IN SC Duplex adapter, per ANSI X3T9.3 SC
OC-3 OUT
DS3 / 155Mbps Electrical Connections
DS3 CH1/SONET MON
75-ohm BNC femaleSONET MON repeats the output signal for monitoring
DS3 CH2/SONET OUT
DS3 CH3/SONET IN
DS3 CH 1 DS3 CH 2 DS3 CH 3
SONETSONETMON OUT IN
SONET
OUT
IN
Microwave Networks
CM System User’s Manual 2/27/04 Page 4-9
Table 4-E DB15 TTL Interface Connections
Pin Signal
1 *TTL output 1
2 *TTL output 3
3 *TTL input 1
4 *TTL input 3
5 TTL Input 5
6 TTL Input 7
7 GND (ground)
8 GND
9 *TTL Output 2
10 *TTL output 4
11 *TTL Input 2
12 *TTL Input 4
13 TTL Input 6
14 TTL Input 8
15 GND
* Requires optional NMU Card.
Table 4-F DB25 Alarm/Control Relay Connections
Signal GND Normally Open(NO)
Common Normally Closed(NC)
Output 1 1 14 2
Output 2 15 3 16
Output 3 4 17 5
Output 4 18 6 19
Major Audio 7 20 8
Major Visual 21 9 22
Minor Audio 10 23 11
Minor Visual 24 12 25
GND 13
15
8
9
1
25
13
14
1
Chapter 4 Installation
Page 4-10 2/27/04 CM System User’s Manual
Table 4-G Modular (RJ11) Interface Connections
Pin Signal Pin Signal
VF1 Branch 1 Digital Channel 1
1 INPUT VF #1 TIP 1 RS232/423 INPUT #12 INPUT VF #1 RING 2 GND3 OUTPUT VF#1 TIP 3 GND4 OUTPUT VF #1 RING 4 RS232/423 OUTPUT #1
VF1 Branch 2 Digital Channel 2
1 INPUT VF #1 TIP 1 RS232/423 INPUT #12 INPUT VF #1 RING 2 GND3 OUTPUT VF#1 TIP 3 GND4 OUTPUT VF #1 RING 4 RS232/423 OUTPUT #1
VF1 Branch 3 OW Handset (PTT)
1 INPUT VF #1 TIP 1 IN MIC22 INPUT VF #1 RING 2 OUT SPK23 OUTPUT VF#1 TIP 3 OUT SPK14 OUTPUT VF #1 RING 4 IN MIC1
VF2 Branch 1 OW Speaker
1 INPUT VF #2 TIP 1 SPEAKER TIP2 INPUT VF #2 RING 2 SPEAKER RING3 OUTPUT VF#2 TIP 3 N/C4 OUTPUT VF #2 RING 4 N/C
VF2 Branch 2 SCE
1 INPUT VF #2 TIP 1 DATA INPUT (RD)2 INPUT VF #2 RING 2 GND3 OUTPUT VF#2 TIP 3 GND4 OUTPUT VF #2 RING 4 DATA OUTPUT
VF2 Branch 3 WAYSIDE WTU
1 INPUT VF #2 TIP 1 E1/DS1 OUT Tip2 INPUT VF #2 RING 2 E1/DS1 OUT Ring3 OUTPUT VF #2 TIP 3 E1/DS1 IN Tip4 OUTPUT VF #2 RING 4 E1/DS1 IN Ring
HAN DSET W TU
1 32
VF 1
VF 2
SPKRDGTL CH2
1 32 SCEDGTL CH1
Pin 1 is located at the top of the jack.
Microwave Networks
CM System User’s Manual 2/27/04 Page 4-11
4.3 Network Management Port Connections
This section discusses the network port for the proprietary P4 network. See Appendix G for the SNMP option connections.
The network port (Table 4-H) connects network management data to co-located radios and the network management system. The access panel accepts a uni- or omni-directional (RS-422) connection. The omni-directional connection involves setting the NMU to a 4-port bridge element. Jumpers on the Network Bridge Interface (Table 4-H) behind the front panel set the network connector as uni- (E4 and E10 in) or omni-directional (E5 and E12 in) while NMU jumpers set the bridge configuration.
Table 4-H lists the network connection pinning. Tx refers to signals out of the radio, Rx to signals to the radio. Master/Slave and West/East labels refer to network (NMS) configurations discussed above. To bridge NMS between radios use the connections that Figure 4-7 illustrates.
Table 4-H Network Port Connections
3-Port Bridge (unidirectional) Interface 4-Port Bridge (omni-directional)
Master Radio Slave Radio East and West
(on separate terminals) (on one terminal)
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
2 TX+ 2 RX+ 2 TX-
3 TX- 3 RX- 3 TX+
4 RX+ 4 TX+ 4 RX+
5 RX- 5 TX- 5 RX-
Pin 1 is at the left of the jacks.
NET WO RK
EASTWEST
2 1
MNI IN
12
MNI OUT
122 1
ACU/NMU MSACU/NMU SL
1
12
212
FUTURE ACU68K
12
12
12
MNI IN
11
E1
11
12
MNI OUT
1112
E2
122
ACU/NMU MS
1
1112
E312
E411
ACU/NMU SL
1112111212 11
E7
E1
E8E9E10
1
11
22 1
FUTURE
121112
E6 E5
ACU68K
111212 11
J1
1920
E12
E6
E11
cablingports
Front Panel Network Port Network Interface Card behind panel
Chapter 4 Installation
Page 4-12 2/27/04 CM System User’s Manual
Figure 4-7 Network Connections Between Radios and the Telescan NMS
Microwave Networks
CM System User’s Manual 2/27/04 Page 4-13
5.0 Connecting Performance Monitoring DevicesThe CM radio requires a VT100/VT220, ANSI, or equivalent computer terminal to verify proper operation during installation, monitor the operation status screens for radio performance, maintenance, and system status and diagnostics. For this you can use the MLN8003A Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT), any VT100/VT220, ANSI, or equivalent computer or terminal, or remotely via modem.
Section 5.1 explains the installation and configuration for the Local Maintenance Terminal. Section 5.3 explains the installation and configuration process for a computer or terminal. Section 5.4 explains the installation and configuration of a modem.
5.1 Connecting the MLN8003 Local Maintenance Terminal
The MLN8003 Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) is available as an option for use with the CM radio. Connect the LMT to the Local Access port (located on the radio’s access panel) with the supplied serial cable as indicated in the product manual of the LMT device. Cable connections are as indicated in Section 5.3.
5.2 Configuring the LMT for VT-100 Operation
5.2.1 Before Beginning
Before beginning the set-up process, go to Section 1 of the computer’s Quick Start Guide for instructions on installing the main and backup batteries. Then follow the procedures below to begin the set-up process.
1. Install the main and back-up batteries.
2. Next you will want to adjust the display contrast.
3. Go to the Computer User’s Manual for instructions on setting the date and time.
4. Refer also to the manual for detailed instructions on setting the display intensity and the audio volume.
5. Turn ON the LMT and become familiar with the keyboard and the application keys.
Go to the next section to configure your LMT for use with the series VT-100 Operation. Refer to the Computer User’s Manual for detailed information.
5.2.2 Configuring the LMT
Follow the steps below to configure your LMT for use with the CM Series of Radios.
1. Enter <8C> to start the Dichotomy Application.
2. Press menu, C, and S to display the configuration choices.
3. Use the TAB key to cycle between the choices. Select the following:Baud rate - 9600 Interface - Come 1 Parity - None Data bits - 8Stop bits-1
4. Once you have made these selections, press F10.
We recommend that you save the configuration in a file to access the required configuration easily.
Chapter 4 Installation
Page 4-14 2/27/04 CM System User’s Manual
To save the current configuration settings in a file:
1. In DataComm select < Menu, O S F-8>.
2. Enter <VT 100>. The file will appear in the C:\_DAT directory, unless you specify a different directory.
3. Enter <F10, F10 > to save the settings in your new file, and then return to Datacomm’s opening display.
4. When you are ready to look at the screens on a radio, turn the computer ON and connect the serial cable to the radio’s Local Access Port.
5. Enter <8 C> to select the Datacomm application.
6. Enter <Menu OS, F7>.
7. Tab to the Files List box. Select < VT100-DCF> and then press Enter.
8. Press <F10>. The radio’s screen should appear.
5.3 Connecting a Computer or Terminal
The computer or terminal serial communications port has either a DB9, 9-pin, D-shell connector, or DB25 connector. The local access port on the radio access panel has a female DB9 connector that carries three RS-232 compatible signals (Table 4-I). Connect the terminal using the steps that follow.
Table 4-I Local Access Port
Pin Signal
12 INPUT (RX)3 OUTPUT (TX)45 GND6 TTL Input 778 GND9For IBM-compatible computers, that have a DB9 connector, Pins 7 and 8, and 4 and 6, should be connected together at DB9 on the com-puter
LOCAL ACC ESS
DT E DC E1
6
5
9
Microwave Networks
CM System User’s Manual 2/27/04 Page 4-15
1. Locate the Serial Communications Port. Refer to the operating manual for your computer.
2. Refer to Figure 4-8 and Figure 4-9 for specific cable construction and wiring detail between the radio Local Access Port and the computer serial port.
3. On the computer/terminal Serial Communications Port:
a. set as DTE (Data Terminal Equipment.)
b. set the data format as 9600 bps, 8-bit-long word, 1-stop bit and no parity.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT set XON/XOFF, hardware flow control, or hardware modem control signals.
Once communication is established between the CM radio and your computer/terminal, your computer screen will display the radio frequency band, system software part number, and revision level.
Refer to Appendix B for a detailed list of available radio screen information.
Chapter 4 Installation
Page 4-16 2/27/04 CM System User’s Manual
Computer/Terminal
CM Radio
DB25
Comm Port
DTE
5 3 2
Local Access
DB9
DTE
5 3 2
7 3 2
DB9-DB25
Null Modem Cable
(DTE-DTE)
DB9-DB9
Null Modem Cable
(DTE-DTE)
5 3 2
5 3 2
DB9
Comm Port
DTE
DTE
5 3 2
Local Access
DB9
Computer/Terminal
CM Radio
Figure 4-8 Terminal to Radio Connection; DTE-to-DTE
Microwave Networks
CM System User’s Manual 2/27/04 Page 4-17
CM Radio
Computer/Terminal
DB25
Comm Port
DTE
5 3 2
Local Access
DB9
DTEDTE
5 3 2
Local Access
DB9
DB9-DB9
Null Modem
Adapter
5 3 2
5 3 2
DB9
Comm Port
DTEComputer/Terminal
CM Radio
DB9-DB9
Cable
(DTE-DCE)
5 3 2
5 3 2
DB9-DB9
Null Modem
Adapter
5 3 2
5 3 2
5 3 2
7 3 2
DB9-DB25
Cable
(DTE-DCE)
Figure 4-9 Terminal to Radio Connection; DTE-to-DCE and Null-Modem
Chapter 4 Installation
Page 4-18 2/27/04 CM System User’s Manual
5.3.1 Verifying Operation
1. Check voltage across pins 3 and 5 of the Local Access Port (DB9 connector) of the radio. The top row of the connector consists of pins 1 through 5, with pin 1 located on the right side. The radio and the access panel is considered normal if the measured voltage value reads between 8 and 12 volts.
2. Check voltage across pins 3 and 5 of the computer/terminal communication port (DB9 connector). If equipped with a DB25 connector, measure voltage across pins 2 and 7. The measured voltage should be between 8 and 12 volts.
3. Perform a communication port verification test to verify the port assignment and configuration. Refer to the instructions in the computer manual.
4. Perform a local and remote modem loopback from the computer to verify modem and computer operation.
5. Check that the selected cable is an appropriate type for the computer/terminal and modems as described in Figure 4-8 and Figure 4-9.
6. Check cable continuity with an ohm-meter.
Microwave Networks
CM System User’s Manual 2/27/04 Page 4-19
5.4 Connecting a Modem
The CM radio can be monitored and controlled remotely by the use of a dedicated Hayes compatible modem connected to the local access port of the radio access panel. Connect a modem to the local access port using an appropriate cable as illustrated in Figure 4-10 and as listed in Table 4-I.
Refer to Section 5.5 ”Connection Diagrams,” for additional illustrations of DTE to DCE cabling.
Table 4-J lists modem data transfer requirements, and Table 4-K and Table 4-L describe DTE-to-DCE and DTE-to-DTE internal cable connections, respectively.
Figure 4-10 Modem Connection to Radio Access Panel, Local Access Port
Chapter 4 Installation
Page 4-20 2/27/04 CM System User’s Manual
Note: Consult the modem manufacturer and/or the modem operation manual for detailed instruc-tions on configuring the modem..
If communication is established between the CM radio and computer via modem, the computer screen will display the radio frequency band, system software part number, and revision level. Refer to Appendix B for available radio detailed screen information.
If communication is not established between the radio and computer via modem, troubleshoot as indicated in the Computer/Terminal section’s verification procedure.
Table 4-J Modem Data Transfer Communication Requirements
Function Setting
Baud Rate 9600
Parity None
Data Bits 8
Stop Bits 1
Terminal Emulation VT100/220 or ANSI
Flow Control None
Asynchronous Echo Off
Results Codes Disabled
Answer on Ring # 1
Table 4-K DTE-to-DCE Cable Connections
DTE (CM Radios,Most Computer terminals)
DCE (Most MODEMS)
Function DB-9 DB-25 Function DB-9 DB-25
TX Out 3 2 Rx In 3 2
Rx In 2 3 Tx Out 2 3
GND 5 7 GND 5 7
Table 4-L DTE-to-DTE Cable Connections
DTE DTE
Function DB-9 Function DB-9 DB-25
Tx Out 3 Rx In 3 2
Rx In 2 Tx Out 3 2
GND 5 GND 5 7
Microwave Networks
CM System User’s Manual 2/27/04 Page 4-21
5.5 Connection Diagrams
The diagrams in this section (Figure 4-11) represent DTE and DCE wiring configurations for various TX, RX, and GND Signals.
6.0 Antenna ConnectionsThe radio antenna connection(s) are made at the top of the branching network located on the rear of the radio. Allow an additional 4-3/16 inches (106 mm) of radio cabinet depth for the waveguide branching network.
CAUTION!
Ensure antenna alignment is complete prior to connecting to the radio.
The CM6 radio has CMR137F waveguide flanges for the antenna connection; the CM7/8 radio has CMR112F waveguide flanges, and the CM11 radio has UG39/U type flanges. Installing the flex waveguide between the radio antenna port and the antenna feed alleviates antenna feed placement relative to the radio rack, and minimizes waveguide damage due to vibration. For CM6 radios use E.I.A. WR137 waveguide, for CM7/8 radios use WR112 waveguide, and for CM11 radios use WR90 waveguide.
DB9 DTE
DB9 DCE
5
5
3
3
2
2
DB9 DTE
DB25 DCE
5
7
3
3
2
2
DB9 DTE
DB9 DTE
5
5
3
3
2
2
DB9 DTE
DB25 DTE
5
7
3
3
2
2
DB25 DTE
DB25 DTE
7
7
3
3
2
2
DB25 DTE
DB25 DCE
7
7
3
3
2
2
DB25 DTE
DB9 DCE
7
5
3
3
2
2
DB9 DCE
DB9 DCE
5
5
3
3
2
2
DB9 DCE
DB25 DCE
5
7
3
3
2
2
DB25 DCE
DB25 DCE
7
7
3
3
2
2
Figure 4-11 Various DTE-to-DTE and DTE-to-DCE Wiring Configurations
!
Chapter 4 Installation
Page 4-22 2/27/04 CM System User’s Manual
6.1 Installing the Waveguide
IMPORTANT: When installing the waveguide components, be careful not to drop any of the small screws used to connect waveguide together, or any other obstruction, down into the waveguide run from the radio.
1. Install the waveguide branching network at the top rear of the radio, allowing an additional 4-3/16 inches of radio cabinet depth for the branching network.
2. Attach the waveguide flange using 6-32 standard screws, only.
3. If the radio is to be installed into an area where no rear access is available, connect DC power as described in the section in this chapter titled External Connections prior to securing the rack.
4. Replace the metal covers on the back of the radio. Proceed to Chapter 5, Alignment.
Figure 4-12 and Figure 4-13 show the antenna port connections for various configurations.
Figure 4-12 Antenna Port Connections for NN or HH Radios
Microwave Networks
CM System User’s Manual 2/27/04 Page 4-23
Figure 4-13 Antenna Port Connections for Space Diversity Radio
Diversity flangePrimary flange
Chapter 4 Installation
Page 4-24 2/27/04 CM System User’s Manual
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 5-1
1.0 IntroductionThis chapter describes alignment procedures for the CM7/8 SONET/SDH radio. Major sections of this chapter are:
1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12. Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13. Verification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84. Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105. Recommended Test Equipment . . 5-206. Test Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Perform the procedures described in Sections 2.0 and 3.0 on both primary and standby equipment. Compare initial alignment results and measurements with factory test data (supplied with the equipment), and correct substantial differences before the equipment is used.
CAUTION!
Wear an ESD wrist strap/cord set grounded to the frame whenworking on or removing modules. Whenever modules are not in theradio, place them in ESD protective bags.
2.0 InspectionYour radio was shipped fully tested and configured per the customer sales order from the factory.
2.1 Visual Inspection
Start by first removing the radio front cover, inspect the individual module seating and cable connections. The SMA type connectors must be secured with a 5/16 inch wrench using 7-10 inch-pounds of torque. Refer to Appendix C, Configuration Tables if it is necessary to change jumpers and/or switches to desired settings.
The radio is available in five protection configurations: Hot Standby Transmitter/Hot Standby Receiver, Hot Standby Transmitter/Space Diversity Receiver, Non-protected Transmitter/Space Diversity Receiver, Frequency Diversity Transmitter/Frequency Diversity Receiver, and Non-protected Transmitter/Non-protected Receiver.
!
Chapter 5Alignment
Chapter 5 Alignment
Page 5-2 8/5/03 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
Refer to Figures 5-1 through 5-10 and Tables 5-A and 5-B for various radio configurations.
Note: In Table 5-A, when one TXU, RXU, or RF PSU is listed for a particular configuration, place those modules into the A radio slots of the RF section of the shelf.
Table 5-B lists SP module requirements for the available configurations.
Note: In Table 5-B below, when one MOD, DEMOD, MUX, SYNDES, SP PSU, or SCU is listed, place those modules in the A-side (primary) slots of the SP section of the shelf.
Table 5-A. RF Shelf Module Requirements (numbers denotes quantities)
Configuration TXU RXU RF PSU
Hot Standby/Hot Standby (HH) 2 2 2
Hot Standby/Space Diversity (HS) 2 2 2
Non-protected/Space Diversity (NS) 1 2 2
Frequency Diversity/Frequency Diversity (FF) 2 2 2
Non-protected/Non-protected (NN) 1 1 1
Table 5-B. SP Shelf Module Requirements
Configuration MOD DEMOD MUX SYNDES SP PSU ACU NMU* SCU OWU* WTU* ATDE**
Hot Standby/Hot Standby (HH)
2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 or 2* 1 2 2
Hot Standby/Space Diversity (HS)
2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 or 2* 1 2 2
Non-protected/Space Diversity (NS)
1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2
Frequency Diversity/Fre-quency Diversity (FF)
2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 or 2* 1 2 2
Non-protected/Non-protected (NN)
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
* Optional modules. Primary SCU standard, protected SCU is optional. OWU and NMU are non-protected. The NMU module is installed on the ACU unit. The optional WTU is available only on the 28DS1, 1DS3, and 3DS3 radios.
** ATDE is available for 28DS1 and DS3 only. Implemented on DEMOD for 3DS3 radio.
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 5-3
Figure 5-1 shows the RF Distribution and RF shelf in Hot Standby/Hot Standby (HH) configuration. Figure 5-2 shows the SP shelf in HH configuration.
C
C
C
C
C
C
dB
TX MON
C
TX dB
ON LINE
MON
RX
dB
TX MON
C
Figure 5-1. RF Section and RF Distribution in HH Configuration
Figure 5-2. SP Section in HH Configuration
PSU SCU ACU MOD DEMOD MUX SYNDES SYNDESWTU PSUSCUOWUMODDEMODMUX WTU
F-0100A
Radio BRadio A
Chapter 5 Alignment
Page 5-4 8/5/03 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
Figure 5-3 shows the RF Section and RF Distribution in HS configuration. Figure 5-4 shows the SP Section in HS configuration.
dB
TX MON
TX MON
ON LINE
dB RX
dB
TX MON
C
RX
Figure 5-3. RF Section and RF Distribution in HS Configuration
Figure 5-4. SP Section in HS Configuration
PSU SCU ACU MOD DEMOD MUX SYNDES SYNDESWTU PSUSCUOWUMODDEMODMUX WTU
F-0100A
Radio BRadio A
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 5-5
Figure 5-5 shows the RF Section and RF Distribution in NS configuration. Figure 5-6 shows the SP Section in NS configuration.
dB
TX MON
TX RX RX
Figure 5-5. RF Section and RF Distribution in NS Configuration
. (. (. . 6. .(.6.. 6.
$$$
77
Figure 5-6. SP Section in NS Configuration
Chapter 5 Alignment
Page 5-6 8/5/03 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
Figure 5-7 shows the RF Section and RF Distribution in FF configuration. Figure 5-8 shows the SP Section in FF configuration.
Figure 5-7. RF Section and RF Distribution in FF Configuration
Figure 5-8. SP Section in FF Configuration
PSU SCU ACU MOD DEMOD MUX SYNDES SYNDESWTU PSUSCUOWUMODDEMODMUX WTU
F-0100A
Radio BRadio A
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 5-7
Figure 5-9 shows the RF Distribution and RF section in Non-protected/Non-protected (NN) configuration. Figure 5-10 shows the SP section in NN configuration.
Figure 5-9. RF Distribution and RF Section in Non-protected/Non-protected Configuration
Figure 5-10. SP Section in NN Configuration
. (. (. . 6. .(.6.. 6.
7 7
$:
Chapter 5 Alignment
Page 5-8 8/5/03 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
2.2 IF Cabling
The IF cables are shipped attached to the RF and SP modules. Refer to Figure 5-11 for typical connections. Verify that the IF input of the A TXU is connected to the IF output of the A MOD, and the IF input of the B TXU is connected to the IF output of the B MOD with these coax cables. Also verify that the output of the A RXU is connected to the input of the A DEMOD. Repeat for the B radio.
2.3 RF Cables
All RF module cables are shipped attached to the modules. If necessary, connections should be made between modules (TX A, TX B, RX A and RX B) and filters using semi-rigid RF cables with SMA connectors.
Refer to Figures 5-1, 5-3, 5-5, 5-7 and 5-9 to determine cable placement between RF modules and filters.
3.0 VerificationAccurate alignment and test measurements require a one hour equipment warm-up period with covers in place. It is assumed that a computer/terminal is configured correctly and attached to the radio at the Local Access Port. The BER test set is connected to the Access Panel. It is also assumed that the distant terminal BER test set is set to the same test pattern as the local terminal BER test sets. Refer to Chapter 4 for computer/terminal set-up and Appendix B for computer/terminal screen displays.
T X A L M
dB
TX MON
TX ALM
dB
TX MON
INOUTHANDSET WTU LOCAL ACCESS
STATUS
20 - 28
11 - 19
+CH 25-28
WAYSIDE
CH 13-24
CH 1-12
28 DS1 I/O
MANUAL
INOUTOC-3 3DS3/SONET SYNDES
1DS1 2DS3 3DS3
SYNDES
ACO
SONETSONET
MON OUT IN
SONET
AA
14V248V
NORMAL
05
ARF
TTL I/O
ALARM/CONTROL RELAYS
MINOR
FAILSECTION
DTE DCE
A53A
MAJOR
A5A3
AA5
10
SAPS BSPBP
4V284 V
NETWORK
251
26
26
1
1
J23 50
25
J22 50
25
26 J21 50
EASTWEST
16
5
9
25
15
13
8
14
9
1
1OUT
IN
1 32
VF 1
VF 2
SPKRDGTL CH2
1 32 SCEDGTL CH1
1. IF in from Receiver
2. IF out to Transmitter
3. RF into Receiver
4. RF out to Transmitter
5. IF out to DEMOD
6. TX LO from Receiver
7. IF in from MOD
Figure 5-11. IF Cabling
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 5-9
3.1 Preliminary Checks
After installation and prior to applying power, make the following checks to verify proper installation and power protection.
1. Verify with an ohm meter that no shorts exist between the rack ground and battery leads.
2. Verify that all SMA cable connectors are snug (7-10 inch-pound). Do not over tighten.
3. Verify that the power feeds are connected to the proper terminal lug. Battery leads of battery A must be connected to terminal lug A (+,-), and battery leads of battery B to terminal lug B (+,-) on TB1.
3.2 Jumper and DIP Switch Settings
Several modules in the CM7/8 radio have jumpers and/or DIP switches that have different settings depending on the configuration. Using Appendix C and Chapter 3 for detailed module descriptions if necessary, check and set all jumpers and switches correctly.
The modules come from the factory configured according to the customer sales order and generally do not need to be changed. However, customer defined settings such as battery voltage, orderwire station number, enabled lines, and DS1 cable setting for the SYNDES (28xDS1 radio only), must be checked and verified if necessary.
Note: Enabled DS1 or DS3 channels must have signals attached or the radio produces an alarm.
Following the check on the jumpers and DIP switch settings, ensure all modules seat properly in the chassis and all cables are connected correctly.
3.3 DC Voltages
Insert fuses while monitoring primary (line) voltage. If fuses blow, check for reversed battery connections, incorrect fuse value, faulty power supply unit or power harness cable/connections. Table 5-C lists which fuses to use, depending on whether you are using a 24 V or ±48 V battery. Check primary and secondary voltages at the test points on the front of the RF PSU and SP PSU. Record the values in Table 5-G on Page 5-22. The module fail LED on the PSU must be off, indicating normal operation. Replace the radio covers and allow an hour for the radio to warm up.
3.4 System Configuration
Connect the computer/terminal to the Local Access Port. Reset the ACU module by either removing and reinserting it, or by pressing ACU switch S4, located near the front of the ACU. The ACU module fail LED blinks for several seconds and then extinguishes to indicate normal operation. The computer screen displays the radio frequency band, system software part number, and software revision. Press the <Escape> key to go to the main menu. Refer to Appendix B for CM7/8 screen displays.
Table 5-C. Fuse Ratings
Battery RF PSU Fuse SP PSU Fuse
±24 V 10A 5A
±48 V 5A 3A
Chapter 5 Alignment
Page 5-10 8/5/03 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
Check and verify system parameters of the local CM7/8 Radio terminal using the Configuration menu on the computer by selecting item 3, Configuration. The System Configuration menu (Screen 50) is now displayed. Select item 1, Module Parameters (Screen 51,) and check that the parameters displayed agree with the required system configuration. If there are any discrepancies, check that the modules are seated correctly and that all jumpers and/or DIP switches are set correctly.
Return to the main menu(002) by pressing the <Escape> key twice. The radio is now ready for verification.
3.5 SP Verification
Press the <Escape> key to go to the main menu (Screen 002) display. Select 4, Control and Maintenance (Screen 70) then select 1, Path Switching (Screen 71). For a protected system, set the TX and RX path of all modules to A and force their states to “Lock”. Press <Escape> to go back to the Control and Maintenance menu and select 2, Loopback. Press 1, IF Loopback and set local “loopback on” on A side (A & B sides on protected systems).
Note: IF Loopback testing not supported on 3DS3 or higher capacity radios.
Verify that the DS1, DS3, or (voice and data channels, or orderwire calling number, if equipped) passes error-free and there is no alarm on the SP modules. If the test is successful, perform the above procedure with B side on-line for protected system. If any of the above tests fail, check external test equipment and troubleshoot the SP modules by using the troubleshooting flow charts in Chapter 6 and the alarm menu on the computer.
Upon completion of SP verification, remove all loopbacks and set Path Switching (071) to “Auto.”
4.0 AlignmentThis section describes tests to be performed on the radio at initial turn-up. Record data compiled in the following tests in Tables 5-G through 5-J, located at the end of this chapter.
4.1 Modulator Frequency (IF)
Using the provided test connector, check the 70 MHz test point on the Modulator board for MOD frequency and record the value in Table 5-H on Page 5-22.
4.2 Local Oscillator Frequency
The CM7/8 RF operating frequencies (transmit and receive) are based on the LO frequency produced by the synthesizer module on the RXU. The actual LO frequency is the Rx frequency plus or minus 70 MHz. The LO frequency should be adjusted at initial installation and checked periodically to ensure that the LO has not drifted.
4.3 Transmitter Carrier Frequency/Receiver LO Frequency
The actual transmitter carrier frequency of the CM7/8 radio is the difference between the IF frequency (70 MHz) from the MOD and the first conversion LO frequency (measured at the TXU Loopback LO OUT connector,) added or subtracted from the TXU's LO frequency. The TXU LO frequency is read from the LO MON port on the RXU.
1. Calculate the transmitter carrier frequency by taking the difference between the IF fre-quency (70 MHz) measured in Section 4.1 of this chapter and the first conversion LO frequency (measured at the transmit unit’s LPBK LO OUT connector,) and then adding or subtracting from the TXU LO frequency.
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 5-11
2. Record this value in Table 5-H on Page 5-22.
3. Use the LO FREQ adjustment on the front of each RXU to trim the frequency to within 200 Hz of the desired LO frequency.If the adjustment is outside of range, toggle the RXU front panel LO Frequency. Adjust the dip switch and repeat the adjustment pro-cess.
4.4 Transmitter Output Power
Transmitter output power should be adjusted at initial installation and again whenever a TXU is replaced.
Note: 1.The adjusting of transmitter output power must be done with the TXU switched on-line as outlined in Chapter 2. Also, the radio must be set to “APC Manual: OFF mode,” as outlined in Chapter 2, Section 10.0 Automatic Power Control.
To adjust transmitter output power on the A unit TXU:
1. Verify the A TXU is switched on (screen 071) and the APC is set to OFF (screen 87.) On non-protected systems, the RF LPBK switch on the adjacent RXU must be set to the ON position to force the TXU off-line.
2. Attach a power meter to the Online Mon connector on the TX filter in the RF distribu-tion section.
3. Note the specified Tx (APC Low) output power for the radio you are installing (see Chapter 1 for specifications) and subtract from that number the value written near the on-line MON port. Note the result.
4. Adjust the Tx output power using the potentiometer on the A TXU labeled TX PWR ADJ, until the measured power matches the result of step 3.
5. Repeat steps 2, 3 and 4 for the B radio TXU, after switching Tx B on-line.
For example, with Tx output power of +18 dBm switch the A radio on-line. If the label near the on-line MON port is 24.5 dB, subtract that from 18 dBm. The result is -6.5 dBm. Adjust the TX PWR ADJ until you measure -6.5 dBm at the on-line MON port. Now put the B radio on-line and repeat the procedure.
4.5 Access Panel and Module Fail LEDs
Once traffic across the hop is established, verify that the Major and Minor LEDs on the Access Panel are not lit. Also verify that the Alarm LED on each module is extinguished. Check off the Module Fail LEDs box in Table 5-G on Page 5-21.
4.6 End-to-End 155-Mbit/s Data Check
For a protected system, set A side on-line and lock the state of all modules (TX and RX direction). Connect the 155Mb output of the BERT to the SONET/OC3 input connector on the local terminal Access Panel (optical or electrical). Connect the 155Mb input of the BERT (using the same data pattern as at the local side BERT) to the SONET/OC3 output on the Access Panel of the distant terminal. Verify end-to-end error-free traffic. There should be no alarm present in the TX direction of the local terminal and RX direction of the distant terminal. Refer to Figure 5-12.
Chapter 5 Alignment
Page 5-12 8/5/03 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
Next, connect the 155Mb input of the BERT to the SONET/OC3 output on the Access Panel of the local terminal. Connect the 155Mb output of the BERT (using the same data pattern as at the local site BER test set) to the SONET/OC3 input on the Access Panel of the distant terminal. Verify end-to-end error-free traffic in both directions of transmission. The major and minor alarms must be off and the Normal LED will be on to indicate nominal operation at both local and distant terminals. Verify that the alarm LED on each module is extinguished (disregard WTU alarm if the WTU is programmed as “Equipped”, but has no input present at its input).
Generate a fixed number of errors manually on the local BERT and verify that the distant BERT detected the same number of errors.
If there is no SONET/SDH test equipment or person present at the distant site terminal, perform a remote loopback on the SYNDES module using the Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT). The manual LED in the Access Panel will blink once per second on both the local and distant terminals to indicate the loopback state. Connect the input of the BERT to the SONET/OC3 output on the Access Panel of the local terminal. Connect the 155Mb output of the same BERT to the SONET/OC3 input on the Access Panel of the local terminal. Verify end-to-end error-free traffic in both directions of transmission. The major and minor alarms must be off and the Normal LED will be on to indicate nominal operation at both local and distant terminals. Verify that the alarm LED on each module is off (disregard WTU alarm if the WTU is programmed as “Equipped”, but has no input).
Repeat the same end-to-end tests with the B side TX and RX on-line.
Remove all loopbacks and replace SONET/OC3 input and output with fiber equipment signals for normal operation.
Figure 5-12. BER Test Set Connections to the Radio
%%
1*
(-
1*
(-
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 5-13
4.7 End-to-End Service Channel Check
Perform the end-to-end Service Channel test on a system equipped with SCU modules at each end of the radio link. For a protected system, set A side on-line and lock out the state of all modules TX and RX direction using the computer/terminal at the Local Access Port. Connect the digital data output (up to 19.2 kbps) of the BER test set (at local site) to the digital service channel input #1 on the Access Panel of the local terminal. Connect the digital data input of the BER test set (at the distant site using the same data pattern as at the local site BER test set) to the digital service channel output #1 on the Access Panel of the distant terminal. Verify end-to-end error-free digital service channel signal operation. There should be no alarm present in the TX direction of the local terminal and RX direction of the distant terminal. Refer to Figure 5-13.
Connect the digital data input of the BER test set (at local site) to the Service Channel OUTPUT#1 on the Access Panel of the local terminal. Connect the digital data output of the BER test set (at the distant site using the same data pattern as at the local site BER test set) to the Service Channel INPUT#1 on the distant terminal Access Panel.
Verify end-to-end error-free digital service channel operation in both directions of transmission. The major and minor alarms must be off and the Normal LED will be on to indicate nominal operation at both local and distant terminals. Verify that the alarm LED on each module is extinguished (disregard SYNDES alarms if any DS1 channel is programmed as “Equipped”, but have no input present at the input connectors on the Access Panel).
Generate a fixed number of errors manually on the local BER test set and verify that the distant BER test set detected the same number of errors. Repeat this error detection test in the return path of the Service Channel #1. Repeat the above test on Service Channel #2.
If there is no service channel test equipment or person present at the distant site terminal, perform a remote loopback on the SCU module using the local maintenance terminal. The manual LED on the Access Panel will blink once per second on both the local and distant terminal to indicate the loopback state. Connect the digital data input of the Data test set to the digital service channel OUTPUT #1 on the Access Panel of the local terminal. Connect the digital data output of the same data test set to the Service Channel INPUT#1 on the Access Panel. Verify end-to-end error-free Service Channel signal operation in both directions of transmission. Major and Minor alarms must be off and Normal LED will be on indicating normal operation at both local and distant terminals. Verify that the alarm LED on each module is extinguished (disregard SYNDES alarms if any DS1 channel is programmed as “Equipped”, but have no input present at the input connectors on the Access Panel).
Remove all loopbacks and replace Service Channel input and output with terminal equipment signals for normal operation.
.
Chapter 5 Alignment
Page 5-14 8/5/03 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
Figure 5-13. Service Channel BER Test Set Connections to the Radio
/:
(-
1*
1*
(-
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 5-15
4.8 Receive Threshold Check
The receive threshold test provides an approximate fade margin indication, module performance near threshold, and system ruggedness against path anomalies. The receive threshold test is performed on RXUs in the local terminal, though the test requires certain definite configurations in the remote terminal to achieve reliable and repeatable results.
Note: Actual results may vary due to cable loss, equipment and path variation and calibration.
4.8.1 Remote Terminal Setup
To set up the remote terminal, perform the following procedure.
1. Select Control and Maintenance (070) and press <Enter>.
2. Select APC (087) and press <Enter>.
3. Select 2, Manual Mode: Turn APC Off.
4. For a protected radio terminal, select the Control-Path Switching screen (071) and set A side modules on line in the transmit direction, then force their states to Lock mode.
5. Connect the 155Mb output of the BERT to the SONET/OC3 input on the Access Panel.
4.8.2 Local Terminal Setup
Perform the following procedure while referring to Figure 5-14.
1. For a protected radio, select the Control - Path Switching screen (071) and set A side modules on line in the receive direction, then force their on line states to Lock mode.
2. Connect the SONET/OC3 output from the Access Panel to the BERT input. Reset the BERT and verify error-free operation from remote to local terminal direction.
3. Select Configuration - Select AIS Option screen (052) and disable AIS option on A and B sides (Set to “NO.”)
4. Select Performance Monitoring - View Measurement screen (005) and make note of the receive signal level for both A and B sides. The receive threshold measurement test re-quires a calibrated variable attenuator, the total range of which must be greater than the difference in value between the receive signal level (terminal reading) and the spec-ified received threshold from Chapter 1, Specifications. This step also facilitates select-ing the correct power sensor to measure RSL.
5. Disconnect the antenna feed from the radio antenna port.
6. Set the variable attenuator to 0 dB. Connect the variable attenuator to the antenna feed. (If necessary, add an additional fixed calibrated attenuator in series to the variable at-tenuator.)
7. Connect the power meter with the appropriate power sensor to the variable attenuator. Make note of the nominal receive signal level.
8. Disconnect the power meter from the variable attenuator and connect the variable at-tenuator to the antenna port.Reduce RSL by increasing attenuation on attenuator until the BERT reports 10-6 BER. Reset the BERT as often as necessary to display correct reading. Make note of the total attenuation on the variable (and fixed) attenuator to achieve 10-6 BER. Subtract the total attenuation from the value recorded earlier in step 7 to calculate receive threshold for RXU A.
9. Reduce RSL by increasing attenuation on attenuator until the BERT reports 10-6 BER.
Chapter 5 Alignment
Page 5-16 8/5/03 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
Reset the BERT as often as necessary to display correct reading. Make note of the total attenuation on the variable (and fixed) attenuator to achieve 10-6 BER. Subtract the to-tal attenuation from the value recorded earlier in step 7 to calculate receive threshold for RXU A.
10. For a protected radio terminal, select Control - Path Switching screen (071), set B side modules on line in the receive direction, and force their on line states to Lock mode. Repeat step 9 to determine the receive threshold for RXU B.
Note: In hot standby receiver configuration, the B side receive filter experiences 10 dB more loss than the A side, and therefore 10 dB less system gain.
11. Upon completion of the receive threshold test, connect the antenna feed directly to the radio antenna port. Enable the AIS option in the local terminal.Set screen 052 to YES. Enable APC option in the remote terminal by setting screen 087 to AUTO. Connect the 155Mb output of the BER test set to the SONET/OC3 input on the local Access Panel. At the local terminal, access Control - SYNDES Loopback screen 084 and activate re-mote loopback. Reset BERT and verify error-free operation in both directions. Generate a fixed number of errors in the local BERT and verify that the local BERT receives the same number of errors. The local and remote terminals should show no alarms. Re-move all loopbacks.
12. Replace SONET/OC3 input and output connections with fiber equipment signals for normal operation. Set all Path Switching to Auto State. Enter current date, time, or any other relevant configuration information in the computer/terminal. Reset BER perfor-mance counters and alarm log for in-service monitoring.
.
Figure 5-14. TX and RX Signal Attenuator Connection to the Radio
/%
B7C"+&
'1C
6?>*7>7
$#$7
(-
1*
1*
(-
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 5-17
4.9 RF Tx Fade Margin Check
The Tx fade margin test provides an approximate fade margin indication and system ruggedness against path anomalies and unwanted interference signals. The Tx fade margin test is performed on RXUs in the remote terminal, though the test requires certain definite configurations in the local terminal to achieve reliable and repeatable results.
Note: Actual results may vary due to cable loss accuracy, equipment, and path variation and cali-bration. Perform this test only after determining Rx fade margin.
4.9.1 Remote Terminal Setup
To set up the remote terminal, perform the following procedure.
1. Check APC option (Screen 051,) through the computer/terminal. If it is not enabled, remove the ACU and set switch S3, rocker 8, to the Closed position to enable transmit APC option. Slide the ACU back into the shelf.
2. For a protected radio terminal, select the Control - Path Switching screen (071) and set A side modules on line in the receive direction, then force their states to Lock mode.
3. Connect the 155Mb input of the BER test set to the SONET/OC3 output on the Access Panel.
4.9.2 Local Terminal Setup
To set up the local terminal, perform the following procedure. See Figure 5-15.
1. For a protected radio terminal, select the Control - Path Switching screen (071) and set A side modules on line in the transmit direction, then force their on line states to Lock mode.
2. Connect the SONET/OC3 input from the Access Panel to the BERT output. Reset the BER test set and verify error-free operation from the local to remote terminal direction.
3. Disconnect the antenna feed from the radio antenna port.
4. Set the variable attenuator to 0 dB. Connect the variable attenuator to the antenna port. (If necessary, add an additional fixed calibrated attenuator in series to the variable at-tenuator.) See Figure 5-15.
5. Connect the power meter with the appropriate power sensor to the variable attenuator. Make a note of the Tx power level while the APC at the local terminal is off. Turn on the local terminal APC and note of the Tx power level. Turn off APC at the local termi-nal. The difference in readings indicates the APC step size.
6. Disconnect the power meter from the variable attenuator and connect the variable at-tenuator to the antenna port.
7. While APC is off at the local terminal, reduce Tx power by increasing attenuation on the variable attenuator until the BERT reports 10-6 BER (at remote receive side). Reset the BERT as often as necessary to display the correct reading. Make a note of the total attenuation on variable and fixed attenuators to achieve 10-6 BER. Add the total atten-uation to the APC step size recorded in step 5 to calculate the transmit fade margin of the TXU A in the local terminal. The fade margin should be approximately equal to the difference between the Rx fade margin and the previously measured Rx threshold. If not, an interfering signal may be preset and the Rx terminal.
Chapter 5 Alignment
Page 5-18 8/5/03 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
8. Upon completion of the transmit fade margin test, connect the antenna feed directly to the radio antenna port.
9. Connect the 155Mb input of the BERT to the SONET/OC3 output on the local Access Panel.
10. At the local terminal, access Control - SYNDES Loopback screen 084 and activate re-mote loopback. Reset the BERT and verify error-free operation in both directions. Gen-erate a fixed number of errors in the local BERT and verify that the local BERT receives the same number of errors. Neither the local or remote terminal should be in alarm.
11. Remove all loopbacks. Replace SONET/OC3 input and output connections with ter-minal equipment signals for normal operation. Set all modules to auto state. Enter the current date, time, or any other relevant configuration information in the computer/terminal. Reset BER performance counters and alarm log for in-service monitoring.
Figure 5-15. Signal Attenuator Connection to the Radio
/%
B7C"+&
'1C
6?>*7>7
$#$7
(-
1*
1*
(-
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 5-19
4.10 Receive Signal Level/AGC Recording
1. For a protected system, set the A side on-line and lock the state of all modules (TX and RX direction) at local and remote terminals by using the computer/terminal at the Lo-cal Access Port. Also set the remote terminal’s APC to “OFF,”(Screen 087.)
2. Disconnect the antenna feed from the radio antenna port.
3. Connect a variable attenuator to the antenna feed and set its value to 0 dB.
4. Connect the power meter using the appropriate power sensor to the variable attenua-tor and record the receive signal level in Table 5-H on Page 5-23.
5. Remove the power meter from the variable attenuator and connect the variable atten-uator to the radio antenna port.
6. Measure the AGC voltage as measured on the RXU test point as well as the RSL read-ing at the antenna port as displayed on the computer/terminal (Screen 005.) Record these values in Table 5-I on Page 5-23. Compare the RSL reading with the power meter reading. The difference in the two readings is a calibration factor.
7. Change variable attenuation and record corresponding AGC voltage as measured on the RXU test point as well as the RSL reading at the antenna port as displayed on the computer/terminal. Continue this process until BER reaches 10-6. Record these values in Table 5-I on Page 5-23.
8. For a protected system, set B side on-line and lock the state of all modules (TX and RX direction) at the local and remote terminals by using the computer/terminal at the Lo-cal Access Port. Repeat steps 2 through 7 for the B side radio.
9. Remove the variable attenuator and connect the antenna feed to the radio antenna port Set Local and Remote terminal’s path switching state to AUTO, and return remote ter-minal’s APC to AUTO mode (Screen 087) for normal operation.
4.11 Commissioning Radio Link
Once each terminal of the link is verified for normal operation, connect terminal equipment signals to the Access Panel, and the antenna port to the antenna feed. Remove all loopbacks. It is assumed that the antenna is already aligned and the path established.
For a protected system, set A side on-line and set the state of all modules to auto (TX and RX direction) using the computer/terminal at the Local Access Port. The major and minor alarms must be OFF and the normal LED ON indicating normal operation at both local and distant terminals. There should be no module fail alarm on local or distant radio terminals.
Enter current date and time in the system configuration setting screen (054) of the computer/terminal. In the same configuration screen, set AIS option (052) for the system. Press the <Escape> key to go back to the main menu. Select 1, Performance Monitoring and select 4, Reset Link. This will clear the statistics monitor counters and will report back the time when the counters were reset. Select 1, View Link. Verify that it reports error free performance.Press the <Escape> key to go back to the main menu. Select 2, Alarm and Status and then select 1, System Alarms. Select 4, View/Print Alarm Log and then select 2, Clear Alarm Log. The system will report back the time when the counters are reset.
Chapter 5 Alignment
Page 5-20 8/5/03 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
5.0 Recommended Test EquipmentTable 5-D lists recommendations for test equipment required for alignment and operation of the radio. Table 5-F lists electrical and functional specifications for that test equipment. Consult Table 5-E when selecting equipment other than that specified in Table 5-E.
Note: As an option, we recommend the Hewlett Packard HP8593A Spectrum Analyzer. Though it is not absolutely necessary for doing the tests outlined in this chapter, it is very helpful.
Table 5-D. Recommended Test Equipment
ManufacturerPart Number
Description Tests
Hewlett Packard 5347A Microwave counter/power meter Transmitter output power and RSL, and LO frequency measurementHewlett Packard 8485A Sensors
Hewlett Packard 4934A Transmission test set Service channel and orderwire tests
Hewlett Packard(CERJAC)
E4487A(Series 31XE)
PCM analyzer with DS3/ DS1 option DS3 and DS1 signal simulation and BER
ARRA 90-525-20 Variable attenuator 0-20 dB AGC calibration and signal level measurements
Weston 6100 Digital multimeter (DMM) Voltage measurements
ARRA 90-485-03 3 dB fixed attenuator Rx threshold, Tx fade margin
ARRA 90-485-06 6 dB fixed attenuator Rx threshold, Tx fade margin
ARRA 90-485-10 10 dB fixed attenuator Rx threshold, Tx fade margin
ARRA 90-485-20 20 dB fixed attenuator Rx threshold, Tx fade margin
ARRA 90-225-24 Flexible waveguide Antenna connections
TMN MLN7898A RF loopback cable and pad kit RF loopback
Use the listed equipment, or equivalent, based on specifications in Table 5-F. In addition, use the Silton SPS module case, part number TT0013P-1, which accommodates signal processing spares.
Table 5-E. Test Equipment Electrical and Functional Specifications
Equipment Minimum Specifications for Substitutes
Hewlett Packard 5347A Counter
Frequency Range 500 MHz to 20.0 GHz
Sensitivity:
500 MHz - 12.4 GHz -32 dBm (-35 dBm typical)
12.4 GHz to 20.0 GHz -27 dBm (-32 dBm typical)
Impedance 50 ohm, nominal
Maximum input +7 dBm
Accuracy ±1LSD rms ± time base error x fre-quency
Hewlett Packard 5347A Power Meter
Frequency Range 10 MHz to 26.5 GHz, sensor depen-dent
Power Range -70 to +20 dBm (100 pw to 100 mW)
Dynamic Range 50 dB to 10 dB in steps
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 5-21
Hewlett Packard 8485A Power Sensor
Impedance 50 ohms
Frequency Range 50 MHz to 26.5 GHz
Power Range 1 µW to 100 mW (-30dBm to +20dBm)
Hewlett Packard 8481D Power Sensor
Impedance 50 ohms
Frequency Range 10 MHz to 18 GHz
Power Range 0.1 nW to 10 µW (-70 dBm to -20 dBm)
Hewlett Packard 4934A Trans-mission Impairment Measur-ing Set (TIMS)
Receiver Input level = -70 to +15 dBm at 600 ohms
Input frequency = 40 Hz to 60 kHz
Noise measurement accuracy =±2 dB (0 dBrn to +20 dBrn)±1 dB (+20 dBrn to +85 dBrn)
Freq. measurement accuracy = ±1 count
C message, 15 kHz flat
Transmitter Output level = -60 to +10 dBm
Input frequency = 40 Hz to 60 kHz
Hewlett Packard 3784A PCM Analyzer
Operating Rate DS1/DS3
Impedance Bridge = Š1000 ohms
Term = 75 ohms ± 5% (DS3)Term = 100 ohms ± 5% (DS1)
Weston 6100 Digital Multimeter
Resolution (meas) 0.005%
DC Ranges ±10 mV to ±100 V in 5 ranges
Frequency Response 30 Hz to 20 kHz for AC RMS voltage and current measurement
Resistance Accuracy ±0.07% input ±1 LSD
Overload Protected Yes
Power Battery/Line Operation
ARRA 90-525-20 Variable Attenuator
Frequency Range 8.20 to 12.4 GHz
Attenuator Range 20 dB (dynamic)
Attenuator vs Freq (±dB) 1.5 dB
VSWR 1.15 maximum
Table 5-E. Test Equipment Electrical and Functional Specifications (Continued)
Equipment Minimum Specifications for Substitutes
Chapter 5 Alignment
Page 5-22 8/5/03 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
6.0 Test Tables
Tables 5-F through 5-I on the following pages are provided for recording data from tests described in this chapter.
Table 5-F. Voltage and Alarm Checks
Parameter Specification Limits System Radio A Radio B
RF DC Converter +12.3 Vdc ±0.30 Vdc-6.0 Vdc ±0.42 VdcBATT 20 - 60 Vdc
SP DC Converter +5.4 Vdc ±0.22 Vdc+6.0 Vdc ±0.24 Vdc-6.0 Vdc ±0.24 VdcBATT 20 - 60 Vdc
Major Summary Alarm Panel LED OffMinor Summary Alarm Panel LED OffModule Fail LEDs All Modules LED OffLDU Preliminary
Table 5-G. Frequency, Transmitter Power, and Monitor Checks
Record Values
Parameter Specification Limits Date Date Date Date Date Date DateIF LO Freq,TXU A
System specific
LO Freq, RXU A
System specific ±60 kHz
IF LO Freq, TXU B
System specific
LO Freq, RXU B System specific ±60 kHzTX Frequency Radio A
TxLO ± 70 MHz ± Tx IF LO
±20 kHz
TX Frequency Radio B
TxLO ± 70 MHz± Tx IF LO
±20 kHz
TX Output APC Low, Radio A
Record from Chapter 1,Table 1-B
user set
TX Output APC Low, Radio B
Record from Chapter 1,Table 1-B
user set
TX Monitor APC Low, Radio A
Record from TX MON
N/A
TX Monitor APC Low, Radio B
Record from TX MON
N/A
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 5-23
Table 5-H. RSL, AGC, and System Gain
Parameter Specification Limits System Radio A Radio BRSL @ 10-6 BER See Chapter 1,
Table 1-C, DAGC @ 10-6 BER (TP) TBD TBDRSL @ 10-6 BER (LDU) TBD TBDRSL @ Nominal (APC Low) From path data ±2 dBAGC @ Nominal (TP) TBD TBDRSL @ Nominal (LDU) TBD TBDFade Margin 10-6 BER (APC High)
Calculated ±2dB
System Gain @ 10-6 BER Calculated See Chapter 1Table 1-C, D
Table 5-I. AGC Readings
Parameter TP Radio A TP Radio B LDU Radio A LDU Radio B
AGC Readings(Far End APC Low)-25 dBm-30 dBm-35 dBm-40 dBm-45 dBm-50 dBm-55 dBm-60 dBm-65 dBm-70 dBm-71 dBm-72 dBm-73 dBm-74 dBm-75 dBm-76 dBm-77 dBm-78 dBm-79 dBm-80 dBm
Chapter 5 Alignment
Page 5-24 8/5/03 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
CM SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 6-1
1.0 Introduction
CM series radios require minimal preventive and corrective maintenance. Periodically conducting a few routine tests and keeping a record of the results will uncover any problems that need to be corrected.
Major sections in this chapter are:
1.0 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 6-12.0 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 6-43.0 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 6-54.0 Upgrades and Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 6-85.0 Replacing Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 6-116.0 Troubleshooting Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 6-14
1.1 Customer Service
For repair service or technical assistance anytime call 1-888-225-4762 (U.S.) or 1-281-263-6501 (international), or fax 1-281-263-6730.
1.1.1 Repair and Exchange Services
Standard repair turn around is typically 14 calendar days from receipt of module to shipment from Microwave Networks. Emergency exchange is typically one day from receipt of request to shipment. Standard repair and emergency exchange time frames do not necessarily apply to manufacture discontinued products, frequency specific modules, assemblies, and radios. To get repair services:
1. Call for a Return Authorization Number (RA#) prior to shipment of any repair/return equip-ment.
2. Return modules in static-safe material. Pack securely for shipment.
3. Provide the following information to facilitate repair or exchange.
• Company name, Ship to, and Bill to address.
• Contact name, phone number, and FAX number.
• Radio model and serial/frame number.
• Module number/description.
• Description of the problem or damage.
• Module configuration
• Operating frequency of module, when applicable.
Include the RA number both inside and on the outside of the package. For out of warranty repairs, include a purchase order.
Send to: Microwave Networks, 4000 Greenbriar #100A, Stafford, Texas, 77477. ATTN: Repair/Returns.
Chapter 6Maintenance
Chapter 6 Maintenance
Page 6-2 8/5/03 CM SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
1.1.2 Technical Support Services
Around-the-clock telephone support is available on all Microwave Networks products. For telephone support contact 1-888-225-4762 (U.S.) or 1-281-263-6501 (international). Normal hours are 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, U.S. Central Time. After-hour telephone support is available through our dispatch operators.
Technical Support is guaranteed for current products or products on Additions and Maintenance (AM) status. Support on Manufacturing Discontinued (MD) products will vary depending on age of product, available material, available spares, etc. Telephone Technical Support on discontinued products may be subject to a charge depending upon duration and nature of assistance.
1.2 Recommended Test Equipment
Table 6-A lists test equipment recommendations for maintenance. The Chapter 5, Alignment, lists test equipment for repair and alignment. Table 6-B lists electrical and functional specifications for the recommended test equipment. Consult Table 6-B when selecting equipment other than that specified in Table 6-A. For some procedures in this section you will also need a Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT). See the following section for a description of the local maintenance terminal.
Table 6-A. Recommended Test Equipment*
* Use the listed equipment, or equivalent, based on specifications in Table 6-B.
Manufacturer Part Number Description Tests
Hewlett Packard 5347A Microwave counter/power meter/sensors
Transmitter output power and RSL, and LO frequency measurement
Weston 6100 Digital multimeter (DMM) Voltage measurementsTMN MLN7898A RF loopback cable and
pad kitRF loopback
Table 6-B. Test Equipment Electrical and Functional Specifications
Equipment Minimum Specifications for Substitutes
Hewlett Packard 5347A Fre-quency Counter
Frequency Range 500 MHz to 20.0 GHzSensitivity:500 MHz - 12.4 GHz -32 dBm (-35 dBm typical)12.4 GHz to 20.0 GHz -27 dBm (-32 dBm typical)Impedance 50 ohm, nominalMaximum input +7 dBmAccuracy ±1LSD rms ± time base error x frequency
Weston 6100 Digital Multimeter
Resolution (meas) 0.005%DC Ranges ±10 mV to ±100 V in 5 rangesFrequency Response 30 Hz to 20 kHz for AC RMS voltage and cur-
rent measurementResistance Accuracy ±0.07% input ±1 LSDOverload Protected YesPower Battery/Line Operation
Microwave Networks
CM SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 6-3
1.3 Description of the Local Maintenance Terminal
The local access port on the access panel provides screens for monitor and control from a VT100-compatible terminal. Customers that need a low-cost and smaller alternative to a laptop computer for access to the Local Access Port functions of the radio can order the handheld Local Maintenance Terminal, P/N MLN8003A. The LMT consists of the following, commercially available, items:
• Hewlett Packard 200LX palmtop PC-XT with 1Mbyte RAM
• Hewlett Packard F1015A serial cable
• Cable Connection GCM-9900 DB-9 Male/Make gender adapter
The LMT is easily configured by a setup utility. Set the LMT as a VT100 terminal operating at 9600 baud, no parity, 8 data bits, and 1 stop bit. MS-DOS 5.0, Lotus 1-2-3, and a note pad is integral to the LMT. Connection to a serial printer is available with a DB-9 to serial printer adapter. An HP LaserJet printer driver is included with the LMT’s integral software, and can be loaded with the setup utility. See the Installation Chapter of this manual for LMT connection to the radios.
Chapter 6 Maintenance
Page 6-4 8/5/03 CM SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
2.0 Maintenance
Routine maintenance of the CM radio consists essentially of collecting data through which to analyze the radio's performance. Semi-annually or at least once a year, tests can be conducted to evaluate DC voltages and the performance of various functional components. By using the performance log in Chapter 5, you can record data and compare it with the results of previous tests to determine if any corrective action should be taken to ensure system performance.
The following recommended evaluation schedule may be adapted to specific plant practices. All checks should be made at least once a year.
2.1 Annual Transmitter Checks
Regulating agencies recommend that various transmitter parameters be checked annually. See the guidelines for your regulating agency. The parameters to be measured are typically carrier frequency, output power, and modulation characteristics.
Transmitter Carrier Frequency — The CM transmitter carrier frequency is the difference between the Modulator IF frequency and the TXU first conversion LO frequency added or subtracted from the LO frequency (from the adjacent RXU).
To measure the transmitter frequency:
1. Measure the TX first conversion LO frequency on the TXU using the LPBK LO OUT port.
2. Subtract 70 MHz from the first conversion LO frequency.
3. Measure the local oscillator for the TXU using the LO MON port on the RXU. Add or sub-tract the frequency from Step 2 from the local oscillator frequency to determine the transmit-ter frequency.
4. Trim the frequency to ±1 kHz of the desired fLO by adjusting LO FREQ ADJ on the RXU front panel with a small non-metallic flathead screwdriver.
Transmitter Output Power — The transmitter output power is measured in accordance with instructions in Chapter 5, Alignment.
Transmitter Modulation Characteristics — The modulation characteristics of a digital microwave transmitter are determined by the digital signal bit rate, transmitter output power level, and transmitter filtering.
The filters are factory tuned and fixed; they require no further checks.
If desired, you may perform the tests listed in Chapter 5, Alignment, in addition to the annual transmitter checks.
2.2 DC Voltages
Insert fuses while monitoring primary (line) voltage. If fuses blow, check for reversed battery connections, incorrect fuse value, faulty power supply unit or power harness cable/connections. Table 6-C lists which fuses to use, depending on whether you are using a ±24 V or ±48 V battery.
Check primary and secondary voltages at the test points on the front of the RF PSU and SP PSU. Record the values in the configuration table of Chapter 5. The module fail LED on the PSU must be off, indicating normal operation. Replace the radio covers and allow an hour for the radio to warm up.
Microwave Networks
CM SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 6-5
3.0 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting consists of tracing a fault in the radio to a specific radio module or to equipment outside the radio. Once found, radio repair is as simple as replacing a module (Subsection 5.0). The CM radio’s built-in test features and LED indicators facilitate troubleshooting.
CAUTION!
Prior to removing a plug-in module, confirm that the module is notin service by checking the Alarm and Status screen for that module,or check the TX or RX PATH screen.
If a fault develops, the first priority is to maintain service. This requires that the working equipment be forced on-line while the suspected faulty equipment can be investigated off-line. A protected radio automatically switches faulty equipment off-line, provided that the radio is not in the “MANUAL” or “LOCK” mode, and restores traffic on the standby side of the radio.
Once working equipment has been forced on-line, make the following standard checks before troubleshooting:
1. Verify that the switch planes are in the “AUTO” mode and the manual LED is not illuminated or blinking (LED is illuminated if switch plane is not in “AUTO” and LED will blink with any loopback enabled).
2. Check the MODULE FAIL OVERVIEW screen through the Local Access Port, and note which modules are in alarm.
3. Check all DC voltages on the RF PSUs and SP PSUs.
4. Check all plug-in modules for full insertion and engagement of connectors.
5. Check all cables and switches for normal position.
3.1 Check Alarms Using Alarm LEDs
In the event of a failure it is likely that several alarm LEDs will be illuminated (e.g. DEMOD failure may also cause a MUX RX, SYNDES RX, and an SCU alarm). If the RF PSU and/or the SP PSU alarm are on, they have the highest priority and should be investigated first. Some cards have both TX and RX functions on them (e.g. SYNDES and MUX) and it will be necessary to go to the alarm and status screen for that module to determine whether it is a TX or an RX alarm to establish the priority of the fault. Fault priority is determined by signal flow.
Table 6-C. Fuse Ratings
Battery RF PSU Fuse SP PSU Fuse
±24 V 10A 5A±48 V 5A 3A
!
Chapter 6 Maintenance
Page 6-6 8/5/03 CM SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
Note: The Alarm LED on each module is controlled by the ACU. If there is a power related failure on the MOD, DEMOD, TXU, or RXU, the LED control line becomes open which pre-vents the LED from turning on. However, the alarm is still sent to the ACU and reported via the summary alarm (Major/Minor) and can be monitored through the Local Access Port.
The order of the priority on the TX side is SYNDES (TX)→MUX(TX)→MOD→TXU.Order of priority on the RX side is RXU→DEMOD→ATDE→MUX(RX)→SYNDES(RX).
After the highest priority fault has been determined, go to the corresponding troubleshooting flow chart, use Table 6-D as a reference, to begin troubleshooting (for example, if the MOD and TXU alarm LEDs are on, go to Chart 7). The SCU alarm should only be considered when all other alarms are out.
Since the ACU is the central point for the alarms and control of the radio, an ACU failure may cause erroneous alarms and/or switching. If the condition of the radio does not seem to make sense or follow troubleshooting flow charts, do not clear the problem. The ACU may be at fault and should be checked and then replaced if necessary.
3.1.1 Check the ACU
1. Rule out software errors.
If the ACU alarm LED is lit, it may be caused by a software error. Reset the system software by momentarily pressing switch S4 on the front of the ACU module. If the alarm LED clears, the ACU module does not need to be replaced. Continue searching for the problem by going through the troubleshooting process of Module Alarm LEDs.
3.2 Check Alarms Using the Local Maintenance Terminal
You can check alarms before removing any covers using the a local maintenance terminal connected to the local access port. Install and set the VT100 compatible terminal according to the
Table 6-D. Troubleshooting Flow Chart Matrix
Hot-Standby Space Diversity Non-Protected
Problem Chart Number
SP PSU 1 1 1RF PSU 1 1 1SYNDES (Tx) 3 3 2MUX (Tx) 5 5 4MOD 6 6 6TXU 7 7 7RXU 9 10 8DEMOD 12 13 11MUX (Rx) 5 5 4SYNDES (Rx) 3 3 2SCU 14 14 14OWU 15 15 15BER problems 17 18 16NMU 19 19 19RTS 20 20 NA
Microwave Networks
CM SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 6-7
Installation section of this manual. Perform the following procedure from the Main menu.
1. Select Alarm and Status (020) and press <Enter>.
2. Select System (021) and press <Enter>.
3. Select System Alarm (036) from the System menu and press <Enter>. This screen gives Ma-jor and Minor alarm status for the overall system.
4. Select Alarm Summary (035) and press <Enter>. This screen displays each module and its status to assist you in identifying a module reporting a failure.
5. If there is a module in fail condition, return to the System menu and select Alarm and Status for the desired unit (022-034). Press <Enter>.
If no alarms are currently present, check the Alarm Log as outlined in the next section. Once the module(s) in alarm is identified, the next step is to determine which module actually failed.
Check the first module in the direction of the signal flow with a lit LED. For example, if the DEMOD, MUX, and SYNDES are all in alarm, first suspect the DEMOD because a DEMOD failure could cause the MUX and SYNDES alarms since they are being fed a bad signal. Similarly, if the MUX and MOD are in alarm, suspect the MUX.
Note: A module reporting failure is not always the defective unit. In some cases, a failure in an upstream module may be reported by a downstream module.
Examine alarm detail for each module that is in alarm. This gives a good indication of the failure. Once the failed module has been identified, replace it with a known good unit.
3.2.1 Checking the Alarm Log
As an alarm occurs, the ACU assigns it a number and adds it to the alarm log. The first alarm is numbered 00000. The log stores the last 512 alarms but the numbering continues consecutively until it reaches 65535. At that time the log starts over at 00000. (An ACU reset or power-down will also cause a reset to 00000 and also drops all current entries from the log.)
For example, when alarm number 511 occurs, the alarm log is full (00000 - 00511). When the next alarm occurs (00512) the alarm labeled 00000 is dropped from the list.
To check the alarm log, perform the following procedure from the LMT Main menu.
1. Select Alarm and Status (020) and press <Enter>.
2. Select System (021) and press <Enter>.
3. Select Alarm Log (038) and press <Enter>.
4. Select Alarm Report (039) and press <Enter>.
Refer to Appendix D, the Alarm Codes Table, for a full listing of CM alarm codes and definitions.
3.2.2 Checking Performance Values
To examine the performance of the radio, perform the following procedure from the LMT Main
Chapter 6 Maintenance
Page 6-8 8/5/03 CM SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
menu.
1. Select Performance Monitoring (003) and press <Enter>.
2. Select View Statistics (004) and press <Enter>.
3. Use the up and down arrow keys to view the screens.
The displayed statistics are:
BER – A representative of the bit error rate being delivered to the user.Errored Seconds – A second with one or more bit errors (parity).Severely Errored Seconds – Any second with parity error rate greater than
10-3 for the complete second.Frame Loss Seconds – Any second with a frame loss.
To reset all statistics, perform the following procedure from the Main menu.
1. Select Performance Monitoring (003) and press <Enter>.
2. Select Reset Statistics (006) and press <Enter>.
3. Choose whether you want to reset side A, side B, or both sides.
To view real time measurements of certain parameters on the radio, perform the following procedure from the Main menu.
1. Select Performance Monitoring (003) and press <Enter>.
2. Select View Measurements (005) and press <Enter>.
The measurements available for viewing are:
TX Power Output, RX Signal Level, Slope Amplitude Stress, and System Temperature.
3.3 Check LBO and DS1 Line Coding
For 28xDS1 radios check LBO and DS1 line coding using the local maintenance terminal connected to the local access port. For 1DS3 to 3DS3 capacities, line code is set to B3ZS. Set line-buildout by with SYNDES board jumpers.
4.0 Upgrades and Changes
4.1 Changing Local Oscillator Frequency
The CM RF operating frequencies (transmit and receive) are based on the LO frequency produced by the synthesizer on each RXU. The LO frequency is either plus or minus the RX frequency. The LO frequency should be verified/adjusted at initial installation and checked periodically to ensure that the LO has not drifted. The LO frequencies are set at the factory according to the customer order.
The LO frequency may change a small amount due to a test equipment calibration error or equipment/radio ambient temperature. It is NOT necessary to adjust the frequency as long as it is ±5 kHz of desired.
Microwave Networks
CM SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 6-9
CAUTION!
Do not readjust the LO if the frequency is ±5 kHz of the desiredTX/RX frequency.
4.1.1 Checking LO Frequency
To verify the LO frequency, connect the frequency counter at the LO MON connector of the RXU under test and read the frequency. If the measured LO frequency exceeds the specified range listed in Appendix E, but still is ±100 kHz of the desired setting, then readjust LO frequency using a tuning tool at the front of the corresponding RF module. If the adjustment is out-of-range, toggle the front panel DIP switch and repeat the adjustment process.
4.1.2 Changing LO Frequency
If the measured LO frequency exceeds ±100 kHz of the desired frequency, verify the DIP switch settings on the synthesizer. Perform this procedure using the following steps:
Remove the selected RXU and compare/set DIP switches according to the settings shown in Appendix E.
Replace selected RXU in the shelf. Adjust the LO frequency to within ±200 Hz of desired frequency using FREQ ADJ and the front panel LO FREQ. ADJ. DIP Switch.
If the desired frequency is not achieved, replace faulty module and repeat the LO frequency verification test. Otherwise record the LO frequency. Repeat this procedure for each RXU in the system.
4.2 Changing Protection Configuration
The most common types of protection changes are upgrading a terminal from non-protected to hot standby, and upgrading a hot standby terminal to include space diversity receiver protection.
The CM radio is available as a non-protected radio, but with an RF Branching Network for a hot standby radio. This configuration allows you to convert the non-protected radio to hot standby at a later time without losing traffic.
To change the protection configuration of the radio, perform the following procedure.
1. Change the appropriate switch settings on the ACU as indicated in Chapter 3.
2. Add modules as required (for example, when going from non-protected to hot standby, add all the B radio modules). Refer to Chapter 2 for a matrix of modules in each configuration.
3. Remove the RF Branching Network and replace it as indicated in Chapter 3.
4. Add or change cables as shown in Chapter 4, Installation.
To change from non-protected configuration to hot-standby configuration, simply change the appropriate switch setting(s) on the ACU, add the B radio modules, and replace the RF Branching Network. Connect the TXU and RXU interconnect cables as shown in Chapter 4.
!
Chapter 6 Maintenance
Page 6-10 8/5/03 CM SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
To change a hot-standby radio to include space diversity receivers, simply change the appropriate switch setting(s) on the ACU and replace the RF Branching Network. Connect the RXU interconnect cables and antenna connections as shown in Chapter 4.
4.3 Adding Service Channel, Orderwire, or WTU
To upgrade your radio to add Service Channel and/or Orderwire, add the SCU and/or OWU module(s) and change the appropriate switch setting(s) on the ACU as indicated in Chapter 3.
Note: Before removing the ACU board, make a note of user-defined configurations such as Tx power, AIS, date and time, loopbacks, alarm log, and statistics data. Once the ACU board is removed, some of this information may be altered.
Remember to configure the SCU and OWU to match your installation as described in Chapter 3. The radio must have an SCU in order to add an OWU.
Add the Wayside Traffic Unit option in the same manner.
4.4 Adding the Optional Network Management Unit
The optional Network Management Unit (NMU) consists of the NMU board, firmware, and mounting hardware. The NMU mounts on the ACU board. To add the NMU board to the radio, perform the following procedure:
1. Remove the ACU board from the rack to prepare it for NMU installation.
Note: Before removing the ACU board, make a note of user-defined configurations such as Tx power, AIS, date and time, loopbacks, alarm log, and statistics data. Once the ACU board is removed some of this information may be altered.
2. Install the firmware chips into location U4 on the NMU board.
3. Using the provided screws, mount the standoffs to the NMU board.
4. Align the NMU board over connector J4 on the ACU, making sure that the header matches pin-to-pin. Mount the NMU board to the ACU board.
5. Set the NMU switches and jumpers according to Chapter 3.
6. Using the VT100 Local Maintenance Terminal and the menu information in Appendix B, re-configure the ACU with the desired Tx power, AIS, date and time, loopback, and statistics in-formation. For details on NMS operation see the TELESCAN 3000 Manual, P/N 6885104E95 or the TELESCAN 6000 Manual, P/N 8841100-00.
Microwave Networks
CM SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 6-11
5.0 Replacing Modules
Due to the frequency uniqueness of the TXU and RXU, these units are spared differently. Refer to the section above titled Checking and Changing Frequency for a discussion of TXU and RXU configuration.
IMPORTANT: Faulty modules must be returned to Microwave Networks for repair, rather than repaired in the field, since modules use complex integrated circuits.
5.1 Replacing TXU and RXU
5.1.1 TXU
Follow the directions below to replace the TXU.
1. Remove the failed TXU.
2. Verify that the spare TXU is the same part number as the failed unit.
3. Remove the SMA cable between the filter and the power amplifier. See Figure 6-1 for the TXU bandpass filter location.
CAUTION!
Do not loosen or tighten any screws on the filter itself, as this willmistune and may damage the filter.
4. Remove only the two shoulder screws that connect the filter cover to the TXU.
5. Loosen the SMA connector located directly on the filter and remove. This filter will be used on the spare TXU.
6. Install the conversion filter from step 4 onto the spare TXU, being careful not to pinch or clamp DC cables under the filter cover or semi-rigid cable. It may be necessary to remove the conversion filter from the TXU spare.
7. Insert and re-connect the TXU.
!
Chapter 6 Maintenance
Page 6-12 8/5/03 CM SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
5.1.2 RXU
Follow the directions below to replace the RXU.
1. Remove the failed RXU.
2. Verify that the spare RXU is the same part number as the failed unit
3. Use the synthesizer module on the failed RXU to set the switch settings on the RXU spare as shown in Figure 6-2.
4. Insert and reconnect the RXU.
Bandpass Filter
Front
F-1237a
A A
View AA - For CM11:
Figure 6-1. TXU Bandpass Filter Location
Microwave Networks
CM SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 6-13
5.2 Replacing All Other Modules
Set jumpers and switches on new modules according to jumpers and switch positions of the unit being replaced. Install replacement module and connect cables as necessary.
Note: SP and RF backplanes are generally not field replaceable modules.
Front
F-1235
SynthesizerSwitches
N
A
F
76
54
32
1
S2
1 0
ML
ML
ML
SS
SS
SS
GG
BB
BB
BB
10
65
43
21
S1
1 0
FR
EQ
UE
NC
Y S
ET
Figure 6-2. Synthesizer Switch Location
Chapter 6 Maintenance
Page 6-14 8/5/03 CM SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
6.0 Troubleshooting Charts
This section contains troubleshooting charts referenced in the Troubleshooting section of this chapter. Charts that follow are:
SP/RF PSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15SYNDES (Non-Protected). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16SYNDES (Protected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17MUX (Non-Protected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18MUX (Protected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19MOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20TXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20RXU (Non-protected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21RXU (Hot-Standby). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21RXU Space Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22DEMOD (Non-Protected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23DEMOD (Hot-Standby) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24DEMOD (Space-Diversity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25SCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26OWU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27BER Problems (Rx Non-Protected). . . . . . . . 6-28BER Problems (Rx Hot-Standby) . . . . . . . . . 6-29BER Problems (Rx Space Diversity). . . . . . . 6-30NMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31Remote Tx Switch HH and SD . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Microwave Networks
CM SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 6-15
F-0350-1293
BatteryVoltage
OK?
Measure with a DVM the Battery Voltageat the Test Points on the PSU
Replace PSU Check Fuse at Power Distribution Panel
ProblemsClear?
FuseOK?
Replace Fuse
Measure Battery Voltage at TB1 on the
Back of the Radio
VoltageOK?
Repair External Battery Equipment and Cabling
Verify PSU Is Fully Seated. Check and
Repair Power Distribution Harness
One of the Modules Is Loading Down a Secondary Voltage.
Remove Modules One at a Time Until PSU Problem Clears.
Replace Module Causing Problem.
Yes No
Done
ProblemClear? Done
Yes
ReplacePSU and Fuse
No
Yes No
Yes
No
ProblemClear? Done
Yes
No
Check and Repair Power Distribution
Harness
Yes No
Chart 1. SP/RF PSU
Chapter 6 Maintenance
Page 6-16 8/5/03 CM SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
F-0990
In the SYNDES Alarm ScreenCheck to See if Alarm Is on the TX or RX Side
Is Alarma DS1 Input
Alarm?
Done
Yes
No
Replace SYNDES
Check and RepairExternal Equipment
and Cabling
AlarmClear?
Yes
Replace SYNDES
No
Perform MUX Loopback
AlarmsClear?
Yes
Replace SYNDES
No
Tx Rx
AlarmsClear? Done
Yes
Replace MUX
No
Problem Likelyat Remote Tx
Note: Ensure that the SYNDES configuration switches are correctly set according to the manual.
Chart 2. SYNDES (Non-Protected)
Microwave Networks
CM SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 6-17
F-0353
In the SYNDES Alarm ScreenCheck to See if Alarm Is on the TX or RX Side
Both Tx?Yes
No
Replace SYNDES
Check ExternalEquipment and Cabling Both Rx?
Yes
Replace SYNDES
No
Tx Rx
AlarmsClear? Done
Yes
Replace MUX
No
Problem Likelyat Remote Tx
Chart 3. SYNDES (Protected)
Chapter 6 Maintenance
Page 6-18 8/5/03 CM SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
F-1293
In the MUX Alarms ScreenCheck to See if Alarm Is on the TX or RX Side
AlarmsClear?
Yes
No
Replace SYNDES
Tx Rx
Replace MUX
DoneYes
No
Problem Likelyat Remote Tx
AlarmsClear?
Perform IF Loopback
AlarmsClear?
Replace MUX
DoneYes
Replace DEMOD
No
Done
No
Replace ATDE
YesAlarmsClear?
Chart 4. MUX (Non-Protected)
Microwave Networks
CM SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 6-19
F-0355
In the MUX Alarms ScreenCheck to See if Alarm Is on the TX or RX Side
AlarmsClear?
Yes
No
Replace SYNDES
BothRx?
Yes
Replace MUX
No
Tx Rx
AlarmsClear? Done
Yes
Replace DEMOD
No
Problem Likelyat Remote Tx
Replace MUX
Done
Chart 5. MUX (Protected)
Chapter 6 Maintenance
Page 6-20 8/5/03 CM SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
F-0356
AlarmsClear?
Yes
No
Replace MUX
Replace MOD
Done
Chart 6. MOD
F-1212
Check MOD - TXU IF Cables
CablesOK?
No
Yes
AlarmsClear? Done
Yes
Replace MOD
No
Replace
1
Replace TXU and ResetOutput Power
Chart 7. TXU
Microwave Networks
CM SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 6-21
F-1211
LO orAGC
Alarm?
Yes
No
AlarmsClear? Done
Yes
Replace RXU
Replace RXU
Check Remote Tx Status.Check Antenna Alignment and RF
Connections at Local and Remote Sites
ViewMeasurementsScreen Display
Low RSL?
Replace RXU
No
Yes
No
Chart 8. RXU (Non-protected)
F-1210
LO orAGC
Alarm?
Yes
No
Replace RXU
Check Remote Tx. Check AntennaAlignment and RF Connections at
Local and Remote Sites
Both RXDisplay Low
RSL?
Replace RXU
No
Yes
Chart 9. RXU (Hot-Standby)
Chapter 6 Maintenance
Page 6-22 8/5/03 CM SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
F1209
Is It a LO orAGC
Alarm?
Yes
No
Replace RXU
ViewMeasurementsScreen Display
Low RSL?
Replace RXU
No
Yes
Check Remote TX Status.Check Antenna Alignment and RF
Connections at Remote Site
BothLow
RSL on Bothor One RXU
Check AntennaAlignment and RF
Connections atLocal Site
One
AlarmsClear?
No
Replace RXU
YesDone
Chart 10. RXU Space Diversity
Microwave Networks
CM SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 6-23
F-0375
Replace Demod
No
YesCheck RXU - DEMOD IF Cable.
Check Remote Tx Status.Check Antenna Alignment and RF
Connections at Local and Remote Sites.
AlarmsClear?
Perform IFLoopback
AlarmsClear?
Yes
Replace MUX
No
AlarmsClear?
Yes
Replace RXU
No
Done
Done
AlarmsClear?
Yes
Replace ATDE
No
Done
AlarmsClear?
Done
No
Yes
Chart 11. DEMOD (Non-Protected)
Chapter 6 Maintenance
Page 6-24 8/5/03 CM SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
F-0376-0794
Perform IFLoopback
No
YesCheck Remote Tx. Check Antenna
Alignment and RF Connections at Localand Remote Sites.
AlarmsClear?
Alarm OnBoth?
No
No
ReplaceDemod
Done
YesCheck RXU -DEMOD IF Cable
CableOK?
Replace
ReplaceRXU
Yes
AlarmsClear?
Yes
ReplaceMUX
No
DoneAlarmsClear?
Yes
ReplaceATDE
No
AlarmsClear?
Yes
No
Done
Chart 12. DEMOD (Hot-Standby)
Microwave Networks
CM SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 6-25
CableOK?
F-0378-0794
Perform IFLoopback
No
YesCheck Remote Tx.
Check Antenna Alignment and RFConnections at Remote Site
AlarmsClear?
Alarm OnBoth?
No
Check RXU -DEMOD IF Cable
ReplaceCable
Yes
Done
ReplaceDEMOD
Yes
No
AlarmsClear?
Check Local AntennaAlignment and RF
Connections
Yes
No
ReplaceRXU
AlarmsClear?
Yes
No
ReplaceMUX
Done
DoneAlarmsClear?
Yes
No
ReplaceATDE
AlarmsClear?
Yes
Done
No
Chart 13. DEMOD (Space-Diversity)
Chapter 6 Maintenance
Page 6-26 8/5/03 CM SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
F-0379
No Alarm ButVF/Data Are Bad
VF/DataOK?
No
Problem atRemote Tx
Done
ReplaceSCU
AlarmClear?
Check External VFand Data Cables
Yes
No
ReplaceMUX
AlarmsOn?
No
No
Done
YesReplace SCU
Perform MUXLoopback
Yes
VF/DataOK?
Yes
No
ReplaceMUX
ProblemCleared? Done
Yes
Chart 14. SCU
Microwave Networks
CM SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 6-27
F-0380b
No AlarmBut VF Does Not
Pass Through
VF/DataOK?
No
Problem atRemote Tx
Done
ReplaceOWU
AlarmOn?
No
No
Yes
Yes
VF/DataOK?
Yes
No
ReplaceSCU
DoneYes
Perform LocalSCU Loopback
VF/DataOK?
ReplaceMUX
ReplaceOWU
Chart 15. OWU
Chapter 6 Maintenance
Page 6-28 8/5/03 CM SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
Chart 16. BER Problems (Rx Non-Protected)
F-0829
Perform IFLoopback
BEROK? No
Perform IFLoopback atRemote Site
ReplaceRXU
LowRSL?
No Yes
Check Remote Tx Status.Check Antenna Alignment
and RF Connections atLocal and Remote.
YesPerform MUXLoopback
DoneBEROK?
Yes
No
No
ReplaceMUX
ReplaceDEMOD
BEROK?
Yes
No
ReplaceSYNDES
BEROK? Done
Yes
No
ReplaceRemote TXU
BER OK atRemote
Site?
Yes
No
ReplaceLocal RXU
BEROK? Done
Yes
Perform MUXLoopback atRemote Site
No
BEROK?
YesDone
Look for Presenceof Interfering Signal
ReplaceRemote MUX
BER OK atRemote
Site?
No
ReplaceRemote
SYNDES
BER OK atRemote
Site?
DoneYes
ReplaceRemote
MOD
Yes
No
No
ReplaceATDE
BEROK? Done
Yes
Microwave Networks
CM SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 6-29
F-0830
Perform IFLoopback
No
BothRx?
No Yes
LowRSL?
Yes
No
ReplaceDEMOD
BEROK?
No
ReplaceMUX
BEROK?
Yes
BEROK?
ReplaceRemote
TXU
Yes
Switch RemoteTXU - MOD and TX
MUX-SYNDES
ReplaceRemote MOD
BER OK?
No
ReplaceRemote
MUX
Done
Yes
Yes
No
Check Remote Tx. CheckAntenna Alignment and RFConnections at Local and
Remote.
BER OK? Done
YesDone
No
BER OK?
ReplaceRemote
SYNDES
No
Check for Presence ofInterfering Signal
Yes ReplaceRXU
Done
No
ReplaceSYNDES
BEROK?
YesDone
No
ReplaceATDE
BEROK?
YesDone
Chart 17. BER Problems (Rx Hot-Standby)
Chapter 6 Maintenance
Page 6-30 8/5/03 CM SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
L ow RSLon Both
Rx?
F-0832
No
No YesLowRSL?
Yes
No
Perform IFLoopback
BERProblemson Both?
No
PerformMUX
Loopback
BEROK?
Yes
Check Antenna Alignmentand RF Connections at
Local Site
Check Remote Tx.Check Antenna Alignment
and RF Connections atRemote Site.
Yes
No
BER OK?
Yes Problem Likely atRemote Site. Troubleshoot
Remote Site.
ReplaceRXU
No
RemoveATDE
BEROK?
Yes ReplaceDEMOD
Done
ReplaceRXU
No
ReplaceMUX
BEROK?
Yes ReplaceATDE
No
ReplaceATDE
BEROK?
YesDone
Chart 18. BER Problems (Rx Space Diversity)
Microwave Networks
CM SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 8/5/03 Page 6-31
F-0850
ACUAlarm?
No
Reset Switch S4on the ACU
Done
ReplaceNMU
YesACUAlarm?
ReplaceACU
CheckACU Alarm
Yes
NMUAlarmClear?
Yes
No
ReplaceACU
Chart 19. NMU
Chapter 6 Maintenance
Page 6-32 8/5/03 CM SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
!"""#$%&
'
(
"$%)&
'
* +* , "
"
(
'
-
(
!!, .$%
)&
'
-/0
(
-12"1
3 !!,-/0-4,$ +5
!!, .$%
)&
(
'
*$%)&
60/-2(/2,"7-"$%
(
, 0/
2&(
, 0/
'
2&55(
, -
2&55(
, -/0
'
'
5-%-"6"55"0
'
$%8)&
'
(
!!,, 0/
3 !!0/7-"$%7-, 755
* + ""7* +!!
"
3 92/"7-!55
Chart 20. Remote Tx Switch Hot-Standby and Space Diversity RX
CM System User’s Manual Page 1
Place any site research or reference material here
Site Engineering
Site Engineering
Page 2 CM System User’s Manual
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual Page A-1
1.0 IntroductionThis appendix describes T/I, or Threshold-to-Interference ratio curves for the CM7/8 SONET/SDH Radio.
2.0 T/I RatioThe T/I ratio is the ratio of the level of the desired receiver carrier threshold to that of an interfering carrier that degrades the performance of the CM7/8 receiver from a bit error rate (BER) of 10-6 to a BER of 10-5.
As defined in EIA Bulletin 10D, the threshold level, T, is that signal level in a digital receiver which results in a 10-6 BER in that receiver. The interference level, I, in the T/I ratio is defined as that level of interference required to degrade the 10-6 BER performance one order of magnitude to 10-5 BER.
T/I curves plotting allowable T/I versus frequency offset of the interfering signal are on file with the frequency search companies and are available for all Microwave Networks digital microwave radios.
Note: Microwave Networks incorporates diagrams into Appendix A as they become avail-able.
Appendix AT/I Curves
Appendix A TI Curves
Page A-2 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
-50.00
-40.00
-30.00
-20.00
-10.00
0.00
10.00
20.00
30.00
40.00
-220 -200 -180 -160 -140 -120 -100 -80 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
Interferer Freq Offset from Carrier (MHz)
T/I
Rat
io (
dB
)
T/I Ratio Limit line
Figure A-1. CM7 SONET Electrical, T/I Curve, APC On, SP TXUs
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System user’s Manual Page A-3
Tadiran Microwave Networks
-50.00
-40.00
-30.00
-20.00
-10.00
0.00
10.00
20.00
30.00
40.00
-220 -200 -180 -160 -140 -120 -100 -80 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220
Interferer Freq Offset from Carrier (MHz)
T/I
Rat
io (
dB
)
T/I Ratio Limit line
Figure A-2. CM7 SONET Electrical, T/I Curve, APC Off, SP TXU
Appendix A TI Curves
Page A-4 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
-5 0 .0 0
-4 0 .0 0
-3 0 .0 0
-2 0 .0 0
-1 0 .0 0
0 .0 0
1 0 .0 0
2 0 .0 0
3 0 .0 0
4 0 .0 0
5 0 .0 0
-2 2 0 -2 0 0 -1 8 0 -1 6 0 -1 4 0 -1 2 0 -1 0 0 -8 0 -6 0 -4 0 -2 0 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 0 1 0 0 1 2 0 1 4 0 1 6 0 1 8 0 2 0 0
In te rfe re r F re q O ffs e t f ro m C a rrie r (M H z )
C/I
Rat
io (
dB
)
C /I R a tio
Figure A-3. CM8 SONET Electrical, CW Interference, APC Off, DHP Tx
-5 0 .0 0
-4 0 .0 0
-3 0 .0 0
-2 0 .0 0
-1 0 .0 0
0 .0 0
1 0 .0 0
2 0 .0 0
3 0 .0 0
4 0 .0 0
5 0 .0 0
-2 2 0 -2 0 0 -1 8 0 -1 6 0 -1 4 0 -1 2 0 -1 0 0 -8 0 -6 0 -4 0 -2 0 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 0 1 0 0 1 2 0 1 4 0 1 6 0 1 8 0 2 0 0 2
In te r fe re r F re q O ffs e t fro m C a rrie r (M H z )
C/I
Rat
io (
dB
)
C /I R a tio
Figure A-4. CM8 SONET Electrical, CW Interference, APC On, DHP Tx
CM System User’s Manual Page B-1
IntroductionAppendix B describes the QuikLink menus and screens that display on a VT100/VT220, compatible computer terminal connected to the radio local access port (Chapter 4, Page 4-20). Each screen has an explanation of how to make menu choices, how to move to the next or previous display screens, and how to change radio settings. Topics of this section include:
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1Verifying the ACU Software Version . . . . . . . . . B-1Screen Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2Monitoring Radio Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3Index of Available Local Display Screens. . . . . . B-4Screen Menu Flowcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7Individual Local Maintenance Screens . . . . . . . . B-9
NOTE: Access all screen using a computer terminal (LMT) connected to the Local Access Port.
Appendix B covers 2, 6, 7/8, 10, and 11-GHz radios. Whenever possible, differences are noted, but some screens appear due to the presence of optional equipment. Screen explanations describe applicability.
Verifying the ACU Software Version The ACU software for configuring the radio is P/N MVN4025B. The current version number appears on the PROM U29 on the ACU. This information covers the latest software release and may not apply to your system. Contact Technical Support for release information.
Software Revision The latest ACU and its software supports 100BaseT radio capacity and SNMP network management.
Contact Customer Service for specific information on current software revisions and the affects on your specific radio configuration. Call the 24-hour hot-line at 888-225-4762 (U.S. toll free). Outside U.S. call 281.263.6501.
Appendix BQuikLink Screens
Appendix B QuikLink
Page B-2 CM System User’s Manual
Screen LayoutFigures B-1, B-2 (Page B-7), and the following list discusses using screens that may appear on your computer terminal or performance monitoring device connected to the radio local access port.
Each screen has a number which allows you to go to that display without scrolling. Screens 001 to 007 show the information screen, top-level menus, and performance statistics. Screens 020 to 040 show alarms and status. Screens 050 to 057 have configuration settings. And, Screens 070 to 088 have control and maintenance settings.
Screen Control Area: The lower left corner of the screen denotes which of the five screen types the terminal displays. Choose from five letters, followed by a three-digit-node address (000—250, if NMU equipped):
L - denotes a local radio. R - denotes a remote radio.c - denotes a co-located radio.r - denotes the remote terminal of a co-located radio.N - denotes the NMS network node.
Selecting Screens 1. Move the cursor into the screen control area (3), to select one of the four screens.
2. Press 0, then the left arrow key (0,←) to select one of the screen views.
3. Use the Up/Down arrow keys (↑/↓ ) to select L, R, c, or r, then press Enter (↵ ).
NOTE: Select a screen viewing configuration and press Enter within five seconds between key com-mands, or the selection function resets.
Aborting Changes Press ESC to abort any change.
Navigating Screens The screen number displays in the lower left corner of the screen (3). There are two methods of reaching a screen:
1. Press the Escape key to move from screen to screen through the menu hierarchy, or
2. Enter the number of the screen you wish to display.
L 002 Esc Select _
Main Menu
>1. Performance Monitoring 2. Alarm and Status 3. Configuration 4. Control and Maintenance
Screen Control Area
Screen Title
Command
Selections,Information
mainRefresh Indicator
Figure B-1. Screen 002 – Main Menu
Microwave Networks
CM System User’s Manual Page B-3
For example, if you are on screen 073 and want to go back to screen 071, type 071 and press Enter (071,↵ ). The system then displays screen 071. To return to a previously displayed screen, press 0 and Enter (0,↵ ). Use this method to toggle between the two screens.
Command Area: that work with that screen, see Table B-A. For example, Screen 002 displays Esc, and Select _. Press Esc to display the Product Label screen, which is the parent for Screen 002. To choose <Select> enter an appropriate number followed by Enter (<#>,<↵ >), or use the up/down arrow and press Enter (<↑> or <↓>, <↵ >.)
Refresh Indicator: The repeating symbols “. o O” show that the system is continuously polling and refreshing the screen. Every time the symbol changes, the screen has been refreshed. These symbols are not shown if the screen is not being refreshed or has a static display.
Selection, Information area displays menu items, status information, and messages - such as error messages or reports that appear momentarily on the screen.
Table B-B lists control codes, ASCII codes, and jump screen commands.
Table B-A. Keyboard/keypad Functions
Key Action
1-9 (< Moves menu cursor to numbered item; displays number at menu selection prompt
<0##> Moves menu cursor to specified screen number.
Up Arrow <↑> Moves menu cursor to numbered item directly above current item; wraps. Also functions as <Page Up> key.
Down Arrow <↓> Moves menu cursor to numbered item directly below current item; wraps. Also functions as <Page Dn> key.
Left Arrow <←> Moves menu cursor left one column; wraps between columns.
Right Arrow <→> Moves menu cursor right one column; wraps between columns.
Escape <ESC> Returns to previous screen or menu.
Enter <↵ Enter> Descends to selected screen or changes selected states.
Table B-B. Local Access Port Codes
Type Code Meaning
Control codes <ESC>,<↵ Enter> or <Ctrl-R> Repaint Screen
ASCII codes <U> Arrow up
<D> Arrow down
<L> Arrow left
<R> Arrow right
<↵ Enter> Execute or select
<ESC> Return to parent screen
<?>,<H>,<h> Help
Jump screen commands <0>,<##>,<↵ Enter> Go to screen ##
<0>,<↵ Enter> Go to previous screen
Appendix B QuikLink
Page B-4 CM System User’s Manual
Monitoring Radio FunctionsThe optional Local Maintenance Terminal (MLN8003A), a VT100/VT220, or an ANSI equivalent computer terminal provides access to radio monitoring and control screens. The terminal connects to the local access port. The local access port, a female DB9 RS232 data connector, connects by serial cable to the communications port of the terminal. Chapter 4, Installation, describes the proper connection for the serial cable. This cable comes with the optional LMT. Once connected, set the communications port of a terminal or computer to 9600, 8,N,1 and set the terminal type to VT100.
Index of ScreensTable B-C lists all local display screens that may appear on the VT100 screen. This table is particularly helpful when using the jump screen feature.
Table B-C. Local Display Screen Index
Screen Number
Screen Title Description
001 Log-in Screen Displays radio model, software and revision number, date, and time. Also displays the node type, master or slave.
002 Main Menu Lists the four submenus: 1-Performance Monitoring, 2-Alarm and Status, 3-Configuration, and 4-Control and Maintenance.
003 Performance Monitoring Menu
Lists four selections:View Link, View Measurement, Reset Link, and Reset Comm Port.
004 Perf. - View Link Lists link statistics such as:bit error rate, frame loss, errored seconds, severely errored seconds, and frame loss seconds for five time frames: Last second, 60 seconds, 60 minutes, 24 hours, and Last 7 Days.
005 Perf. - View Measurement
Displays the Ant. Tx Power, TXU Power, Ant. RX Power, RXU Power, and system temperature. Also displays Slope Amplifier stress for CM radios.
006 Perf - Reset Link Resets the link statistics counters.007 Perf. - View Comm Ports Displays the NMU and Auxiliary Communication Port
statistics020 Alarm and Status Menu Lists 14 submenus of alarm information: SYSTEM,
SYNDES, MUX, DEMOD, MOD, SCU, ATDE, TXU, RXU, OWU, SP PSU, RF PSU, WTU, and SCE. Selec-tion jumps to the appropriate submenu.
021 Alarm - System Menu Lists five items: Show Alarm Summary, Show System Alarms, Show System LED Status, View/Print Alarm Log, and Show Tx and Rx Path.
022* Alarm - SYNDES A multiple-page display that shows Module, Service, Transmit, and Receive status; Switch confirm, and each channel I/O status. For DS3 configurations, the display also shows Input BER, and Rx PLL status.
023* Alarm - MUX A multiple-page display that shows Module, Service, Transmit, and Receive status; Switch confirm, Input Channel Tx Data, DS3 Input Alarm, Rx Out of Frame, Mux Output Alarm, Rx A Out of Frame, Rx B Out of Frame, Rx A Input Data, and Rx B Input Data.
Microwave Networks
CM System User’s Manual Page B-5
024 Alarm - DEMOD Displays Module status, Service status, VCO, Quadra-ture, and Frame Loss.
025 Alarm - MOD Displays Module status, Service status, Switch Confirm, and I/O LOS.
026 Alarm - SCU Displays Module status, Service status, Hardware status (follows Module status), and Switch Confirm. Also dis-plays when system is not equipped with an SCU.
027* Alarm - ATDE Displays Module status, Service status. Also displays when system is not equipped with an ATDE, or, for 3DS3 systems, the ATDE is implemented on the DEMOD.
028 Alarm - TXU A multiple-page display that shows Module and Service Status, Switch and APC Confirm, LO, TX ALC Tx Power Level, Fan, Phase Lock Loop, Regulated Voltage.
029 Alarm - RXU Displays Module status, Service status, LO, AGC, and Regulated Voltage Status. Displays Preamplifier on some systems.
030 Alarm - OWU Displays Module, Service, and Hardware Status. Indi-cates when system is not-equipped with OWU.
031 Alarm - SP PSU Displays Module, Service, and Supply Status.Also shows battery, and supply voltage conditions.
032* Alarm - RF PSU Displays Module Status, Service Status, Supply Status.033 Alarm - WTU Displays Module Status, Service Status, Switch Confirm,
Ch. Input LOS.034 Alarm - SCE Displays Unit Status035 Alarm - Summary Lists SYSTEM, SYNDES, MUX, DEMOD, MOD, SCU,
ATDE, TXU, RXU, OWU, SP PSU, RF PSU, WTU, and SCE alarms.
036 Alarm - System Alarms Displays A & B Side BER, Tx High APC, Remote Com-munication, TXU, SCU, and SYS. alarms.
037 Alarm - System LED Status Displays Major LED, Minor LED, Manual LED, and Sec-tion Fail LED status. Also Normal LED.
038 Alarm - Report Menu Allows you to view, clear, and print the alarm and event log.
039 Alarm - View Report Lists all alarms and events in the log by date and time stamp.
040 Status - Tx and Rx Path Displays on-line modules for Tx and Rx Path.050 Configuration Menu Lists Module Parameters, AIS Option, Calibrate Tx
Power, Date & Time, Line Lengths/Coding.051* Configuration - System /
Module ParametersDisplays System/Module Configuration and Parameters for Freq. Band, Capacity, Tx & Rx Protection, Battery, APC Option, SCU, ATDE, OWU, SCE, and Line Input Channels equipped. Also TX Power Option and NMU Software Revision.
052 Configuration - Select AIS Option
Allows you to select AIS option.
053 Configuration - Calibrate Tx Power Output
Allows you to enter the On-line TXU Output Power. Not available on CM6.
054 Configuration - Date and Time
Allows you to set the date and time.
057 Configuration-SYNDES Link
Allows you to set line length and coding for each chan-nel. Only available on 28DS1.
Table B-C. Local Display Screen Index (Continued)
Screen Number
Screen Title Description
Appendix B QuikLink
Page B-6 CM System User’s Manual
070 Control and Maintenance Menu
Lists Path Switching, Loopback, APC, and Power Ampli-fiers submenus. Transistor-Transistor Logic and Relays.
071 Control - Path Switching Set path switching for TXU-MOD, RXU-DEMOD, MUX-SYNDES, SCU, and WTU.
073 TTL I/O & Relays Displays the TTL input and Relay output control status, and allows the setting of TTL & Relay output control points.
081 Control - Loopback Menu Lists IF, MUX, SYNDES, SCU, and WTU loopback sta-tus and submenus. Clear All resets loopback to normal operation.
082 Control - IF Loopback Loop the local equipment and view the status of a local facility loopback. Not supported on radios with 3DS3 or higher capacity.
083 Control - MUX Loopback Loop the local equipment and view the status of a local facility loopback.
084 Control - 28DS1 SYNDES Loopback
Control - 3DS3–100BaseTScreens are also shown.
Select local or remote channels, individually or all at once. To monitor individual channel changes, enter the channel number. To monitor all channels at once, enter 99 and the screen will display <all>. Screen 84 also allows you to monitor and change the loopback status from local to remote equipment.
085 Control - SCU Loopback Loop the local equipment and view the status of a local facility loopback.
086 Control - WTU Loopback Loop the local equipment and view the status of a local facility loopback.
087 Control - APC Manual Turn APC Manual Mode On/Off, or return to the Auto Mode.
088 Control - Power Amplifiers Turn the power amplifiers On or Off for both A and B radios. Not available on CM11.
* Not all screen selections are available for use with each radio configuration, capacity, or frequency band. Review specific screen explanations for individual radio applicability.
Table B-C. Local Display Screen Index (Continued)
Screen Number
Screen Title Description
Microwave Networks
CM System User’s Manual Page B-7
Screen Menu FlowchartsThe following section contains flowcharts (Figures B-2, B-3, B-4, B-5, and B-6) for the local radio maintenance screens. The screens allow for configuring, monitoring, controlling, and troubleshooting operations on the radio. The next subsection illustrates each screen in numerical order.
003PerformanceMonitoring
002Main Menu
020Alarm & Status
050System
Configuration
070Control &
Maintenance
F-0134-0
Figure B-2. Flowchart - Main Menus
LastSecond
003PerformanceMonitoring
004View Statistics
005View
Measurements
006Reset LinkCounters
Last60 Sec.
Last60 Min.
Last24 Hrs.
Last7 Days F-0135r
007View Comm
Ports
ResetCommPort
Figure B-3. Flowchart - Performance Monitoring Screens
Appendix B QuikLink
Page B-8 CM System User’s Manual
020Alarm & Status
021System
026SCU
Alarms
023MUX
Alarms
025MOD
Alarms
024DEMODAlarms
028TXU
Alarms
029RXU
Alarms
030OWU
Alarms
031SP PSUAlarms
022SYNDESAlarms
027ATDE
Alarms
035Alarm
Summary
036SystemAlarms
037System
LEDStatus
038AlarmLog
040Tx andRx Path
032RF PSUAlarms
033WTU
Alarms
034SCE
Status
F-1215
039AlarmReport
Figure B-4. Flowchart -Alarm and Status Screens
050System
Configuration
051System/Module
Parameters
053Calibrate
TxPower
054Date and
Time
052AIS
Options
System/ModuleParameters
WTUChannels
SYNDESChannels
F-1216
Figure B-5. Flowchart - Configuration Screens
Microwave Networks
CM System User’s Manual Page B-9
Local Maintenance ScreensThis section illustrates and describes each local maintenance screen in numeric order. Use the flowcharts to navigate to a desired screen, then look for the screen in this section
070Control and
Maintenance
081Loopback/Monitoring
087APC
Control
088Power
AmplifierControl
071Path
Switching
SCU
MUX-SYNDES
(Any) ForcedSwitching
TXU-MOD
083MUX
Loopback
082IF/Baseband
Loopback
084SYNDES
Loopbacks
085SCU
Loopbacks
WTU
086WTU
Loopbacks
F-0138-0
ClearAll
RXU-DEMOD
073TTL I/O &
Relays
Figure B-6. Flowchart - Control and Maintenance Screens
Appendix B QuikLink
Page B-10 CM System Users Manual
001 - Product Label Screen
Radio Frequency and Capacity
Table B-D shows the possible radio frequencies for your radio. Frequency band is the number which comes before the letter G in the radio model name. The G indicates the frequency band in GHz. In the Radio Capacity Table, N indicates narrowband configuration.
CM radios have a master-slave relationship in a network. The Master label displays only if the NMU is equipped and set as a master.
This screen also shows the radio model, software revision, and copyright information.
A slave unit does not display any message. See Chapter 3, Section 7 for ACU switch settings.
002 - Main Menu
Menu Selections
Selection causes jump to the listed menu.
Item 1 shows a menu statistics or measurements, or to reset statistics.
Item 2 shows a menu to get to the alarm and status of the system or of any module.
Item 3 shows the configuration menu.
Item 4 shows the menu to set switching path, loopback, APC control, and power amplifier control.
Table B-D. Radio Frequency and CapacityFrequencies
Telestar 2G, 6G, or CM6
Telestar 7/8G, 10G, or CM7/8, and CM11
Capacities
4DS1N
8DS1, 12DS1, 28 DS1, DS3, 3 DS3
8E1N, 8E1, E3
4E1, 4 E1N
SONET OC3/STM3
2x100BaseT+DS3
!
"#$%&'
L 002 Esc Select _
Main Menu
>1. Performance Monitoring 2. Alarm and Status 3. Configuration 4. Control and Maintenance
Microwave Networks
CM System Users Manual Page B-11
003 - Performance Monitoring Menu
Menu Selections
Select 1 to view link statistics for last second, last 60 seconds, last 60 minutes, last 24 hours or last 7 days.
Select 2 to view performance measurements of System Temperature, TX power output at the antenna or filter, RX signal level at the antenna or filter, or slope amplitude stress.
Select 3 to view NMS and Auxiliary Communication Port statistics.
Select 4 to reset radio link side A, reset radio link side B, or to reset both radio link sides.
Select 5 to reset NMS and Auxiliary Communication Port statistics. A confirmation message will be shown requesting authorization to proceed with task, “Reset comm Port? (Y,1/N,0):”.
004 - View Link
Screen Elements
Use PgUp, PgDn to view link statistics for last second, last 60 seconds, last 60 minutes, last 24 hours, or last 7 days.
BER (bit-error rate) represents the bit errors delivered to the customer.
L 003 Esc Select _ o
Performance Monitoring >1. View Link 2. View Measurements 3. View Comm Ports 4. Reset Link 5. Reset Comm Port [94-04-07 10:32]
L 004 Esc PgUp PgDn .
Perf - View Link Last Second A Side B Side BER: ----- 1.0e-003 Frame Loss: Yes No
L 004 Esc PgUp PgDn o
Perf - View Link Last 60 Sec A Side B Side BER: 0.0e+000 8.7e-003 ES: 0 12 SES: 5 6 FLS: 2 4
L 004 Esc PgUp PgDn o
Perf - View Link Last 60 Min A Side B Side BER: 0.0e+000 8.7e-003 ES: 0 12 SES: 5 6 FLS: 2 4
L 004 Esc PgUp PgDn o
Perf - View Link Last 24 Hrs A Side B Side BER: 0.0e+000 8.7e-003 ES: 0 12 SES: 5 6 FLS: 2 4
L 004 Esc PgUp PgDn o
Perf - View Statistics Last 7 Days A Side B Side BER: 0.0e+000 8.7e-003 ES: 0 12 SES: 5 6 FLS: 2 4
Appendix B QuikLink
Page B-12 CM System Users Manual
ES (errored seconds) is a second with one or more parity errors.
SES (severely errored second) is any second with parity errors greater than 10-3.
Frame loss shows upon loss of framed data signals. No statistics are updated during frame loss events.
FLS (frame loss second) is any second with a a frame loss. During these events, BER calculation does not include frame-loss period.
Screen data gets updated once every second. For non-protected radios, B-side statistics are blank.
005 - View Measurements Screen
Screen Elements
System Temp displays in °F and °C. Measured on the ACU module.
Tx Power at Antenna is the power being delivered to the antenna by the transmitter. Only on-line transmitter measurement shows.
TX Power at Filter is the power being delivered by each TXU.
RSL at Antenna is the receive signal power present at the antenna port.
RSL at Filter is the receiver power present at each RXU.
RSL at Plug-in only displays for CM radios and is the receive power at the RXU.
Slope Amp Stress displays for CM radios and is the Slope Equalizer stress voltage. Any voltage out of range causes a TX alarm.
For non-protected radios, B-side statistics are blank.
()*+,-'.-/-$0 .!.!/1(*+ '''+#234!-/1(*+0#234!-.%+ '''+#4!-45!-.%+(,'#4!-4!-
%&4
()*+,-'.-/-$0 .!. -.34
%&4
391
39:;(3
Microwave Networks
CM System Users Manual Page B-13
006 - Reset Statistics Menu
Menu Selections
Select 1to reset both radio A and radio B.
Select 2 to reset radio A. The date and time of the last reset display next to the menu item.
Select 3 to reset radio B. The date and time of the last reset are display next to the menu item.
Note: Reset zeros all link counters. For non-protected radios, only item 2 is displayed.
007 - View Comm Ports Screen
Screen Elements
This screen displays the NMU Communication Port statistics. If your radio is not equipped with a NMU, the screen only displays a message to that effect.
The maximum number of statistical events displayed prior to Rx Overrun indication are limited to 4,294,967,295 for screen items 1 and 3. Items 2, 4, and 5 display up to 65,535 statistical events prior to counter overrun.
Page 2 displays Auxiliary Communication Port statistics. Statistical event are limited to the same number of entries stated above before counter overrun.
L 006 Esc Select 1
Perf - Reset Link
>1. Both Sides 2. A Side Only [93-11-10 08:00] 3. B Side Only [93-11-10 08:00]
Perf - View Comm PortsNMS Port Total Err Free Frames Rx: 4294967295 No of Err Frames: 1275 Total Err Free Chars Rx: 4294967295 No of Err Char Rx: 53612 No of Rx Overrun: 65535L 007 Esc PgUp PgDn o
Perf - View Comm Ports Auxiliary Port
Total Err Free Chars Rx: 4294967295 No of Err Char Rx: 36426 No of Rx Overrun: 65535
L 007 Esc PgUp PgDn o
Appendix B QuikLink
Page B-14 CM System Users Manual
020 - Alarm and Status Menu
Selection displays screen or menu of alarms and status for the item indicated.
Note: The ACU does not have its own alarms.
021 - System Alarm Menu
Menu Selections
Select 1 for view an alarm summary screen (035).
Select 2 to show state of system alarms.
Select 3 to show status of system LEDs.
Select 4 to display the alarm log.
Select 5 to show the on-line TX and RX paths.
Note: For non-protected radios, item 5 does not display.
L 020 Esc Select_
Alarm and Status
>1. SYSTEM 5. MOD 9. RXU 13. WTU 2. SYNDES 6. SCU 10. OWU 14. SCE 3. MUX 7. ATDE 11. SPPSU 4. DEMOD 8. TXU 12. RFPSU
L 021 Esc Select_
Alarm - SYSTEM
>1. Show Alarm Summary 2. Show System Alarms 3. Show System LED Status 4. View/Print Alarm Log 5. Show Tx and Rx Path
Microwave Networks
CM System Users Manual Page B-15
022 - SYNDES Alarm Screen
Screen Elements
Module Status indicates whether the module is operating normally (Normal) or is in alarm (Alarm.)
Service Status shows absent, standby, in-service. Absent means the module is required but not installed or an SP fuse is blown. Standby means the module is present but not in service. In-Svc means the module is carrying traffic.
Transmit and receive status shows a failure in either the transmit path or receive path. The path status that has the highest priority according to the list below is used as the composite module state.
1. Missing module or empty slot.
2. Alarm
3. In-Svc
4. Standby
5. Normal
Switch Confirm shows when the SYNDES fails to respond to a switch command on protected systems.
If the DS1 signal is absent at the line interface circuit for any channel configured as equipped, the appropriate alarm activates.
If any of the RX portion of the SYNDES is in alarm for a particular channel, the appropriate alarm activates.
DS3 Configurations
Input BER alarm indicates the bit error rate at the DS3 input exceeds 10-6
LOS at DS3 Input alarm is a loss of signal at the DS3 input to the SYNDES.
LOS at DS3 Output alarm is a loss of signal at the DS3 output from the SYNDES.
DS3 Rx PLL indicates receive side phase lock loop circuit has failed or is out of range.
! "#$ % &'( )
*+
,+! - +.+/+0+. +.+/+0+.1++21 1++210+++.+3/0 0+++.+3/02,++1, 2,++1,
+('+('2! +('.(',! +('3('+! +('+('2-+('.(',-+('3('+-
*,+
/('+! /('! /('/! /('+-/('-/('/-
*/
/! %-/! -/-/%4
*//
*+.."+$
-$56!$--$56%7
Page 2. 100BaseT
L 022 Esc PgUp PgDn
Alarm - SYNDES A Side B Side
PDH INPUT LOS: Normal Normal PDH RX PLL: Normal Normal REC MUX CLOCK: Normal Normal RECEIVE FRAME: Normal Normal
Appendix B QuikLink
Page B-16 CM System Users Manual
023 - MUX Alarm Screen Screen Elements
Module Status indicates whether the module is operating normally (Normal) or is in alarm (Alarm.)
Service Status shows absent, standby, in-service. Absent means the module is required but not installed or an SP fuse is blown. Standby means the module is present but not in service. In-Svc means the module is carrying traffic.
Transmit and receive status shows a failure in either the transmit path or receive path. The path status that has the highest priority according to the list below is used as the composite module state.
1. Missing module or empty slot.
2. Alarm
3. In-Svc
4. Standby
5. Normal
Switch Confirm shows when the MUX fails to respond to a switch command on protected systems.
Note: For non-protected radios, B side MUX alarms are not displayed and RX B indications are displayed as “– – “.
Ch 1-Ch 4, Ch 5-Ch 8, and Ch 9-Ch 12 Tx Data refer to data and clock from the TX SYNDES.
Rx A Input Data and Rx B Input Data indicate that the data received from DEMOD A or DEMOD B is not valid.
Rx Out-of-Frame activates if the data supplied to the on-line MUX, from DEMOD A or DEMOD B, is out-of-frame.
MUX Output Alarm shows status of MUX output side.
DS3 Input Alarm refers to data and clock from Tx side of the SYNDES.
/
7
! "#$ % &'( )
7
(6+(62$4(6.(6,$4('3(6+$4%4--)87-/
+
/
7
/! %4--)87-
/
7
%4-)8%4-)8%4! %4!
/
/
/
7
-$56!$%%7-$-88%
+.."+$
Microwave Networks
CM System Users Manual Page B-17
024 - DEMOD Alarm Screen
Screen Elements
Module Status indicates whether the module is operating normally (Normal) or is in alarm (Alarm.)
Service Status shows absent, standby, in-service. Absent means the module is required but not installed or an SP fuse is blown. Standby means the module is present but not in service. In-Svc means the module is carrying traffic.
The DEMOD alarms link to internal stress voltages that represent the control voltages for the adaptive control loops within the DEMOD. Any voltages out of range cause an alarm.
VCO is 70 MHz VCO control voltage.
Quadrature is control voltage for quadrature adjustment.
Frame Loss is control voltage for frame losses.
Note: For non-protected radios, B side DEMOD alarms are not displayed.
025 - MOD Alarm Screen
Screen Elements
Module Status indicates whether the module is operating normally (Normal) or is in alarm (Alarm.)
Service Status shows absent, standby, in-service. Absent means the module is required but not installed or an SP fuse is blown. Standby means the module is present but not in service. In-Svc means the module is carrying traffic.
Switch Confirm shows when the MOD fails to respond to a switch command on protected systems.
Output LOS indicates a MOD hardware failure.
Input LOS is an indication of invalid or no data from the MUX.
Note: For non-protected radios, B side MOD alarms are not displayed.
2
-
! "#9(-:
2
-!; !-))!(<:; :-)):(<
2
-(; 5 #99(7-8
.
-
! "#&'( )--! -
.
-=.9#.9#(!-(:-!8 <
Appendix B QuikLink
Page B-18 CM System Users Manual
026 - SCU Alarm Screen
Screen Elements
Module Status indicates whether the module is operating normally (Normal) or is in alarm (Alarm.)
Service Status shows absent, standby, in-service. Absent means the module is required but not installed or an SP fuse is blown. Standby means the module is present but not in service. In-Svc means the module is carrying traffic.
Hardware Status shows that the hardware is operating normally (Normal) or is in alarm (Alarm).
Switch Confirm shows when the MUX fails to respond to a switch command on protected systems.
The second screen shown displays for radios without an SCU
Note: For non-protected radios, B side SCU alarms are not dis-played.
027 - ATDE Alarm ScreenNot on radios with 3DS3 or higher capacity.
Screen Elements
Module Status indicates whether the module is operating normally (Normal) or is in alarm (Alarm.)
Service Status shows absent, standby, in-service. Absent means the module is required but not installed or an SP fuse is blown. Standby means the module is present but not in service. In-Svc means the module is carrying traffic.
The second screen shown displays for radios without an ATDE.
Note: For non-protected radios, B side ATDE alarms are not displayed.
L 026 Esc
Alarm - SCU A Side B Side
Module Status: Normal Normal Service Status: In-Svc Standby Hardware Status: Normal Normal Switch Confirm: Normal Normal
Alarm - SCU
Unit Non-equipped
L 026 Esc
L 027 Esc
Alarm - ATDE A Side B Side
Module Status: Normal Normal Service Status: In-Svc Standby
L 027 Esc
Alarm - ATDE
Unit Non-equipped
Microwave Networks
CM System Users Manual Page B-19
028 - TXU Alarm Screen Screen Elements
Module Status indicates whether the transmitter is operating normally (Normal) or is in alarm (Alarm.)
Service Status shows absent, standby, in-service. Absent means the module is required but not installed or an SP fuse is blown. Standby means the module is present but not in service. In-Svc means the module is carrying traffic.
Switch Confirm shows when the MUX fails to respond to a switch command on protected systems.
APC Confirm indicates the TXU failed to respond to an automatic power control command.
LO indicates the operational status of the synthesized local oscillator in the TXU. An alarm condition is reported if:
1. There is insufficient drive level to the mixer in the conver-sion section of the TXU or,
2. The microwave oscillator is not phase-locked to the internal reference.
Tx ALC indicates the operational status of the ALC (automatic level control) circuitry in the conversion section of the TXU.
Tx AGC indicates the operational status of the AGC (automatic gain control) circuitry in the power amplifier section of the TXU.
Tx Power Level indicates a low RF output (or loss of signal) from the TXU.
Fan shows the operational status of the RFU chassis fan.
PLL shows the operational status of the phase-locked loop.
Note: For non-protected radios, B side TXU alarms are not displayed.
,
$7
! "#&'( )(( )
+%
,
$7
$4& 8
% &
,
$7
$4& 8 %9
%6'&
Appendix B QuikLink
Page B-20 CM System Users Manual
029 - RXU Alarm Screen Screen Elements
Module Status indicates whether the receiver is operating normally (Normal) or is in alarm (Alarm.)
Service Status shows absent, standby, in-service. Absent means the module not installed or an SP fuse is blown. Standby means the module is not in service. In-Svc means the module is carrying traffic.
LO indicates the operational status of the synthesized local oscillator in the RXU. An alarm occurs if either:
1. There is insufficient drive level to the mixer in the conversion section of the RXU.
2. The microwave oscillator is not phase-locked to the internal reference.
AGC indicates the operational status of the automatic gain control circuitry of the receiver IF amplifier.
Preamplifier shows the condition of the preamp (if used.)
Regulated Voltage shows condition of the low noise amplifier section of the RXU.
Note: For non-protected radios, B side RXU alarms are not displayed.
(&!+!
+-67 .!.!
!,.+,#-+-+. &.+,#8'. &.+'!9%:#-+-+ ;#-+-+,+!+#-+-+
%$&
Microwave Networks
CM System Users Manual Page B-21
030 - OWU Alarm Screen
Screen Elements
Module Status indicates whether the module is operating normally (Normal) or is in alarm (Alarm.)
Service Status shows absent, standby, in-service. Absent means the module not installed or an SP fuse is blown. Standby means the module is not in service. In-Svc means the module is carrying traffic.
The OWU is always in-service when present. The second screen shows for radios not equipped with an OWU.
031 - SP PSU Alarm Screen
Screen Elements
Module Status indicates whether the module is operating normally (Normal) or is in alarm (Alarm.)
Service Status shows absent, standby, in-service. Absent means the module not installed or an SP fuse is blown. Standby means the module is not in service. In-Svc means the module is supplying DC to the SP shelf and modules.
Supply Status indicates a fault on the DC primary side of the PSU. (This may also indicate a blown fuse.)
Note: For non-protected radios, B side SP PSU alarms are not displayed.
L 030 Esc
Alarm - OWU
Module Status: Normal Service Status: In-Svc
L 030 Esc
Alarm - OWU
Unit Non-equipped
L 031 Esc
Alarm - SP PSU A Side B Side
Module Status: Normal Normal Service Status: In-Svc Standby Supply Status: Normal Normal
Appendix B QuikLink
Page B-22 CM System Users Manual
032 - RF PSU Alarm Screen
Screen Elements
Module Status indicates whether the module is operating normally (Normal) or is in alarm (Alarm.)
Service Status shows absent, standby, in-service. Absent means the module not installed or an SP fuse is blown. Standby means the module is not in service. In-Svc means the module is supplying DC to the RF shelf and modules.
Supply Status indicates a fault on the DC primary side of the PSU. (This may also indicate a blown fuse.)
Note: For non-protected radios, B side RF PSU alarms are not displayed.
033 - WTU Alarm Screen
Screen Elements
Module Status indicates whether the module is operating normally (Normal) or is in alarm (Alarm.)
Service Status shows absent, standby, in-service. Absent means the module is required but not installed or an SP fuse is blown. Standby means the module is present but not in service. In-Svc means the module is carrying traffic.
Switch Confirm shows when the MUX fails to respond to a switch command on protected systems.
Ch Input LOS indicates a loss of signal for the digital line input to the WTU.
The second screen shows for radios not equipped with a WTU.
Note: B side WTU alarms do not display in non-protected ra-dios.
%&(7(<'
+-0(.7 .!.!
!,.+,#-+-+. &.+,#8'. &8'. &.,.+,#-+-+
%&(7
+-0(.7 .!.!
+#-+-+34.,#-+-+"4.,#-+-+
(+
L 033 Esc
Alarm - WTU A Side B Side
Module Status: Normal Normal Service Status: In-Svc Standby Switch Confirm: Normal Normal Ch.Input LOS: Normal Normal
L 033 Esc
Alarm - WTU
Unit Non-equipped
Microwave Networks
CM System Users Manual Page B-23
034 - SCE Alarm Screen
Screen Elements
Unit Status shows the status of the SCE unit. In-Svc shows that the unit is communicating with the ACU. Absent means the unit is NOT communicating with the ACU.
The second screen shows for radios not equipped with an SCE unit.
035 - Alarm Summary Screen
Screen Elements
This screen summarizes the alarms for all modules in a system.
A indicates an A-side alarm.
B indicates a B-side alarm.
AB indicates an alarm on both A and B sides.
X indicates an alarm on a module without redundant units such as OWU, ACU, SYSTEM and SCE.
L 034 Esc
Alarm - SCE
Unit Status: In Service
L 034 Esc
Alarm - SCE
Unit Non-equipped
L 035 Esc
Alarm - Alarm Summary
SYNDES( ) TXU (A ) SPPSU( ) MUX ( B) RXU ( ) RFPSU( ) DEMOD ( ) SCU ( ) ATDE (AB) MOD ( ) OWU ( ) WTU ( ) SYSTEM(X ) SCE ( )
Appendix B QuikLink
Page B-24 CM System Users Manual
036 - System Alarms Screen
Screen Elements
BER Major is an error rate greater than 10-3 errors per second.
BER Minor is an error rate greater than 10-9 errors per second.
Tx HIGH APC indicates that APC is off, but should be on.
Remote Communication shows a failure in the overhead communications channel between the local and remote radio ACU.
If APC option is disabled, the Tx High APC field shows “– – – – –”.
For 7/8 GHz radio configurations, the Tx High APC field shows “– – – – –”.
The second page describes problems between modules and remote units.
Note: For non-protected radios, B side alarms are presented as “– – – – –”.
037 - System LED Status Screen
Screen Elements
Normal LED indicates that the summary status alarms are not needed.
Major LED alarm indicates a service-affecting condition of an on-line unit that is in alarm.
Minor LED alarm indicates a non service-affecting alarm.
Manual LED alarm indicates that a switch plane has been left in a locked (manual) condition. Manual LED on the access panel flashes when a loopback is on.
Section Fail indicates a remote radio Major Alarm.
L 036 Esc PgUp PgDn
Alarm - System Alarms
BER (A Side): Major BER (B Side): Minor Tx High APC: Alarm Remote Communication: Normal
Alarm - System Alarms
TXU: APC option not the same at remote site. SCU: Remote end SCU is not present. Sys: Remote node does not have the same protection as local.L 036 Esc PgUp PgDn O
/0
#->-88 -88 !?!; 8-88
Microwave Networks
CM System Users Manual Page B-25
038 - Alarm Log Menu
Menu Selections
Select 1 to view the Alarm Log.
Select 2 to clear the Alarm Log. The date and time of the last clear displays next to the menu item.
Select 3 to print the Alarm Log. If a printer is hooked up to the radio, the alarm log prints.
If you are using a PC and you wish to transfer the alarm log information to a spreadsheet program, you must first capture the information using the appropriate commands in your communications software, then convert it to the spreadsheet program.
039 - Alarm Log Screen
This screen displays a chronological list of alarms and events.
The first column indicates the event number, starting at 00000, since the last ACU reset. The last 512 events are stored here for one year.
The second column shows the date on which the alarm occurred (YYYY-MM-DD).
The third column indicates the time at which the alarm occurred.
The fourth column indicates the severity of the alarm:
M = Major alarmm = Minor alarmE = EventThe fifth column indicates the alarm code. Refer to Appendix D for a list of all alarm codes in numerical order.
The sixth column indicates the status of the event (C - Clear, or S - Set).
Note: For Alarm Codes 119, 120, 121, and 166, C means Failed Switch, and S means Successful Switch.
The seventh column indicates where the alarm occurred.
SYS = SystemRX = ReceiverTX = TransmitterRFP = RF Power SupplySYN = Synthesizer/DesynthesizerMUX = Multiplexer/DemultiplexerDEM = DemodulatorATD = Automatic Time-Delay EqualizerMOD = ModulatorSCU = Service Channel UnitSPP = SP Power SupplyOWU = OrderwireThe eighth column indicates which radio is affected: A or B, and L, R, c, r, or N.
L 038 Esc Select_
Alarm - Report
>1. View Alarm Log 2. Clear Alarm Log[93-11-10 09:00] 3. Print Alarm Log
L 039 Esc PgUp PgDn
Alarm - Report >Bottom Top00060 1999-01-08 06:55:11 E 069 S MUX A00061 1999-01-09 08:00:23 m 069 S DEM B00062 1999-01-09 18:34:12 m 073 S MUX B00063 1999-01-09 22:02:42 E 119 S SYN B00064 1999-01-10 12:38:33 M 116 C MUX B00065 1999-01-10 13:34:56 m 073 S MUX A
Appendix B QuikLink
Page B-26 CM System Users Manual
040 - TX and RX Path Status
This screen displays the on-line modules in the transmit and receive paths.
Note: The letter in the parenthesis indicates the on-line side (A or B) of a redundancy protected system. “?” indicates an un-known module is on-line; typically caused by a hardware fail-ure in the path.
This screen is not used in non-protected systems.G
050 - System Configuration Menu
Menu Selections
Select 1 for Module Parameters.
Select 2 for AIS options.
Select 3 for TX power output calibration.
Select 4 for Date and Time menu.
Select 5 Line Lengths/Coding menu (28 DS1, only.)
L 040 Esc
Status - Tx and Rx Path
Tx: SYNDES-MUX(B) -> MOD/TXU(A) SCU(B) WTU(A)Rx: SYNDES-MUX(A) <- DEMOD/RXU(?) SCU(A) WTU(B)
L 050 Esc Select _
Config - SYSTEM1. Module Parameters2. AIS Option3. Calibrate Tx Power4. Date & Time5. Line Length/Format
Microwave Networks
CM System Users Manual Page B-27
051 - System/Module Parameters Screen This screen covers options defined by the SP shelf backplane connections and by the setting of switch S3 on the ACU. (See Chapter 3).
NMU version indicates the firmware level of the Network Management System. NMU version only displays when the radio has the NMU option.
Frequency Band may be one of 2, 6, 7/8, 10, or 11 GHz.
Capacity may be one of4DS1 - 16QAM8DS1 - 128QAMDS3 + 1 DS1 - 64QAM4DS1s - 8QAM4DS1s - 64QAM12 DS1s - 128QAM28DS1 - 64QAM3DS3 - 64QAMSONET/SDH - 128QAM (see 155-Mbps manual)100BaseT - 128QAM (see 100Base-t manual)
Tx/Rx Protection may be one of:Hot StandbySpace DiversityFreq DiversityUnprotected
Battery may be 48 or 24-volt. If optional modules are programmed, but not present, the Minor alarm LED on the access panel lights.
APC may be Enabled, Disabled, or forced active indefinitely (Forever; see Chapter 2–Automatic Power Control). Not available on Telestar radios.
SCU may be:Non-EquippedNon-Protected/AbsentNon-Protected/NarrowbandProtected/Both AbsentProtected/Narrowband
ATDE may be Equipped or Non-equipped. 3DS3 DEMOD has an integral ATDE.
OWU may be Non-equipped, Equipped / No. xxx, Equipped Absent.
SCE may be Equipped or Non-equipped.
Page 4 shows the equipped DS1 SYNDES and DS3 WTU channels.
Telestar 7-GHz Radio
Page 4 shows the equipped low noise amplifier and Tx power option.
.+
( )#59 %9@@@@@8A* ++;6B(#-$56$4 6 "#%4 6 "##2,9
.+
( )#5(- "58 -C$ A( $A-CA50(A
.+
( )#5A(' AA-
.+
( )#5C$A('
+A A AA
2('
2C$('
.+
( )#5&A A$4&- 6'
2$0;6B
.+
( )#5
$7&- 6
/
Appendix B QuikLink
Page B-28 CM System Users Manual
052 - AIS Options Screen
This screen allows you to program the SYNDES Rx to output AIS if the BER exceeds 10-3. When the AIS feature is disabled, the screen displays NO.
Note: For non-protected radios, B side setting is not displayed.
053 -Tx Output Power Calibration Screen
The CM radios do not require calibration.
Follow alignment procedure outlined in Chapter 5, Transmitter Output Power and Monitor, to calibrate Tx Power Output. Enter the set value into these configuration screens.
Note: If a power amplifier is turned off, or APC H is on, the display will show no reading, regardless of the configuration.
To calibrate the off-line TXU, select item 3, then press Enter. A warning message, [WARNING: Disconnect Off-line TXU First!], displays.
. '
( )!-
!&' %D+/ED-
( )("$4&-
"
./
(
Microwave Networks
CM System Users Manual Page B-29
CAUTION!Ensure the off-line TXU, A or B, is physically
disconnected from the RF Distribution section.
Primary path data will be lost if the off-line TXU is not disconnected from the signal path.
Once the off-line TXU is disconnected from the signal path, press <Enter>.
A message is displayed: “[Is Off-line TX disconnected? (1=Yes)” Verify that the off-line TXU is disconnected, enter 1, and press Enter. The off-line power amplifier will turn ON for five minutes.
A message “[Hit Any Key to recover. 5 Min. Left]” displays. Press any key to terminate the power amplifier time-out period, and clear the display.
Note: This function is only available on local maintenance screens, and not available to remote users.
054 - Date and Time Menu
This menu allows you to change the date and time. If the radios are communicating over the link, changing the date/time at the local (near-end) radio will also change the date/time of the remote (far-end) radio to the same date/time.
L 054 Esc Enter: 1997-10-31 00:00
Config - Date and Time
Date[yyyy-mm-dd]: 1997-10-31 Time[hh:mm:ss] : 00:00:00
Appendix B QuikLink
Page B-30 CM System Users Manual
057 - 28DS1 SYNDES Configuration Screen Use Screen 057 to set each channel line length or to set the channel as unequipped. Also set line coding for each of the 28 channels.
From the line length configuration screen press PAGE UP/DOWN to display the channel you want, and the press ENTER.
The screen prompts for a channel to configure. Enter a channel number (99 for all) and press ENTER.
The line length screen for your channel opens. Select the number of the appropriate length and press ENTER.
Set line coding for each channel the same way.
For more information about configuring the SYNDES see Section 3-11.
Microwave Networks
CM System Users Manual Page B-31
070 - Control and Maintenance Menu
Menu Selections
Item 1 sets path switching on the TXU-MOD, RXU-DEMOD, MUX-SYNDES, SCU, and WTU switch planes to on or off, and lock (manual) or automatic.
Item 2 sets loopback for IF (baseband on Telestar radios,) MUX, SYNDES, SCU, WTU, and clears all loopbacks.
Item 3 toggles APC on or off manually, or sets APC to automatic.
Item 4 toggles power amplifiers on or off.
Item 5 sets the monitor and controls for the ACU/NMU external TTL and relay inputs and outputs.
Note: Items 1 and 2 are not used on non-protected systems.
071 - Path Switching Screen
This screen displays the current Tx/Rx on-line status and allows setting of TX and RX path switching.
Enter toggles between the A and B side radio, Auto, and Lock switching modes.
If alarms are outstanding on desired on-line modules, the next screen will be the Forced Switching menu.
Auto selects the switching mode to function under radio control. Under automatic radio control the ACU monitors alarm conditions of the radio and determines optimum on-line module selection.
Lock maintains the current TX/RX selection on-line. The ACU continues to monitor radio alarm conditions without initiating switch selections. A lock switch selection is maintained until modified by an automatic switch selection.
Path switching is unavailable for non-protected systems, which the screen indicates.
0@
( D+*'&' *"</*(2*&).*$$!5-F%#
0+ ('
('&' $7%7$7-D%7-7<<(<<C$<G%#H+IJIKE
0+ '
('&' $7%7$7-%7-7D<(<C$<<
0+
('&'
"
6 "# # H66 6K( )
8A # #H88K( )
HK( )
Appendix B QuikLink
Page B-32 CM System Users Manual
073 - TTL and Relay I/O Status Screens TTL I/O Status
This screen shows radio TTL input status and output control points.
Point indicates the four (NMU not equipped) or eight (NMU equipped) TTL input points available for external connection.
Input Status displays the specific TTL logic value of individual input points.
Output Control displays the specific logic value of individual TTL output control points (0 = Off, 1 = On).
Note: This screen is not available on radios not equipped with an NMU.
Relay I/O Status
This screen shows radio output control points status. Page 2 shows output control points status and allows the setting of individual relay output control points
Point indicates the four relay control points available for external connection.
Output Control displays the specific logic value of individual relay output control points (0 = Off, 1 = On).
Remote TTL In displays the status of the relay output control point links to the cross hop TTL input. This line displays the remote TTL input point number if the relay control point links to a remote input, or displays No if it doesn’t link to remote TTL input.
Output Relay output setting. Rmt - remote control: On - local set on, Off - local set off.
Ctrl - TTL I/O
Point: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Input Status: 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 Output Control: 1 0 1 0
[Press Enter to Change Output ]L 073 Esc PgUp PgDn o
Page 1: TTL I/O Status for NMU Equipped Radio
Ctrl - TTL I/O
Point: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Input Status: 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 Output Control: 1 0 1 0
[ Output: 1 0 1 0 ]L 073 Esc o
Page 1: Relay I/O Status
Ctrl - Relays
Point: 1 2 3 4 Output Control: On Off Off Off Remote TTL In: 5 6 No No
[Press Enter to Change Output ]L 073 Esc PgUp PgDn
Ctrl - Relays
Point: 1 2 3 4 Output Control: On On Off Off Remote TTL In: 5 6 No No
[ Output: Rmt Rmt On Off ]L 073 Esc Up Dn L R <Enter>
Page 2: TTL I/O Status for NMU Equipped Radio
Page 2: Relay I/O Status
Microwave Networks
CM System Users Manual Page B-33
081 - Loopback Monitoring Screen
Screen Selections
Select 1 for IF (baseband for 7-GHz Telestar) local loopback.
Select 2 for MUX local loopback.
Select 3 for SYNDES loopback.
Select 4 for SCU loopback.
Select 5 for WTU loopback.
Select 6 to clear all loopbacks.
Note: The status is the summary of all the loopback states of the module. If a module is not present in the radio, “-----” is displayed.
082 - IF/Baseband Loopback Screen
This screen allows you to turn the IF or baseband loopback on or off for the A and B radios.
Notes: For non-protected radios, side B loopback is not dis-played. For remote user request, “Not Allowed to Change” message is displayed.
Note: The ACU software does not support IF loopback on ra-dio with 3DS3 or higher capacity.
Establish IF loopback using an external 50-ohm cable (P/N 3085397H01). Connect the cable between Mod and Demod MCX connectors.
To perform the IF loopback procedure, refer to IF Local Loop-back in Chapter 2.
,++
("<#
D+*-882*(-88*7-.*C$-88/*-881*(
, ('
("<L!8D
"<D-88-88G#H+IJIKE
(2,+%
Appendix B QuikLink
Page B-34 CM System Users Manual
083 - MUX Loopback Screen
This screen allows you to turn the MUX loopback on or off for the A and B radios.
Notes: For non-protected radios, side B loopback is not displayed.For remote user request, “Not Allowed to Change” message is displayed.
084 - SYNDES Loopback Screen
This screen allows you to turn the SYNDES loopback on or off for the local and remote radios.
To change the loopback status of the local or remote radio, select the appropriate radio with the Left or Right Arrow key, and press Enter. The Local-Lpbk status indication will toggle between “OFF” and “ON”.
To enable or disable 28DS1 Monitoring, and specify channel selection, use the Left or Right Arrow key to choose Monitoring for the local or remote unit, and press Enter.
“[Enter Channel Number, 0 = off: 00]” message is displayed. Enter channel number to be monitored (01...12) and press the Enter key to enable the monitoring function. If you would like to monitor all channels at once, enter 99, and ALL will be displayed for the channel entry.
Note: For non-protected radios, B side and remote loopback is not displayed.
Note: The Ctrl-Loopback screen now indicates which side/channel is “Online” and which is “Off”.
Note: 3DS3 Screens are on the following page.
%&'&+'+
%9+&=>76?
%&+%9+&= .!.!?:00:00@ ,.,ABCA2
%&'+'.+
%9+&=>.B<.?
%&+-:''.B<.:00?:00@'&+'',-9CA))C$$A+'#
1
Microwave Networks
CM System Users Manual Page B-35
084 - 3DS3-100BaseT SYNDES Loopback Screen
This screen allows you to turn the SYNDES loopback on or off for the local and remote 3DS3 radios.
To change the loopback status of the local or remote radio, select the appropriate radio with the left or right Arrow key, and press Enter.
Enter channel number to monitor (1-3) and press the Enter key to enable the monitoring function. To monitor all channels at once, enter 99, and ALL will display instead of the channel number.
The third screen displays a Remote Loopback.
085 - SCU Loopback Screen
This screen allows you to set side A or B SCU local and remote loopback On or Off.
Notes: For non-protected radios, side B loopback is not dis-played. If your radio is not equipped with a SCU, the screen displays a message to that effect.
086 - WTU Loopback Screen
This screen is available due to the presence of optional equipment. It allows you to set side A or B WTU local and remote loopback On or Off.
Notes: For non-protected radios, side B loopback is not dis-played. If your radio is not equipped with a WTU, the screen displays a message to that effect.
,2 '
("<LD
%- -88D-88
,2 '
("<LD
%- D-('*+
,2 '
("<LD
%- D=%D-ML=
//
-$56F+$
,2 '
("<LD
%
-88-88
%&'&+'+
%9+&=>.7?
%&+%9=-%9= <+ '+?:00:00:00:00@ ,.,ABCA2
%"&'&+'+
%9+&=>D/7?%&+%9=- %9=<.4#:00?:00:<++4#:00:00:00@ ,.,ABCA2
Appendix B QuikLink
Page B-36 CM System Users Manual
087 - APC Option Menu
This menu allows you to turn APC Off or On for both the A and B radios.
This menu is not available for Telestar 7/8 GHz radios.
CAUTION: Entering 99 will cause the radio to maintain its current status permanently. Before entering 99, make sure you want to maintain the current status of APC ON
or APC OFF permanently.
For non-protected radios, there is no B-side APC control.
Menu Selections
Select 1 for APC on manual mode: APC ON.
Select 2 for APC off manual mode: APC OFF.
Select 3 for APC auto mode.
088 - Power Amplifier Control Screen
This screen allows you to toggle the power amplifier on or off.
This function is not available on CM radios.
Note: For non-protected radios, side B power amp control is not available. Remote users (R or r) cannot turn both amplifi-ers off to ensure the RF path is not shut down.
,0+
(( -88$-D+* $ (-* $ (-88/*% $$-
((
-$!(
,0
C'("J( " (-$-C% "
C'( " (-$-C%"
,, '
(&)
D--
(&)
&$$ -88
,, '
$05,;6B%
$%-
Microwave Networks
CM System User’s Manual Page B-37
Appendix B QuikLink
Page B-38 CM System User’s Manual
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page C-1
1.0 IntroductionUse the following tables to verify the configuration of your radio. Mark current settings as a checklist and configuration record. The tables are also found in the individual sections of Chapter 3 that detail radio modules.
Table C-A. 8209302-00 Access Panel Configuration Settings ............................C-2Table C-B. MGN8112 Access Panel Configuration Settings ..............................C-2Table C-C. SP Backplane Jumper Settings ..........................................................C-3Table C-D. TXU IF BPF/LO Board Jumper Settings ..........................................C-3Table C-E. RXU Control Board MLN7905A Jumper Settings ...........................C-4Table C-F. ACU Jumper Settings ........................................................................C-4Table C-G. ACU DIP Switch Settings .................................................................C-5Table C-H. MOD 8000514-00 Configuration Settings (SONET/SDH) ..............C-5Table C-I. DEMOD 8000515-00 Configuration Settings (SONET/SDH) .........C-6Table C-J. MUX 8000513-00 Configuration Settings (SONET/SDH) ..............C-6Table C-K. SYNDES 8000516-00 Configuration Settings (SONET/SDH) ........C-6Table C-L. SCU Jumper Settings.........................................................................C-6Table C-M. SCU Switch S1 (CH1) and S2 (CH2) Settings..................................C-6Table C-N. OWU Jumper Settings.......................................................................C-7Table C-O. OWU Switch Settings........................................................................C-8Table C-P. MLN7330 WTU Jumper Settings .....................................................C-8Table C-Q. MLN7330 WTU Switch Settings ......................................................C-8Table C-R. 8000608-00 WTU Equalizer Control / Line Length Settings ...........C-8Table C-S. 8000608-00 WTU Line Code Select Settings ...................................C-9Table C-T. MLN7329 (E1) Jumper Settings .......................................................C-9Table C-U. MLN7329 (E1) WTU Switch Settings ..............................................C-9Table C-W. NMU Switch S1 Settings.................................................................C-10Table C-X. NMU Switch S2 Settings.................................................................C-10Table C-V. NMU Jumper Settings .....................................................................C-10
Appendix CConfiguration Tables
Appendix C Configuration Tables
Page C-2 5/12/04 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
Table C-A. 8209302-00 Access Panel Configuration Settings
SWITCH 1DS3 3DS3 28DS1100BaseT
+ 1DS3SONET
ElectricalSONETOptical
S3-1 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS3-2 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFFS3-3 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS3-4 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS3-5 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFFS3-6 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS3-7 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFFS3-8 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS4-1 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS4-2 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFFS4-3 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS4-4 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFFS4-5 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFFS4-6 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFFS4-7 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFFS4-8 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFFS5-1 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFFS5-2 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS5-3 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFFS5-4 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS5-5 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFFS5-6 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFFS6 P1 P2 P2 P1 P2 P2
Table C-B. MGN8112 Access Panel Configuration Settings
(DS1, DS1N)
Rocker Setting Function Rocker Setting Function
1 On DS1 line 1 unequipped 15 On DS1 line 15 unequippedOff DS1 line 1 equipped Off DS1 line 15 equipped
2 On DS1 line 2 unequipped 16 On DS1 line 16 unequippedOff DS1 line 2 equipped Off DS1 line 16 equipped
3 On DS1 line 3 unequipped 17 On DS1 line 17 unequippedOff DS1 line 3 equipped Off DS1 line 17 equipped
4 On DS1 line 4 unequipped 18 On DS1 line 18 unequippedOff DS1 line 4 equipped Off DS1 line 18 equipped
5 On DS1 line 5 unequipped 19 On DS1 line 19 unequippedOff DS1 line 5 equipped Off DS1 line 19 equipped
6 On DS1 line 6 unequipped 20 On DS1 line 20 unequippedOff DS1 line 6 equipped Off DS1 line 20 equipped
7 On DS1 line 7 unequipped 21 On DS1 line 21 unequippedOff DS1 line 7 equipped Off DS1 line 21 equipped
8 On DS1 line 8 unequipped 22 On DS1 line 22 unequippedOff DS1 line 8 equipped Off DS1 line 22 equipped
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page C-3
*Select only one jumper according to desired channel capacity.
9 On DS1 line 9 unequipped 23 On DS1 line 23 unequippedOff DS1 line 9 equipped Off DS1 line 23 equipped
10 On DS1 line 10 unequipped 24 On DS1 line 24 unequippedOff DS1 line 10 equipped Off DS1 line 24 equipped
11 On DS1 line 11 unequipped 25 On DS1 line 25 unequippedOff DS1 line 11 equipped Off DS1 line 25 equipped
12 On DS1 line 12 unequipped 26 On DS1 line 26 unequippedOff DS1 line 12 equipped Off DS1 line 26 equipped
13 On DS1 line 13 unequipped 27 On DS1 line 27 unequippedOff DS1 line 13 equipped Off DS1 line 27 equipped
14 On DS1 line 14 unequipped 28 On DS1 line 28 unequippedOff DS1 line 14 equipped Off DS1 line 28 equipped
28DS1, DS3, 3DS3, and SONET/SDH (MGN8112B)Jumpers on the rear of the access panel
Jumper SettingE1, E2 1-2 = 1DS3 SYNDES
2-3 = 3DS3 SYNDES
Jumper blocks on Network Bridge Interface (MLN8098B) Module
East West Port ConfigurationE4 (in) E10(in) ACU/NMU—Master/SlaveE5 E12 East/West—Omni-directional
Table C-C. SP Backplane Jumper Settings
Jumper Setting Function
E1 Strapped Enables Terminal operation E4 Strapped* Enables 4 DS1/4DS1N (8/16 QAM) operationE5 Strapped* Enables 8 DS1 (32 QAM) operationE6 Strapped* Enables 12 DS1/8DS1N (128 QAM) operationE7 Strapped* Enables 28DS1/1DS3/3DS3 (64 QAM) operationE2, 3, 8, 9, 10, 17 Not used
Table C-D. TXU IF BPF/LO Board Jumper Settings
T/R Spacing SP/HP DHP E6 E5 E4
119 MHz MLN8175 MLN8275 1-2126 MHz MLN8175 MLN8275 2-3150 MHz MLN8110 MLN8210 1-2 1-2 1-2151,614 MHz MLN8110 MLN8210 1-2 1-2 2-3154 MHz MLN8110 MLN8210 1-2 2-3 2-3160 MHz MLN8110 MLN8210 2-3 1-2 1-2161 MHz MLN8110 MLN8210 2-3 1-2 2-3168 MHz MLN8108 MLN8209 1-2
Table C-B. MGN8112 Access Panel Configuration Settings(Continued)
(DS1, DS1N)
Rocker Setting Function Rocker Setting Function
Appendix C Configuration Tables
Page C-4 5/12/04 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
175 MHz MLN8108 MLN8208 1-2 1-2182 MHz MLN8108 MLN8208 2-3 2-3196 MHz MLN8107 MLN8207 1-2245 MHz MLN8106 MLN8206 1-2 1-2266 MHz MLN8106 MLN8206 2-3 2-3300 MHZ MLN8176 MLN8276 1-2 1-2305.56 MHz MLN8176 MLN8276 2-3 2-3311.32 MHz MLN8176 MLN8276 1-2 1-2
Table C-E. RXU Control Board MLN7905A Jumper SettingsJumper Setting Label Function
E1 1-2 RF<LO2-3 RF>LO
Sideband Option Sets unit for upper or lower sideband. Depends on bandwidth option.
E2 2-3 AUTO MAN/AUTO Factory test and adjustment.E3, E4 2-3 1DS1/DS3 (10 MHz)
1-2 3DS3 (30 MHz)Bandwidth Option Sets appropriate channel bandwidth
for system capacity.
Table C-F. ACU Jumper Settings
Jumper Setting Function
E1 1-2 Normal operation2-3 Factory test
E2 1-2 Normal operation2-3 Factory test
E3 1-2 Normal operation2-3 Factory test
E4 1-2 ACO disables audible and visual2-3 ACO disables audible only
E5 1-2 ACU fail causes minor alarm only2-3 ACU fail causes major and minor alarm
E6 1-2 4-Port NMU (NMU Revision C or later)2-3 Normal NMU (NMU Revision A or B)
Table C-D. TXU IF BPF/LO Board Jumper Settings
T/R Spacing SP/HP DHP E6 E5 E4
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page C-5
Table C-G. ACU DIP Switch Settings
Switch Rocker Setting Function Enabled
NOTE: Switches can be marked OPEN or DOWN. OPEN/DOWN is OFF as labeled.S2 1 Closed Service channel not equipped
Open Service channel equipped2 Closed Service channel non-protected
Open Service channel protected3 Closed WTU non-protected
Open WTU protected4 Closed ATDE not equipped
Open ATDE equipped5 Closed Orderwire not equipped
Open Orderwire equipped6 Closed WTU not equipped
Open WTU equipped7 Closed
*OpenAPC On at Power Up – DisabledAPC ON at Power Up – Enable
8 Closed Status & Control Extender not equippedOpen Status & Control Extender equipped
S3 1, 2, 3 Closed, Closed, Closed TX/RX Hot StandbyClosed, Closed, Open TX Hot Standby; RX Space DiversityClosed, Open, Closed TX/RX Space DiversityClosed, Open, Open TX/RX Non-protectedOpen, Closed, Closed TX Non-protected; RX Space DiversityOpen, Closed, Open TX/RX Frequency Diversity
4, 5 Closed, Closed 2 GHzClosed, Open 6 and 11 GHz (CM)Open, Closed 10 GHzOpen, Open 7/8 GHz
6,7 Closed, Closed 48 Vdc batteryOpen, Closed 24 Vdc battery
8 Closed APC option enabledOpen APC option disabled
* Set S3, 8 to Closed to work. With current radio firmware: Manual LED will not light. Screen 087 (Appendix B) is disabled.
Table C-H. MOD 8000514-00 Configuration Settings (SONET/SDH)Jumper Setting Function Enabled
E1 Open For factory testsE2 Not a jumper I Base Band Out connectorE3 Not a jumper Q Base Band Out connectorE4 Not a jumper 70-MHz Monitor connectorE5 Not a jumper Clk OUT connectorE6 Open For factory testE7 Installed Connects Q DAC to Base Band filterE8 Open For factory testE9 Installed Connects I DAC to Base Band filter
Appendix C Configuration Tables
Page C-6 5/12/04 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
Table C-I. DEMOD 8000515-00 Configuration Settings (SONET/SDH)
Jumper/Switch Setting Function
JP8 1-2 Normal operationS1-1 OFFS1-2 OFFS1-3 ONS1-4 OFF
Table C-J. MUX 8000513-00 Configuration Settings (SONET/SDH)
Jumper Setting Function Enabled
JP4 1-2 FEC Enable—Normal operation2-3 FEC Disable
Table C-K. SYNDES 8000516-00 Configuration Settings (SONET/SDH)
Jumper Setting Function
JP2 1-2 Optical operation2-3 Electrical operation
JP3 1-2 Channel equipped (normal operation)2-3 Channel un-equipped (Disable RX Alarm)
Table C-L. SCU Jumper Settings
Jumper Setting Function Enabled
J1 1-2 High gain (23 dB) on VF Channel 2, -16 dBm input, +7 dBm output2-3 Low gain (0 dB) on VF Channel 2, -3.5 dBm input, -3.5 dBm output
J2 1-2 High gain (23 dB) on VF Channel 1, -16 dBm input, +7 dBm output2-3 Low gain (0 dB) on VF Channel 1, -3.5 dBm input, -3.5 dBm output
J4 1-2 Oscillator Test2-3 Oscillator enable
Table C-M. SCU Switch S1 (CH1) and S2 (CH2) Settings
Switch Position
SettingSwitch logic: ON=closed; OFF=open
Channel Configuration
Factory defaults in bold: Not used, Normal, 2 stop bits, 1 parity bit, 8 data bits, 9.6 kbps1 OFF Not used2 ON Bypass data channel *
OFF Normal data channel operation 3 ON 1 stop bit
OFF 2 stop bits4 ON No parity bit
OFF 1 parity bit5 ON 7 bit data
OFF 8 bit data
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page C-7
1 Select one ring duration2 Select one ring tone3 Select one ring rate4 Select one VF channel 23 gain adjust5 Select one VF channel 13 gain adjust6 Select one AUX out enable7 Select one handset out enable8 Select one AUX output level
6, 7, 8 ON, ON, ON 19.2 kbps data rateON, ON, OFF 9.6 kbps data rateON, OFF, ON 4.8 kbps data rateON, OFF, OFF 2.4 kbps data rateOFF, ON, ON 1.2 kbps data rateOFF, ON, OFF 0.6 kbps data rateOFF, OFF, ON 0.3 kbps data rateOFF, OFF, OFF 0.15 kbps data rate
* Bypass mode lets the SCU automatically adjust to the pattern and format of incoming data, but is not recommended for use above 2.4 kbps. In Normal operation SCU DIP-switch settings must match the pattern and format of incoming data.
Table C-N. OWU Jumper Settings
Jumper Setting Function Enabled
E1 1-2 Factory settingJ1 1-2 Not used
3-4 Ring duration 4 seconds1
5-6 Ring duration 8 seconds1
7-8 Ring duration continuous1
9-10 Ring tone 2.5 KHz2
11-12 Ring tone 2.0 KHz2
13-14 Ring rate 2.2 Hz3
15-16 Ring rate 5.5 Hz3
17-18 VF channel 23 gain adjust (-3.5 dB In; -3.5 dB Out)4
19-20 VF channel 23 gain adjust (-16 dB In; +7 dB Out)4
21-22 VF channel 13 gain adjust (-3.5 dB In; -3.5 dB Out)5
23-24 VF channel 13 gain adjust (-16 dB In; +7 dB Out)5
25-26 AUX out enable on-hook (controlled by off-hook switch)6
27-28 AUX out enable continuous (AUX output always On)6
29-30 Handset out enable off-hook (controlled by off-hook switch)7
31-32 Handset out enable continuous (speaker always On)7
33-34 AUX output level -3.5 dBm (to hook up external speaker)8
35-36 AUX output level +7 dBm (to hook up external speaker)8
37-38 Not used39-40 Not used
Table C-M. SCU Switch S1 (CH1) and S2 (CH2) Settings
Switch Position
SettingSwitch logic: ON=closed; OFF=open
Channel Configuration
Appendix C Configuration Tables
Page C-8 5/12/04 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
BOLD SHOWS DEFAULT SETTINGS
Table C-O. OWU Switch Settings
Switch Function Enabled
K1 Sets third digit of the station IDK2 Sets second digit of the station IDK3 Sets first digit of the station ID
Table C-P. MLN7330 WTU Jumper Settings
Jumper Setting Function Enabled
E1 1-2 Normal operation1-3, 2-4, 3-4 Factory test
E3 1-2 DS1 channel equipped2-3 DS1 channel not equipped
E6 1-2 Normal operation1-3, 3-4 Factory test
E8 1-2 DS1 channel - AMI line code (not for E rate)2-3 DS1 channel - B8ZS line code (not for E rate)
E10 1-2 Asynchronous data channel receiver enabled2-3 Asynchronous data channel receiver disabled
Table C-Q. MLN7330 WTU Switch Settings
Switch Setting Function Enabled
K2 9 DS1 line buildout 1 to 131 feetA DS1 line buildout 131 to 262 feetB DS1 line buildout 262 to 393 feetC DS1 line buildout 393 to 524 feetD DS1 line buildout 524 to 655 feet
Table C-R. 8000608-00 WTU Equalizer Control / Line Length Select Settings
Line Interface Unit Equalizer Control / Line Length Select0 = OFF (OPEN) I = ON (CLOSED)
SW1-1 SW1-2 SW1-3 SW1-4DS1 / T1Function
Pulse /Line Length Gain
1 1 0 1 SHORT HAUL 0-100 FT 0.6 dB 12 dB0 0 1 1 SHORT HAUL 133 – 266 FT / 1.2 dB 12 dB1 0 1 1 SHORT HAUL 266 – 399 FT / 1.8 dB 12 dB0 1 1 1 SHORT HAUL 399 – 533 FT / 2.4 dB 12 dB1 1 1 1 SHORT HAUL 533 – 655 FT / 3.0 dB 12 dB0 0 0 0 LONG HAUL 0.0 dB PULSE 36 dB0 1 0 0 LONG HAUL -7.5 dB PULSE 36 dB0 0 1 0 LONG HAUL -15.0 dB PULSE 36 dB0 1 1 0 LONG HAUL -22.5 dB PULSE 36 dB1 0 0 0 LONG HAUL 0.0 dB PULSE 26 dB1 1 0 0 LONG HAUL -7.5 dB PULSE 26 dB1 0 1 0 LONG HAUL -15.0 dB PULSE 26 dB1 1 1 0 LONG HAUL -22.5 dB PULSE 26 dB
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 Page C-9
Table C-S. 8000608-00 WTU Line Code Select Settings
Line Code (SW1–5)
OFF (OPEN) B8ZSON (CLOSED) AMI
Table C-T. MLN7329 (E1) Jumper Settings
Jumper Setting Function Enabled
E1 1-2 Normal Operation1-3, 2-4, 3-4 Factory Test
E2, E4, & E5 1-2 E1 Channel #1 - 120 ohm2-3 E1 Channel #1 - 75 ohm
E12 2-3 E1 Channel #1 - 120 ohm1-2 E1 Channel #1 - 75 ohm
E3 1-2 E1 Channel #1 Equipped2-3 E1 Channel #1 Not Equipped
E6 1-2 Normal Operation1-3, 2-4, 3-4 Factory Test
E7 1-2 Not used2-3 Not used
E8 1-2 E1 Channel #1 - AMI Line Code2-3 E1 Channel #1 - HDB3 Line Code
E9, E11, & E15 1-2 Not used2-3 Not used
E13 2-3 Not used1-2 Not used
E10 1-2 Not used2-3 Normal operation
Table C-U. MLN7329 (E1) WTU Switch Settings
Switch Setting Function Enabled
K2 6 E1 Channel #1 UnequippedE E1 Channel #1 - 75 ohm impedanceF E1 Channel #1 - 120 ohm impedance
K4 6 Not usedE Not usedF Not used
Appendix C Configuration Tables
Page C-10 5/12/04 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
*Default settings
Table C-V. NMU Jumper Settings
Jumper Setting Function Enabled
E1 1-2* Oscillator enabled2-3 RTC test enabled
E2 1-2 Test enabled2-3* Com port oscillator enabled
E3 1-2* Watchdog timer enabled2-3 Watchdog timer disabled
E9 Jumper installed Normal operationE10 Jumper installed Normal operation
Table C-W. NMU Switch S1 Settings
Rocker Function Open Closed
1 Site Address 1 Added Ignored2 Site Address 2 Added Ignored3 Site Address 4 Added Ignored4 Site Address 8 Added Ignored5 Site Address 16 Added Ignored6 Site Address 32 Added Ignored7 Site Address 64 Added Ignored8 Site Address 128 Added Ignored
Table C-X. NMU Switch S2 Settings
FunctionSwitch Setting
Rocker 1 - 4 Rocker 5 Rocker 6 Rocker 7 Rocker 8
Site Master Open Closed Open Closed ClosedSlave Open Open Open Open Open4-Port Bridge* Open Open Open Open Open* On NMU part number MLN7481C only
CM System User's Manual Page D-1
1.0 IntroductionSystem software uses alarm codes to simplify alarm logging. Alarm codes identify control, event, and status information, as well as, system switching, performance measurements, and conditions at monitored points. Alarms may indicate direct hardware conditions and events, or may be summed creating a derived alarm. The alarm log screen, explained in detail in Appendix B, lists an alarm code with each alarm displayed. Table D-A lists the alarm codes in numerical order, along with corresponding alarm information for Telestar (TS) and CM radios. Not all alarms display on the alarm log screen of the local maintenance terminal (LMT).
* 2, 6, and 10 GHz Telestar radios only** 7/8 GHz Telestar radios only
Table D-A. Alarm Codes
Code Definition Type Used LMT Monitor Displays:
0 RF PSU 24 or 48 Volt Battery Minor Yes Supply Failure
1 RF +12 Volt Supply Minor Yes +12 Volt Supply
2 RF -6 Volt Supply Minor Yes -6 Volt Supply
3 TX AGC VoltageTX Frequency Code (CM, TS 7GHz only)
Minor No none
4 TX Local Oscillator Power Level *TX Frequency Code (CM, TS 7GHz only)
Minor No none
5 TX APC StatusTX Power Option Code (CM, TS 7GHz only)
Control APC Confirm none
6 TX ALC Voltage (CM, TS 7GHz only)TX Power Option Code (CM, TS 7GHz only)
Minor No none
7 TX Output Power Level Minor No none
8 TX Online Status Status Yes none
9 TX Local Oscillator PLL VoltageTX Regulated Voltage Alarm (CM, TS 7GHz)TX LO Vendor Code (TS 7GHz, see #144)
Minor No none
10 RX RSL Voltage PM Reading Yes RX Signal Level - Configuration
11 RX RSL Reference PM Reading Yes none
12
13
14
15 Regulated Voltage Alarm (CM)
16 RX Receiver PLL Voltage*IF Frequency Select (CM)
Minor No none
17 RX LO Detector Voltage*RF Loopback Test Confirm (CM)RX LNA Equipped** (TS 7GHz only)
MinorStatusStatus
No nonenoneConfiguration
18 MOD +5 Volt Supply Minor Yes +5V Supply
Appendix DAlarm Codes
Appendix D Alarm Codes
Page D-2 CM System User’s Manual
19 MOD -5 Volt Supply Minor Yes -5V Supply
20 MOD DAC I Output*MOD I FIR Alarm**
Minor YesYes
DAC I OutputI FIR Alarm
21 MOD DAC Q Output*MOD Q FIR Alarm**
Minor Yes DAC Q OutputQ FIR Alarm
22 MOD IF Level Minor Yes IF Level
23 MOD Thru/Cross Status Status Yes none
24 MOD PLL Locked (PLL out of lock) Minor Yes PLL Locked
25 MOD MUX Active (no activity from MOD) Minor Yes Input LOS
26 DEMOD VCO Stress Voltage Minor Yes VCO
27 DEMOD Quadrature Phase Minor Yes Quadrature
28 DEMOD Slope Equalizer Minor Yes Slope
29 DEMOD AGC*DEMOD AGC I**
Minor Yes AGCAGC I
30 DEMOD I Gain Minor Yes I Gain
31 DEMOD I Offset Minor Yes I Offset
32 DEMOD Q Gain Minor Yes Q Gain
33 DEMOD Q Offset Minor Yes Q Offset
34 DEMOD I Clock Minor Yes I Clock
35 DEMOD Q Clock Minor Yes Q Clock
36 DEMOD VCXO Voltage Minor Yes VCXO
37 DEMOD A/D Bit Line Stress (not TS 7GHz)DEMOD Q Eye Quality (TS 7GHz only)
Minor Yes A/D Bit Line StressQ Eye Quality
38 Demod Loopback StatusDEMOD I Eye Quality (TS 7GHz only)
StatusMinor
NoYes
noneI Eye Quality
39 DEMOD Sweep Active StatusDEMOD AGC Q**
StatusMinor
NoYes
noneAGC Q
40 DEMOD Frame Loss Minor Yes Frame Loss
41 DEMOD Supply Voltage Minor Yes Supply Voltage
42 ATDE II-2 Minor DS3/E3 None
43 ATDE QQ-2 Minor DS3/E3 None
44 ATDE II-1 Minor All Rates II-1
45 ATDE QQ-1 Minor All Rates QQ-1
46 ATDE II+1 Minor All Rates II+1
47 ATDE QQ+1 Minor All Rates QQ+1
48 ATDE II+2 Minor DS3/E3 None
49 ATDE QQ+2 Minor DS3/E3 None
50 ATDE IQ-2 Minor DS3/E3 None
51 ATDE QI-2 Minor DS3/E3 None
52 ATDE IQ-1 Minor All Rates IQ-1
53 ATDE QI-1 Minor All Rates QI-1
54 ATDE IQ+1 Minor All Rates IQ+1
55 ATDE QI+1 Minor All Rates IQ+1
56 ATDE IQ+2 Minor DS3/E3 None
57 ATDE QI+2 Minor DS3/E3 None
Table D-A. Alarm Codes (Continued)
Code Definition Type Used LMT Monitor Displays:
CM System User's Manual Page D-3
Microwave Networks
58 SP PSU 24 or 48 Volt Battery Minor Yes Battery
59 SP +5.4 Volt Supply Minor Yes +5.4V Supply
60 SP +6.0 Volt Supply Minor Yes +6.0 Volt Supply
61 SP -6.0 Volt Supply Minor Yes -6.0 Volt Supply
63 MUX PLL Fail Minor Yes Rx Failure
64 MUX Channel 9-12 Fail Minor Yes Group 3 Failure
65 MUX Channel 5-8 Fail Minor Yes Group 2 Failure
66 MUX Channel 1-4 Fail Minor Yes Group 1 Failure
67 MUX Rx 2 Input LOS Minor Yes Rx 2 Input Alarm
68 MUX Rx 1 Input LOS Minor Yes Rx 1 Input Alarm
69 MUX Rx Out of Frame Minor Yes Rx Out Of Frame
70 MUX XILINK Fail Minor Yes Hardware Failure
72 MUX Module Fail Minor Yes Hardware Failure
73 MUX Far-End ACU Alarm Status No none
74 SYN Group 3 Input LOS Minor Yes PCM Group 3 Input
75 SYN Group 2 Input LOS Minor Yes PCM Group 2 Input
76 SYN Group 1 Input LOS Minor Yes PCM Group 1 Input
77 SYN Group 3 Output Fail Minor Yes PCM Group 3 Output
78 SYN Group 2 Output Fail Minor Yes PCM Group 2 Output
79 SYN Group 1 Output Fail Minor Yes PCM Group 1 Output
80 SCU Fail Minor Yes Hardware Failure
81 RF PSU Failure Minor Yes Supply Failure
82 SP PSU Failure Minor Yes Supply Failure
84 TXU Failure Minor Yes Tx Fail
85 MUX Rx Failure Minor Yes Rx Failure
86 MUX Tx Failure Minor Yes Tx Failure
87 TXU ALC Minor Yes Tx ALC
88 TXU Power Level Minor Yes Tx Power Level
89 TXU AGC Minor Yes Tx AGC
90 TX Phase Locked Loop Alarm (CM, TS 7GHz)TXU Local Oscillator
Minor Yes LO
91 RXU FET Bias Out of Range Minor Yes Pre-Amplifier
92 RXU AGC Voltage Minor Yes AGC
93 RXU Local Oscil. Minor Yes LO
94 MOD Output LOS Minor Yes Output LOS
95 MUX Far-End MUX Alarm Status No none
96 SYN Rx Failure Minor Yes Rx Failure
97 SYN Tx Failure Minor Yes Tx Failure
98 MUX Rx 1 OOF Minor Yes RX 1 Out-Of-Frame
99 MUX Rx 2 OOF Minor Yes RX 2 Out-Of-Frame
100 MOD Input LOS Minor No none
101 OWU Failure Minor Yes Hardware Failure
102 SYNDES Card Present Minor Yes Module State
103 MUX Card Present Minor Yes Module State
104 MOD Card Present Minor Yes Module State
Table D-A. Alarm Codes (Continued)
Code Definition Type Used LMT Monitor Displays:
Appendix D Alarm Codes
Page D-4 CM System User’s Manual
105 DEMOD Card Present Minor Yes Module State
106 SCU Card Present Minor Yes Module State
107 ATDE Card Present Minor Yes Module State
108 OWU Card Present Minor Yes Module State
109 WTU Card Present Minor DS3/E3 -
110 DIU Card Present Minor No none
111 TXU Card Present Minor Yes Module State
112 RXU Card Present Minor Yes Module State
113 SP PSU Card Present Minor Yes Module State
114 RF PSU Card Present Minor Yes Module State
115 BER FEC 1E-9 Error Minor Yes BER Minor
116 BER PE 1E-3 Error Major Yes BER Major
117* TXU High APC Failure Major Yes Tx High APC
118 RXU Receive APC Failure Major Yes Rx High APC
119 Switch - Automatic -switch Syndes output Event Yes None
120 Switch - Manual Event Yes None
121 Switch - Forced Event Yes None
122 SYN Major System Rx failure (online Syndes) Major Yes System Rx Failure
123 MUX Major System Tx failure Major Yes System Tx Failure
124 MUX Output LOS Minor Yes Mux Output Alarm
125 SYN PLL Channel-1 E2 Failure Minor Yes -
126 SYN PLL Channel-2 E2 failure Minor Yes -
127 SYN AIS Channel-1 Received Status Minor Yes -
128 SYN AIS Channel-2 Received Status Minor Yes -
129 WTU Channel Input loss of signal Minor Yes Ch Input LOS
130 WTU Channel Output loss of signal Minor Yes Ch Output LOS
131 WTU Phase Lock Loop alarm Minor Yes PLL Alarm
132 WTU Elastic Store alarm Minor Yes Elastic Store
133 WTU Thru Mux I/P data activity Minor Yes Rx Activity A/B
134 WTU Cross Mux I/P data activity Minor Yes Rx Activity A/B
135 MUX DS3/E3 Input Alarm Minor Yes DS3/E3 Input Alarm
136 SYNDES Loss of DS3/E3 Input Minor Yes LOS - DS3/E3 Input
137 T3 SYNDES Clock recovery Fail - No none
138 SYNDES Bit Error Alarm Minor Yes BER Alarm
139 SYNDES DS3/E3 Rx PLL fail Minor Yes DS3/E3 Rx PLL Fail
140 SYNDES Loss of DS3/E3 Output Minor Yes LOS - DS3/E3 Output
141 RF +5 Volt Supply Minor Yes +5 Volt Supply
142 MUX Tx FIFO alarm Minor Yes MUX Output Alarm
143 Remote Communication Ch. Fail Minor Yes Rmt. Comm. Ch.
144 NMU TTL Input - Point 1TX LO Vendor Code Bit 2 (TS 7GHz only) (
EventMinor
YesNo
Point: 1, Input Statusnone
145 NMU TTL Input - Point 2 Event Yes Point: 2, Input Status
146 NMU TTL Input - Point 3 Event Yes Point: 3, Input Status
147 NMU TTL Input - Point 4 Event Yes Point: 4, Input Status
148 ACU TTL Input - Point 5 Event Yes Point: 5, Input Status
Table D-A. Alarm Codes (Continued)
Code Definition Type Used LMT Monitor Displays:
CM System User's Manual Page D-5
Microwave Networks
149 ACU TTL Input - Point 6 Event Yes Point: 6, Input Status
150 ACU TTL Input - Point 7 Event Yes Point: 7, Input Status
151 ACU TTL Input - Point 8 Event Yes Point: 8, Input Status
152 NMU TTL Output - Point 1 Event Yes Point: 1, Output Control
153 NMU TTL Output - Point 2 Event Yes Point: 2, Output Control
154 NMU TTL Output - Point 3 Event Yes Point: 3, Output Control
155 NMU TTL Output - Point 4 Event Yes Point: 4, Output Control
156 ACU Relay Output - Point 1 Event Yes Point: 1, Output Control
157 ACU Relay Output - Point 2 Event Yes Point: 2, Output Control
158 ACU Relay Output - Point 3 Event Yes Point: 3, Output Control
159 ACU Relay Output - Point 4 Event Yes Point: 4, Output Control
160 EOC Cutoff Event Yes Screen 039
161 APC Manual Event Yes Screen 039
162 APC Auto Event Yes Screen 039
163 ACU Status Failure Event Yes -
164 SM Received Radio_Fail_Cmd Event Yes -
165 BER Greater Than 0 (zero) Event Yes -
166 Reverse Channel, TXU Switch (HH,HS) Event Yes MOD-TXU Switch Alarm
166 Reverse Channel, MUX Switch (FF) Event Yes SYNDES-MUX Switch Alarm
167 SCE Communications Fail Alarm Yes Screen 034
168 Reported ACU Status/Hardware/EOC Change Event Yes -
169 RF TX Fan Alarm (CM only) Alarm Yes -
170 Fast Channel Failure
171 MAX Number of Alarms (Total) - - -
172 Loopback Minor Alarm Alarm Yes Screen 039
Table D-A. Alarm Codes (Continued)
Code Definition Type Used LMT Monitor Displays:
Appendix D Alarm Codes
Page D-6 CM System User’s Manual
CM7/8 System User’s Manual Page E-1
IntroductionThe CM7/8 Synthesized Oscillator provides the local oscillator (LO) signals for the conversion process on both the receiver and transmitter. The oscillator operates in one of eight bands. Table E-A lists the synthesizer modules and their associated frequency operating range.
Adjust the LO frequency, within each band, by setting the FREQUENCY SET dip switches S2 and S1, and the LO FREQ ADJ dip switch S3 and variable capacitor accessed from the Receiver Panel front. Refer to Chapter 3, Sections 3-3 and 3-4 for descriptions of TXU and RXU operation.
CM7 Setting SwitchesRF frequencies are from 7100 to 7780 MHz, and LO frequencies are from 7030 to 7850 MHz. To determine the receiver local oscillator (RXLO) frequency, using a Hewlett Packard Frequency Counter 5347A or equivalent, measure both the receiver and transmitter RF frequencies, and then adjust RXLO as follows: If the receiver frequency (RXRF) is less than the transmitter frequency (TXRF), set the RXLO frequency to a value 70 MHz less than the measured RXRF; if the RXRF is greater than the TXRF, set the RXLO frequency to a value 70 MHz greater than the RXRF as listed in Table E-D.
Figure E-1 shows the RXLO synthesizer FREQUENCY SET switch setting arrangement. Use Figure E-1 with the information in Tables E-B and E-C to set the synthesizer switches. Note that the areas N, A, F, and G correspond to switches S1 and S2. Also note that LO FREQ ADJ Switch S3 and the fine-frequency adjust capacitor are accessible from the Receiver Panel front. Table E-D lists the synthesizer frequencies according to their frequency bands.
Table E-A. Synthesizer Oscillator Frequency Ranges
Synthesizer Oscillator Modules Frequency Range
MLL8156A 7030 to 7235 MHz
MLL8157A 7235 to 7440 MHz
MLL8158A 7440 to 7645 MHz
MLL8159A 7645 to 7850 MHz
MLL8160A 7850 to 8030 MHz
MLL8161A 8030 to 8210 MHz
MLL8162A 8210 to 8390 MHz
MLL8163A 8390 to 8570 MHz
Appendix ESetting Frequency Switches
Appendix E Setting Frequency
Page E-2 CM7/8 System User’s Manual
Within the synthesizer oscillator module frequencies listed in Table E-B, switch S2 (areas N and A) and area G of switch S1, set the synthesizer frequency in 20-MHz increments. Table E-C lists 2-MHz increments set by area F of S1. The following example describes how to use these tables to set synthesizer frequency.
NOTE Before adjusting synthesizer frequency, ensure that the system has had sufficient time to reach its normal operating temperature.
Example:
For a LO frequency of 7622.84 MHz, set S1 and S2 as follows:
1. In Table E-B, the N value for synthesizer frequency 7622 is 2, or binary 010. Set the three switches in area N of S2 from left to right to 010. The A value is 3, or binary 0011. Set all of the four switches in S2 area A to 0011. The G value is 01. Set the switches on S1 area G to 01.
2. Go to Table E-C to tune the synthesizer to a 2-MHz increment. Since the frequency is now between 7620 and 7640 MHz, set switch S1 area F to the 2-to 4-MHz value. The F value is 14, or binary 1110. The frequency is now between 7622 and 7624 MHz.
Switch S3, accessible through the receiver front panel LO FREQ ADJ opening, extends the LO frequency adjustment downward from the current frequency reading by approximately 1 MHz when toggled to the left (ON position). Placing Switch 3 in the OFF position extends the LO frequency adjustment upward from the current frequency reading by approximately 1 MHz.
3. Access the fine-frequency adjust capacitor through the LO FREQ ADJ opening, and rotate its screw adjust until reaching the desired frequency reading of 7622.84 MHz. If necessary, toggle switch S3 in order to reverse the direction of frequency adjustment.
4. The frequency switches are now set properly for 7622.84 MHz.
Figure E-1. Frequency Switch Arrangement
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 System User’s Manual Page E-3
Table E-B. CM7 Synthesizer Switch Settings in 20-MHz Increments
MLL20-MHz Synthesizer Increments
NN (binary)
A A (binary) G
8159A 7840 to 7860 1 001 8 1000 01
7820 to 7840 1 001 9 1001 01
7800 to 7820 1 001 10 1010 01
7780 to 7800 1 001 11 1011 10
7760 to 7780 1 001 12 1100 10
7740 to 7760 1 001 13 1101 10
7720 to 7740 1 001 14 1110 10
7700 to 7720 1 001 15 1111 11
7680 to 7700 2 010 0 0000 11
7660 to 7680 2 010 1 0001 11
7640 to 7660 2 010 2 0010 11
8158A 7640 to 7660 2 010 2 0010 01
7620 to 7640 2 010 3 0011 01
7600 to 7620 2 010 4 0100 01
7580 to 7600 2 010 5 0101 10
7560 to 7580 2 010 6 0110 10
7540 to 7560 2 010 7 0111 10
7520 to 7540 2 010 8 1000 10
7500 to 7520 2 010 9 1001 11
7480 to 7500 2 010 10 1010 11
7460 to 7480 2 010 11 1011 11
7440 to 7460 2 010 12 1100 11
8157A 7440 to 7460 2 010 12 1100 01
7420 to 7440 2 010 13 1101 01
7400 to 7420 2 010 14 1110 01
7380 to 7400 2 010 15 1111 01
7360 to 7380 3 011 0 0000 10
7340 to 7360 3 011 1 0001 10
7320 to 7340 3 011 2 0010 10
7300 to 7320 3 011 3 0011 10
7280 to 7300 3 011 4 0100 11
7260 to 7280 3 011 5 0101 11
7240 to 7260 3 011 6 0110 11
7220 to 7240 3 011 7 0111 11
Appendix E Setting Frequency
Page E-4 CM7/8 System User’s Manual
8156A 7220 to 7240 3 011 011 0111 01
7200 to 7220 3 011 011 1000 01
7180 to 7200 3 011 011 1001 01
7160 to 7180 3 011 011 1010 10
7140 to 7160 3 011 011 1011 10
7120 to 7140 3 011 011 1100 10
7100 to 7120 3 011 011 1101 10
7080 to 7100 3 011 011 1110 11
7060 to 7080 3 011 011 1111 11
7040 to 7060 4 100 100 0000 11
7020 to 7040 4 100 100 0001 11
Table E-C. Switch Settings, 2 MHz Increments
2 MHz Increments F F (binary)
0 to 2 15 11112 to 4 14 11104 to 6 13 11016 to 8 12 11008 to 10 11 1011
10 to 12 10 101012 to 14 9 100114 to 16 8 100016 to 18 7 011118 to 20 6 0110
Table E-B. CM7 Synthesizer Switch Settings in 20-MHz Increments
MLL20-MHz Synthesizer Increments
NN (binary)
A A (binary) G
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 System User’s Manual Page E-5
CM8 Switch SettingsCM8 RF frequencies are from 7780 to 8500 MHz, and LO frequencies are from 7850 to 8570 MHz. To determine the receiver local oscillator (RXLO) frequency, using an HP 5347A frequency counter or equivalent, measure both the receiver and transmitter RF frequencies, and then adjust RXLO as follows: If the receiver frequency (RXRF) is less than the transmitter frequency (TXRF), set the RXLO frequency to a value 70-MHz less than the measured RXRF; if the RXRF is greater than the TXRF, set the RXLO frequency to a value 70-MHz greater than the RXRF as listed in Table E-E.
Figure E-2 shows the RXLO synthesizer FREQUENCY SET switch setting arrangement for the CM8. Use Figure E-2 with the information in Tables E-E and E-C to set the synthesizer switches. Note that the areas N, A, F, and G correspond to switches S1 and S2. Also note that LO FREQ ADJ switch S3 and the fine-frequency adjust capacitor are accessible from the Receiver panel front. Table E-F lists the synthesizer frequencies according to their frequency bands.
Within the synthesizer oscillator frequencies listed in Table E-E, switch S2 (areas N and A) and area G of switch S1, set the synthesizer frequency in 20-MHz increments. Table E-C lists 2-MHz increments set by area F of S1. The example on Page 2 describes how to use these tables to set synthesizer frequency.
NOTE Before adjusting synthesizer frequency, ensure that the system has had sufficient time to reach its normal operating temperature.
Table E-D. Synthesizer Frequency Bands
RXU P/N Band Condition L/M/H ƒrf (MHz) ƒlo (MHz) LO Synthesizer
MRL8166 7 - 1 ƒRF>ƒLO lowmidhigh
710072027305
703071327235
MLL8156
MRL8166 7 - 1 ƒRF<ƒLO lowmidhigh
N/A71007165
N/A71707235
MLL8156
MRL8167 7 - 2 ƒRF>ƒLO lowmidhigh
730574077510
723573377440
MLL8157
MRL8167 7 - 2 ƒRF<ƒLO lowmidhigh
716572677370
723573377440
MLL8157
MRL8168 7 - 3 ƒRF>ƒLO lowmidhigh
751076127715
744075427645
MLL8158
MRL8168 7 - 3 ƒRF<ƒLO lowmidhigh
737074727575
744075427645
MLL8158
MRL8169 7 - 4 ƒFRF>ƒLO lowmidhigh
771578177920
764577477850
MLL8159
MRL8169 7 - 4 ƒRF<ƒLO lowmidhigh
757576777780
764577477850
MLL8159
Appendix E Setting Frequency
Page E-6 CM7/8 System User’s Manual
Table E-E. 20-MHz Synthesizer Switch Settings
MLL20 MHz Synthesizer Increments
NN (binary)
A A (binary) G
8163A 8560 to 8570 7 00111 4 0100 01
8540 to 8560 7 00111 5 0101 01
8520 to 8540 7 00111 6 0110 01
8500 to 8520 7 00111 7 0111 10
8480 to 8500 7 00111 8 1000 10
8460 to 8480 7 00111 9 1001 10
8440 to 8460 7 00111 10 1010 10
8420 to 8440 7 00111 11 1011 11
8400 to 8420 7 00111 12 1100 11
8390 to 8400 7 00111 13 1101 11
8162A 8380 to 8390 7 00111 13 1101 01
8360 to 8380 7 00111 14 1110 10
8340 to 8360 7 00111 15 1111 01
8320 to 8340 8 01000 0 0000 10
8300 to 8320 8 01000 1 0001 10
8280 to 8300 8 01000 2 0010 10
8260 to 8280 8 01000 3 0011 10
8240 to 8260 8 01000 4 0100 11
8220 to 8240 8 01000 5 0101 11
8210 to 8220 8 01000 6 0110 11
Figure E-2. CM8 Synthesizer Switch Arrangement
Microwave Networks
CM7/8 System User’s Manual Page E-7
8161A 8200 to 8210 8 01000 6 0110 01
8180 to 8200 8 01000 7 0111 01
8160 to 8180 8 01000 8 1000 01
8140 to 8160 8 01000 9 1001 10
8120 to 8140 8 01000 10 1010 10
8100 to 8120 8 01000 11 1011 10
8080 to 8100 8 01000 12 1100 10
8060 to 8080 8 01000 13 1101 11
8040 to 8060 8 01000 14 1110 11
8030 to 8040 8 01000 15 1111 11
8160A 8020 to 8030 8 01000 15 1111 01
8000 to 8020 9 01001 0 0000 01
7980 to 8000 9 01001 1 0001 01
7960 to 7980 9 01001 2 0010 10
7940 to 7960 9 01001 3 0011 10
7920 to 7940 9 01001 4 0100 10
7900 to 7920 9 01001 5 0101 10
7880 to 7900 9 01001 6 0110 11
7860 to 7880 9 01001 7 0111 11
7850 to 7860 9 01001 8 1000 11
Table E-F. Synthesizer Frequency Bands
RXUP/N
Band Condition L/M/Hƒrf(MHz)
ƒlo(MHz)
LOSynthesizer
MRL8170 8 - 1 ƒRF>ƒLO lowmidhigh
792080108100
785079408030
MLL8160
MRL8170 8 - 1 ƒRF<ƒLO lowmidhigh
778078707960
785079408030
MLL8160
MRL8171 8 - 2 ƒRF>ƒLO lowmidhigh
810081908280
803081208210
MLL8161
MRL8171 8 - 2 ƒRF<ƒLO lowmidhigh
796080508140
803081208210
MLL8161
MRL8172 8 - 3 ƒRF>ƒLO lowmidhigh
828083708460
821083008390
MLL8162
MRL8172 8 - 3 ƒRF<ƒLO lowmidhigh
814082308320
821083008390
MLL8162
MRL8173 8 - 4 ƒFRF<ƒLO lowmidhigh
832084108500
839084808570
MLL8163
MLL20 MHz Synthesizer Increments
NN (binary)
A A (binary) G
Appendix E Setting Frequency
Page E-8 CM7/8 System User’s Manual
CM System User’s Manual Page F-1
ACO — Alarm Cut Off.
ACU — Alarm and Control Unit.
A/D or ADC — Analog-to-Digital Converter.
AGC — Automatic Gain Control.
AIS — Alarm Indication Signal (all “1” bit pattern).
ALBO — Automatic Line Build Out.
ALC — Automatic Level Control.
ALM — Alarm.
AMI — Alternate Mark Inversion.
Annunciator — Sub-board on Interface Panel which contains the ACO switch and LED, Major LED, Minor LED, Manual LED and SEC Fail LED.
ANT — Antenna.
APC — Automatic Power Control.
ATDE — Adaptive Time Domain Equalizer (plug-in module). This unit combats linear channel distortions caused by all sources, but is specifically used to fight dispersive fade degradations.
ATT — Attenuation.
AUX — Auxiliary.
B8ZS — Binary Eight Zero Substitution.
BB — Baseband. The lowest frequency around which signals are processed.
BCH — Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem — A block format FEC code, characterized by high efficiency and applicability to random error event channels.
BER — Bit Error Rate.
BGT — Backward Guard Time.
BPF — Band Pass Filter.
BPV — Bipolar Violation.
BW — Bandwidth.
Appendix FGlossary
Appendix F Glossary
Page F-2 CM System User’s Manual
CCIR — International Radio Consultative Committee.
CCITT — International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee.
C/I — Carrier-to-Interference Ratio.
CLK — Clock.
Codec — Coder/Decoder.
Co-located — located in the same rack, as in two CM-HC radios.
Constellation — The totality of possible signal states used by the modem to send level information. Each point comprising the pattern is described by I and Q coordinates.
CTIA — Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association.
D — D word time or pattern; D frame.
D/A or DAC — Digital-to-Analog Converter.
DADE — Differential Absolute Delay Equalization.
dBm0 — dB above reference noise measured with C-message weighting at 0 transmission level point.
DEC — Double Error Correction.
DEMOD — Demodulator (plug-in module).
DFM — Dispersive Fade Margin, a measure (in dB) of a system's immunity to dispersive fade activity.
DISGAP — Distributed GAP.
Dispersive Fade — A change in propagation condition which affects the shape of the desired channel response. Typically, this is caused by multipath activity and is equalized by the ATDE and Slope Equal-izer.
DIU — Drop and Insert Unit (plug-in module).
DIV — Diversity.
DRO — Dielectric Resonator Oscillator.
DS1 — Digital Signal 1, the primary multiplex level in North American TDM hierarchy (1.544 Mbps).
DS3 — Digital Signal 3, the third multiplex level in North American TDM hierarchy (44.736 Mbps).
DSB — Double Side Band.
DSB-SC — Double Side Band-Suppressed Carrier.
DTMF — Dual Tone Multi-frequency.
CM System User’s Manual Page F-3
Microwave Networks
DVM — Digital Voltmeter.
E1— Primary multiplex level in International TDM hierarchy (2.048 Mbps).
E3— Third multiplex level in International TDM hierarchy (34.368 Mbps).
EFS — Error Free Seconds.
EMC — Electromagnetic Compatibility.
EMI — Electromagnetic Interference.
ENC — Encoder.
ES — Error Second.
ESD — Electrostatic Discharge.
FCC — Federal Communications Commission.
FE — Framing Error.
FEC — Forward Error Correction.
FEC Gap — Frame gap that coincides with FEC parity bit times.
FER — Frame Error Rate.
FET — Field Effect Transistor.
FF — Frequency Diversity Transmitter/ Frequency Diversity Receiver.
FGT — Forward Guard Time.
FI — FEC “I” Flag.
FIFO — First In First Out.
Flat Fade — A change in propagation conditions which affects the level of the received signal. This is com-pensated for by receiver AGC and possibly transmitter APC.
FLC — Frame Loss Counter.
FLS — Frame Loss Second.
Form A — Relay with normally open contacts.
Form B — Relay with normally closed contacts.
Form C — Relay with transfer contacts.
FQ — FEC “Q” Flag.
FR — Frame Resupply.
FREQ — Frequency.
Appendix F Glossary
Page F-4 CM System User’s Manual
FS — Symbol rate.
Gray Code — A counting scheme using binary numbers whereby adjacent numbers differ in only one bit position.
HDBn — High Density Bipolar signal, with a maximum of “n” consecutive zeros.
HH — Hot Standby Transmitter/Hot Standby Receiver.
HHU — Hand-held Unit.
HP — Hop Parity.
HS — Hot Standby Transmitter/Space Diversity Receiver.
H/W —þHardware.
IF — Intermediate Frequency (70 MHz).
IFP — Interface Panel.
In-Service — System carries live traffic.
INT — Interference.
I/P — Input.
ISI — Inter-symbol Interference.
LBO — Line Build Out.
LDU — Local Display Unit.
LED — Light Emitting Diode.
LEV —þLevel.
LNA — Low Noise Amplifier.
LNDC — Low Noise Down Converter.
LO — Local Oscillator.
LOS — Line of Site.
LOW — Local Orderwire.
LPF — Low Pass Filter.
M — M word time or pattern; M frame.
CM System User’s Manual Page F-5
Microwave Networks
Mbps — Megabits per second.
MGC — Manual Gain Control.
MHSB — Monitored Hot Standby radio protection configuration.
MLA — Microwave Link Analyzer.
MOD — Modulator (plug-in module).
Modem — Modulator/Demodulator.
MTBF — Mean Time Between Failure.
MTTR — Mean Time to Repair.
Multipath — Dynamic linear distortion characterized by notches and/or slope in the channel frequency response. The phenomena is caused by multiple independent propagation paths connecting transmitter and receiver.
MUX — Multiplexer (plug-in module).
MWG —þMicrowave Generator.
NC — Normally Closed relay contact.
NCS — Network Communications Software.
NF — Noise Figure.
NM — Network Management.
NMS — Network Management System.
NN — Non-protected Transmitter/ Non-protected Receiver.
NO — Normally Open relay contact.
NRZ — Non-Return to Zero.
NS — Non-protected Transmitter/Space Diversity Receiver.
OFS — Operational Fixed Services (Part 94).
O/P — Output.
Out-of-Service — System not carrying live traffic.
OWU — Orderwire Unit (plug-in module).
PA —þPower Amplifier.
Appendix F Glossary
Page F-6 CM System User’s Manual
PAM — Pulse Amplitude Modulation.
PCA — Printed Circuit Assembly.
PCB — Printed Circuit Board.
PER —Parity Error Rate.
PES — Parity Error Second.
PF —þPropagation Flag.
PLD — Programmable Logic Device.
PLL — Phase Lock Loop.
PLO — Phase Lock Oscillator.
PRBS — Pseudorandom Bit Sequence.
P/S — Parallel-to-Serial (Data Stream Conversion).
PSF — Previous Section Fail.
PSU (RF) — RF Power Supply Unit (plug-in module).
PSU (SP) — SP Power Supply Unit (plug-in module).
PWR — Power.
QAM — Quadrature Amplitude Modulation.
QPSK — Quadrature Phase Shift Keying Modulation.
REA — Rural Electrification Administration.
RF — Radio Frequency. In the CM6HC, this varies between5.925 and 7.125 GHz.
RFI — Radio Frequency Interference.
RFS — Radio Frequency Shelf.
RMU — Rack Mounting Units, 1.75 inches.
RU — Rack Unit, 1.75 inches.
RX — Receive(r).
RXU — Receiver Unit (plug-in module).
CM System User’s Manual Page F-7
Microwave Networks
SBY — Standby.
SC — Service Channel.
SCU — Service Channel Unit (plug-in module).
SD — Space Diversity radio protection configuration.
SEC — Seconds.
SF — Signal Failed (140 Mb/s).
SLEQ — Slope Equalizer.
SO — Stuff Opportunity.
SP — Signal Processing.
S/P — Serial-to-Parallel (Data Stream Conversion).
SPS — Signal Processing Shelf.
SR — Stuff Request.
SS — Space Diversity Transmitter/Space Diversity Receiver.
S/W — Software.
SWR — Switching Request.
SYM — Symbol.
Symbol Rate or Frequency (fs) — The rate (frequency) at which symbols are generated. Since symbols rep-resent any of 3, 5, or 7 bits (for 8, 32, and 128 QAM respectively), the system bit rate is 3, 5, or 7 times higher than the symbol rate.
SYNDES — Synchronizer/Desynchronizer (plug-in module).
T1 — Transmission medium capable of carrying a TDM signal at 1.544 Mbps.
T3 — Digital Signal 3, the third multiplex level in North American TDM hierarchy (44.736 Mbps).
TDM — Time Division Multiplexing.
T/I — Threshold to Interference.
TIU — TELESCAN Interface Unit.
T/R — Transmitter/Receiver pair (2 T/Rs in a monitored hot standby radio).
TTL — Transistor-Transistor Logic.
TX — Transmit(ter).
TXU — Transmitter Unit (plug-in module).
Appendix F Glossary
Page F-8 CM System User’s Manual
U/C — Upconverter.
UI — Unit Interval, Jitter.
UIS — User Interface Software.
UPSTRM — Upstream.
VCO — Voltage Controlled Oscillator.
VF — Voice Frequency.
XO — Crystal Oscillator.
XTL — Crystal.
XPD — Cross-Polarization Discrimination.
CM System User’s Manual 6/14/02 Page G-1
IntroductionTo manage CM radios as IP-network devices using Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) you should be familiar with your network management application and understand IP-network concepts, hardware, protocols, and architecture. This appendix discusses the CM radio SNMP option and covers:
What is CM SNMP? ........................... G-1SNMP Option Components ................ G-2Layout of a CM SNMP Network........ G-4Installing Hardware............................. G-5Installing Software .............................. G-8System Operation.............................. G-10
What is CM SNMP?CM SNMP simplifies configuring, monitoring, and diagnosing your radio, radio link, or entire radio network by providing open-standard radio management via Ethernet. Since SNMP is an open-standard protocol, you can use any SNMP-capable manage-ment application to manage CM radios. This radio option includes an SNMP Network Management Unit (SNMP NMU), an Ethernet interface at the front panel, and appro-priate software files.
SMNP is a network management standard for LANs that defines a client/server rela-tionship. The client program (called the network manager) makes virtual connections to a server program (called the SNMP agent) which operates on a remote network device and serves information about device status to the manager. SNMP uses a management information base (MIB) to define these virtual connections. Any SNMP manager, with proper access, can query the status and modify the configuration of each managed device.
A MIB is a standard set of definitions (structure and format) for exchanging informa-tion about the network components. Microwave Networks’ MIB is a private MIB for the CM radio. The SNMP option adapts the alarms and commands used by the Status and Control Extender (SCE) for use by the SNMP manager.
Revision Note Ethernet routing is self-learning in the latest release of CM SNMP. Routing Informa-tion Protocol version 2 (RIP-2) provides dynamic routing of up to 15 radios per subnet. Spans of 15-radio subnets are unlimited.
After setting the IP address of the first-accessed radio and configuring it as a gateway, routing tables of radios throughout the network update automatically to incorporate changes as they occur.
RIP is primarily for networks of moderate size and has these limitations:
• Limited to sub-networks whose longest path is 7 hops (15 radios).
• Uses fixed metrics to compare alternative routes; so it is unsuited to situations where routes need to be chosen based on real-time parameters such a measured delay, reliability, or load.
Appendix GCM SNMP
CM SNMP
Page G-2 6/14/02 CM System User’s Manual
SNMP Option ComponentsTables G-A lists the CM SNMP components that Table G-B describes. Use the CM SNMP hardware upgrade kit, PN 8708231-00, to convert existing CM radios with Microwave Network’s proprietary network management to SNMP.
The SNMP Front Panel
Figure G-1 shows the radio front panel and Ethernet interface that Table G-C describes. The CM SNMP option adapts Status and Control Extender (SCE) alarms and commands to manage the radio. See the Status and Control Extender Operation Manual, P/N 68P85104E05, for more information on the SCE. A jumper cable connects alarm data from the SCE jack to the network interface.
Table G-A. SNMP Components
System Computer (User Provided)
CM SNMP Hardware CM SNMP Software
Win 98/NT/Win 2000 SNMP NMU SNMP NMU Software (installed)Serial port Ethernet Front Panel SNMP Manager (user provided)10BaseT Ethernet network interface card
SNMP/10BaseT Cable (user provided)
CM SNMP MIB (private)
Table G-B. Component Descriptions and Part Numbers
Item Description Part No.
Network Interface Module Connects radio support data to a network 8000539-00SNMP NMU SNMP agent. Modifies radio data for use by
SNMP managers8000538-00
CM SNMP MIB Management Information Base (MIB) 4600027-00Bridge Cable RJ11-4/RJ11-4 8108633-02
Cable, Ribbon,15 conductor, 18" long 3700044-00
Table G-C. Front Panel Network Interface Components
Item Description
LINK Shows that the radio is connected to an Ethernet network.ACTIVITY Blinking indicates data transfer between agent and manager.SCE 4-pin RJ-11 connector to jumper to the front panel SCE jack.10BaseT 8-pin RJ-45 10BaseT network connection.
Figure G-1. SNMP NMU Front Panel
CM System User’s Manual 6/14/02 Page G-3
Microwave Networks
The SNMP NMU (Network Management Unit)
The SNMP NMU (Figure G-2) mounts on the ACU and acts as the SNMP agent. The NMU collects management data from its radio and, on request from an SNMP manager, distributes the data through the network to the manager. The NMU automati-cally sends critical radio errors, called traps, to the SNMP manager.
Traps are the standard mechanism of SNMP for unsolicited reports from network elements to the network manager. Traps store variable data and static textual informa-tion in the SNMP NMU. Successive traps with same textual information need only transfer the variable data.
Each SNMP NMU acts as a multi-homed device. That is, each radio has two IP inter-faces, so two IP addresses. One interface is the Ethernet interface at 10 Mbps, and the other is the over-the-air interface of the radio overhead channel at 64 kbps. The over-the-air interface transports status and command data over the microwave link. The IP address of the Ethernet interface is also the address of the SNMP NMU.
Major components of the SNMP NMU to note are the nine LEDs (Table G-D), three push-button switches (Table G-E), and three jumpers (Table G-F). Two megabytes of flash memory stores the SNMP system parameters and variables. NMU software may be downloaded to the board through the network using the TFTP service (see your computer utilities documentation).
Position 6 of eight-position dip switch SW1 toggles communication to the local access port between the ACU and NMU. Close SW1-6 to communicate with the NMU. Open SW1-6 to communicate with the ACU. SW1-6 should remain closed with all other positions open for normal operation.
Figure G-2. SNMP NMU Card
CM SNMP
Page G-4 6/14/02 CM System User’s Manual
Layout of a CM SNMP NetworkThis section describes the typical network layout of CM radios using the SNMP option. Figure G-3 shows this layout.
The management station, or SNMP manager, sends SNMP get and set requests to the SNMP agents–each radio NMU. The SNMP NMU answers get and set requests from the manager as specified by the Microwave-Networks MIB (management information base).
The MIB contains the common name of each object (which must be unique), the value of the OID (object IDs, which are hierarchical and must be unique), and the textual description of the syntax and semantics of the CM radio.
Each radio has two IP addresses: one addresses the Ethernet interface (IF1), the address of its SNMP NMU, and the other the 64 kbps over-the-air interface (IF2). The over-the-air interface transports radio support data, including get and set requests from the SNMP manager, over the microwave link to other radios addressed in the network routing tables.
A local connection at the front panel of each radio is available for on-site radio mainte-nance using the local maintenance terminal (LMT; see Chapter 6, Sub-section 1.3).
Table G-D. SNMP NMU LED Descriptions
LED Name Function
LD1 LINK Indicates that the Ethernet link is plugged into a valid networkLD2 POL Polarity Reverse – indicates reversed polarity at the Ethernet RxLD3 JAB Jabber – indicates linking communication has been establishedLD4 COL Collision – indicates that the send packet was not sent but will be
retransmittedLD5 RX RX – indicates that Ethernet port is receivingLD6 TX TX – indicates that Ethernet port is transmittingLD7 +3.3V +3.3 volt powerLD8 +5V +5 volt powerLD9 Bus Error Indicates an error on the data bus
Table G-E. SNMP NMU Push-button Reset Switch Descriptions
Switch Function
S1 Hard Power Reset – performs cold-cycle restart of softwareS2 Soft Power Reset – performs warm-cycle restart of softwareS3 Abort – halts the NMU processor
Table G-F. SNMP NMU Jumper Descriptions
Jumper Function
JP1 For internal use. Normally openJP2 For internal use. Normally openJP3 Pins 1 and 2 connected enables watchdog timer
CM System User’s Manual 6/14/02 Page G-5
Microwave Networks
Installing HardwareThis section describes the installation of the CM SNMP option, which involves connecting cables and installing and configuring your SNMP software.
Installation Note To use the SNMP NMU each radio needs ACU Rev. E and ACU code A10 or later.
To upgrade to SNMP, replace the standard NMU, associated cables, and the network interface module on the front panel with those in the SNMP upgrade kit, P/N 8708231-00. While this procedure stops management data, experienced technicians can complete the upgrade without losing service.
SITE A
Ethernet
SITE C
SITE B
Radio1
2
Radio4
Radio5
ManagementStation
Local MaintenanceTerminal (LMT)
Ethernet
Ethernet
Radio
LAN/WAN10BaseT
cm snmp ntwk p2
IP Address 1IP Address 2
INTF1 INTF2
INTF1 (interface 1) — 10BaseTINTF2 (interface 2) — 64 kbps
IP Address 3IP Address 4INTF2INTF1
3Radio
IP Address 5INTF1
REPEATER
IP Address 6
LOCAL ACCESS
INTF2IP Address 3
IP Address 2
IP Address 1
INTF2
Radio6
SITE D
PSTNModem
Modem
IP Address 2IP Address 1IP Address 4
crossover cableor hub
INTF1
10Base-T
PSTN
SERVER &INTERMEDIATE
GATEWAY
CLIENT
CLIENT
SERVER
SERVER
SERVER &INTERMEDIATE
GATEWAY
Figure G-3. Typical CM SNMP Network
CM SNMP
Page G-6 6/14/02 CM System User’s Manual
Connecting Cables
After installing the CM radio, connect cables from your Ethernet network to the radio and make the following connections as this section details.
• 10BaseT port to the network• Network interface SCE port to the radio SCE connector• Maintenance terminal to the local access port (if required)
Ethernet (10BaseT) Port
10BaseT cabling is 10-MHz Ethernet running over un-shielded twisted-pair cable. Its maximum length is generally 100 to 150 meters, but length limits are based on signal loss in decibels (11.5db max.). The connection is RJ45 for interfacing radio alarms and controls through a network. When connecting the radio to a hub, wire 10BaseT cables (Category 3 or better) straight through. When connecting directly to a network, or the radio Ethernet connections at repeater sites, cross-pin cables. Table G-G lists cable pinning.
SCE Port
The SCE Network port bridges alarm and control data normally connected to an SCE unit. The bridge cable, PN 8108633-02, is RJ11 4-wire-to-RJ11 4-wire with straight-through pinning. Table G-H lists pin assignments.
The SCE, Status & Control Extender, uses alarm/control relays to provide system alarm, status, and performance information to and controls from remote alarm moni-toring equipment.
Table G-G. Ethernet Port Pins
Pin Signal Color1 TX + White/Orange2 TX - Orange3 RX + White/Green4 Blue5 White/Blue6 RX - Green7 White/Brown8 Brown
Figure G-4. Network Interface Ports
Access-Panel Jack
Cable connections
CM System User’s Manual 6/14/02 Page G-7
Microwave Networks
Local Access Port
The DB9 local access connection provides a 9600-bps serial interface to the NMU from a VT100 compatible terminal for local configuration. The ACU shares this port with the NMU. NMU switch SW1-6 sets which unit uses the port. With SW1-6 OPEN the ACU controls the local access port and when CLOSED the NMU controls the port.
The female local-access port connector carries three RS-232 compatible signals as Table G-I describes. Set the terminal to 9600, 8, N,1 with no flow control to communi-cate with the NMU.
The opposite end of a serial cable connects a computer or terminal serial port to the local access connector. The computer uses either a DB9 connector (9-pin) or a DB25 (25-pin) connector. For a computer with a DB9 connector, strap pins 7 and 8, and 4 and 6 of the cable connection.
Access the local access port from a remote location by connecting a dedicated Hayes-compatible modem as Chapter 4 discusses.
Table G-H. SCE Cable Pin AssignmentsSCE Network JackPin 1 at left
SCE Modular Conn.Pin 1 at top
Pin Signal Pin Signal1 SCE OUT 1 DATA INPUT2 GND 2 GND3 GND 3 GND4 SCE IN 4 DATA OUTPUT
Jumper cable connections
Table G-I. Local Access Port
Pin Signal2 input3 output5 ground
CM SNMP
Page G-8 6/14/02 CM System User’s Manual
Installing SoftwareAn SNMP supported radio needs software to collect and store the values of the managed variables (MIB objects). The SNMP agent is a software program that inter-faces with the MIB and responds to queries from the management station. The SNMP NMU maps the data of the radio being monitored to MIB objects.
Variables that the SNMP NMU handles include alarms, performance statistics, and relay inputs from and commands to the CM radio through the ACU. ACU software monitors and controls radio sensors and modules.
Option Requirement The radio must have ACU Rev. E and ACU software version A10 or later for SNMP.
The diskette included in the CM SNMP installation kit contains Microwave Networks’ private MIB (P/N 4600027-00). Open the MIB file in a text editor to view more infor-mation about the management options (including the list of traps generated by the SNMP NMU.
Install
To install the MIB
1. Insert the installation disk into the drive on the management station computer.
2. Copy the file snmpnmu.mib to the MIB file directory of your SNMP man-agement application.
3. Add and compile the new MIB according to the steps outlined by your SNMP application for adding a MIB file.
Configure
Now assign each radio a unique IP address using the steps below. If the NMU is already connected to an Ethernet LAN, then it will already have at least one IP address assigned that will usually be the IP address of interface 1– the Ethernet address of the NMU. In such cases, it is convenient to use that address as the local IP address of the PPP interface on that host.
Use the CM radio command-line interface or Telnet from the local access port to change the radio IP addresses as the steps below detail.
Your radio network will be a separate subnet that uses the first-accessed radio as an intermediate gateway. Although RIP-2 limits networks to 15 radios, you can string radio subnets together.
Security Note The following changes require administrative-level access.
1. Close NMU SW1 position 6 to access the NMU at the local access port.
2. Connect a serial cable between a VT100 compatible terminal and the local ac-cess port.
3. Set terminal communication to 9600 baud, 8 bit, no parity, 1 stop bit, and no flow control. Press return to establish communication. The radio responds with the login and password request.
4. On a radio that is not connected to a LAN, assign an IP address to IF1(inter-face 1) using the Telnet command ifconfig.
5. Now set up the PPP link (IF2/interface 2). Use Telnet command setup_ppp to configure IF2, the over-the-air interface.
• Set one radio of the over-the-air interface as the client and the other as the
CM System User’s Manual 6/14/02 Page G-9
Microwave Networks
server as Figure G-6 shows.
• Set RIP to let radios exchange IP information so that all network devices deter-mine how to reach any other device in the network. You can also manually edit routing information for smaller networks.
• Set the first radio connected to an existing network as the “intermediate gate-way" (Figure G-6). The intermediate gateway serves as an entrance to the sub-net of radios. When you reach the 15-radio limit of RIP, you can start another radio subnet by using its first radio as its intermediate gateway.
Figure G-5 shows an example of the setup_ppp entries. The gateway IP address is 172.17.0.0 for this subnet of radios with addresses from 172.17.1.1 to 172.17.1.30 (each radio using two addresses).
Figure G-5. Example of setup-ppp Entries
Use the SHUTDOWN command to ensure flash memory gets updated before reboot or removing power from the board.
CompanyLAN
Gateway
Ethernet IntermediateGateway RADIO SUBNET
IF1 IF2 IF2
CLIENT SERVER
Telnet of SNMPapplication
Figure G-6. Example of Radio Network Connections
CM SNMP
Page G-10 6/14/02 CM System User’s Manual
System OperationConfigure the interface and radios, monitor events, query radios, receive responses to issued commands, or receive unsolicited critical radio data (traps) from a CM radio with SNMP using an SNMP management application, Telnet, or the command line interface (CLI).
The management station displays responses or trap data. Trap data updates periodi-cally. The system connects to Telnet or an SNMP management application through the Ethernet network, and the CLI connects to the radio local access port.
SNMP Network Manager
Radio management using the CM SNMP private MIB depends largely on the SNMP management application you use. Refer to the tutorials, help, and documentation of your specific management software.
Microwave Networks MIB
The CM SNMP MIB contains groups of variables that specify the structure and format for CM radio management data. The following text explains these variables.
Add and compile the CM SNMP MIB into your SNMP manager. For illustration this section uses Castlerock SNMPc. See your documentation or administrator for instruc-tions.
After compiling, perform the following steps to access MIB variables using SNMPc:
1. Click Start and select Programs.
2. Open SNMPc (or the name of your commercial SNMP)
3. Select Startup System from the SNMPc sub-menu
4. In the login screen, enter your User Name and Password
5. Click OK
6. At the Root Subnet Menu, select the subnet that contains the IP address of the desired radio, and then select the radio.
7. At the Server Menu, click Tools, and then click MIB Browser.
8. Open the Private folder.
9. From the private folder that appears, select Microwave-Networks.
MIB Tables
The figure below shows the major CM SNMP variable categories:
• Performance monitor radio performance statistics
• Configuration view and change radio settings
• Fault management configure and monitor radio alarms
• Trap management control and monitor traps
• Diagnostics perform system tests and monitor results
CM System User’s Manual 6/14/02 Page G-11
Microwave Networks
Performance Table
Table G-J lists and describes the variables available from the performance table (perfT-able). Use the tools of your specific SNMP management application to display a MIB table window or graph for the selected variables.
Figure G-7. CM SNMP MIB Tables
Table G-J. MIB Performance Table (perfTable) Variables
Table Description
perfTable – To expand, click +.
perfID – Identifies NE (0) and FE (1) radios.
perfSide – Identifies A or B side of a protected radio
perfErrSeconds – NE and FE G826 Errored second ratio
perfSevErrSeconds –NE and FE G826 severely errored sec-onds
perfRslCur – NE and FE current recieved signal levels
perfRslMax – NE and FE Maximum receive signal levels recorded
PerfTxPower – NE and FE receiver transmitter output power
perfBER – NE and FE radio bit errors relative to total number of bits/time interval
perfResetCounters – Resets all Performance table data counters
CM SNMP
Page G-12 6/14/02 CM System User’s Manual
Configuration Table
Select the configuration table to display or edit the radio configuration settings. Use your specific SNMP manager to manipulate selected MIB variables.
Fault Manager Table
Select the fault manager to access alarm and trap information of CM radio. Traps are unsolicited critical radio data automatically sent from the agent (NMU) to the manager. Use your specific SNMP manager to manipulate selected MIB variables.
Table G-K. MIB Configuration Table (confTable) Variables
Table DescriptionconfTable – To expand, click +confID – Internal system variable. Normally not usedipAddr – NE and FE radio IP addressessubnet – NE and FE subnet addressestftpServer – name of the host server for file downloadtftpFile – name of the file that updates the NMUsyndesConfig – data tributary capacitysyndesMuxTransmit – Syndes to MUX Tx path – locked/auto and current (main/standby) pathModTxuTransmit – MOD to transmitter Tx path – locked/auto and current (main/standby) pathrxuDemodRecieve – DEMOD to receiver Rx pathmuxSyndesReceive – MUX to Syndes Rx pathtransmitAPC – state of the automatic power control – auto/manual and on/off
Table G-L. MIB Fault Manager (faultManager) Variables
Table DescriptionfaultManager – To expand, click +alarmTable – To expand, click +alarmID - Internal system variable. Normally not usedalarmNEValue / alarmFEValue - reports 16 alarms of the near- and far-end radio including module, link, and summary alarms as follows:
trapRecipientTable – To expand, click +trapRepID – Internal system variable. Normally not usedtrapRepIp– Trap recipient IP address; that is, the address to which the SNMP agent (NMU) sends critical alarmstraps – To expand, click +trapMode – Trap mode control. Three states; 0, no traps sent;1, summary alarms from one agent; and 2, verbose – retrieve all alarmstmpAlarmId – Internal system variable. Normally not used. Not accessibletmpAlarmStatus – Internal system variable. Normally not used. Not accessible
sce-Link-Failfe-Link-Failrf-PSU-Failsp-PSU-Fail
transmitter-Failreceiver-Failmodulator-Faildemodulator-Fail
atde-Failmux-Failsyndes-Failscu-Fail
owu-Failwtu-Failacu-Failsummary-A-Failsummary-B-Fail
CM System User’s Manual 6/14/02 Page G-13
Microwave Networks
CM SNMP Traps
This folder shows the available CM SNMP traps that are internal system variables. Traps are the unsolicited critical radio data automatically sent from the agent (NMU) to the manager. Traps modes works in one of three settings: no traps, terse (send A or B side summaries only), and verbose (send a trap on any alarm change).
Diagnostics
Select diagnostics to open the radio test tables and variables. Use your specific SNMP manager to manipulate selected MIB variables.
Table G-M. MIB Diagnostics (diagnostics) Variables
Table Description
diagnostics – To expand, click +
neRemoteLoopTable – To expand, click +
neChannelD - Internal system variable. Normally not used.
neChannelStatus - Loopback status if near-end channels
feRemoteLoopTable – To expand, click +
feChannelID – Internal system variable. Normally not used
feChannelStatus – Loopback status of the far-end chan-nels
CM SNMP
Page G-14 6/14/02 CM System User’s Manual
Telnet
The following material describes the Telnet commands and their responses. Use Telnet to perform the following tasks:
• Retrieve performance data
• Set or modify parameters
• View monitored alarms
• Perform diagnostic tests or monitor test results
Security Note You need administrative-level access to modify radio parameters.
Telnet is a general bi-directional communications utility. It provides a standard way to interface terminal devices and terminal-oriented processes to each other. Telnet communicates with another host using the Telnet protocol.
If you open Telnet without arguments, it enters command mode and shows prompt: telnet>. In command mode, it waits for commands. If you open Telnet with argu-ments, it executes the command and arguments.
Telnet enters input mode after opening a connection between your Telnet terminal and a radio. In input mode, text typed is sent to the remote host. The input will be line mode because that is what CM SNMP supports. The local system under the control of the remote system performs character processing in line mode.
Telnet Password Note The default user name in Telnet is admin or guest. The default password is psos. A guest session without the password puts you in monitor only mode.
After opening Telnet and connecting to the radio or network node (Figure G-8), use the Telnet command options listed in the following section.
Figure G-8. CM SNMP Telnet Shell
CM System User’s Manual 6/14/02 Page G-15
Microwave Networks
Telnet Commands
Type Help at the Telnet command line for a list of commands supported by CM SNMP (Figure G-9). Table G-N defines the Telnet commands.
Telnet commands for the CM SNMP radio are organized into the same four functions as the MIB: performance, configuration, fault, and diagnostic. Telnet displays perfor-mance statistics, executes configuration commands, and displays radio settings. Telnet also lets you configure, display, and reset radio alarms and radio diagnostics. The next section discusses command usage.
Table G-N. Telnet Command Definitions
Command Descriptionarp Address Resolution Protocol. Builds tables to translate an address in a
protocol address space into a 48-bit Ethernet address.community A ‘community table' exists in the router that contains several entries with
parameters that define the attributes of the community.date Displays day, month, day of month, military time, and year.display Shows node, agent, or network information according to set optionsdownload Transfer updated firmware files to the SNMP NMUhelp Lists the Telnet commands. Enter help plus the Telnet command for a
description of that command.ifconfig Lists the settings of the network interfaces and allows changes. localcli Identifies the local command-line interface (NMU connection)nestat Summarizes network usage statistics.passwd Change the current password.ping Shows if a given host is alive and the round trip transmission time.reboot Reboots the NMU software.reset_log Resets system, radio, or alarm log.route Manually manipulate the network routing tables.setup_ppp Configure interface 2 (IF2)–the 64-kbps interface over the radio link.shutdown Shut down the radio.ver Display the NMU software revision.whoami Display name of connected radio and user name.radioname Display and change the radio name.syndestype Display or set the Syndes interface type: 4DS1, 8DS1, 12DS1, 28DS1,
1DS3, 3DS3, OC3.
Figure G-9. Main Telnet Display
CM SNMP
Page G-16 6/14/02 CM System User’s Manual
Telnet Command Usage
arp This command (address resolution protocol) responds to its options as follows:
arp host Displays the entered host IP address.
arp –a Displays all of the current arp entries from the arp table.
arp –d host Deletes an arp table entry identified by host name. Requires administrator security level.
arp –s host ether_addr [temp] Create arp entry for host called hostname with address ether_addr.
arp –f filename Not used.
Hostname ether_addr [temp] [pub] [proxy-only]
The ethernet address is given as six hexadecimal bytes separated by colons. The entry is permanent unless the word temp is in the command. If the word pub is given, the entry is published; that is, this system will act as an Arp server responding to requests for hostname even though the host address is not its own. If proxy-only is given, the entry is published, but it will not be used by this system for packets sent to hostname, which can be useful when hostname is reached by other means.
Community Before an object can be read or written, the SNMP community name must be known. These community names are configured into the system, by the administrator, to allow references to portions of the MIB. These values identify commonality between SNMP objects. It is typical to make these community names obscure so as to limit access to SNMP capability by outside users. To see the current settings of the connected unit type Communities. The unit returns with the current settings.
Get: public Set: private Trap: SNMP_trap
To set communities use:community [-g (get community)] [-s (set community)] [-t (trap community)]
date This command shows current day, month, day of month, 24hr time, and year.
Display This commands responds to its options as follows:
display alarm Shows alarm log up to 200 entries. [num_entry] specifies the number of entries to be displayed.
display radio Shows log of radio configuration changes. Number of entries [num_entry] can be displayed.
display all Shows both alarm and radio configuration entries. Number of entries [num_entry] can be displayed.
display system Lists system errors; i.e., memory, internal NMC software or OS errors. Number of entries [num_entry] can be displayed.
display network Lists IP addresses of all CM SNMP radios on LAN.
display stat Lists internal system resource usage
CM System User’s Manual 6/14/02 Page G-17
Microwave Networks
download This command updates NMU firmware with the latest system software. Download requires administrative-level access.
You must know the IP address of the local TFTP host server, which the device sending the updated file. This command can update NMU firmware on the addressed radio. Upgrading the radios down a link can take up to 30 minutes to complete.
Download example -- download file [name] from host server [IP address] (Y/N)?
help Lists the Telnet commands supported by the CM SNMP option.
ifconfig Configure the network interfaces. Requires administrative-level access to execute.
ifconf ni number Internet number 1, 2, or 6Usage: [af [address [dest_addr] ] [up] [down] [netmask mask] [broadcast broad_addr] ]
af Address family
address Specifies address to use to route broadcasts to the network.
dest_addr Specifies address of agent on far-end of a point-to-point link.
up Enables an interface. Shows internet address and network address.
down Disables an interface. When disabled, the system does not attempt to use the interface.
netmask mask Specifies how much of an address to reserve for sub-dividing a network into subnetworks.
broadcast broad_addr Lists broadcast address.
ifconf arp Enables arp in mapping network-level addresses and link-level addresses (default).
ifconf –arp Disables arp.
ifconf –a Shows internet numbers with associated addresses (inet, netmask, broadcast).
localcli Redirects the local CLI (command line interface) of the SNMP NMU to the local access port of the radio (default).
localcli -a SNMP NMU CLI goes to the access panel if SW1-6 is off.
localcli -n SNMP NMU CLI always goes to the three-pin connector on the NMU.
netstat This command lists the contents of the various network-related data structures in vari-ous formats.
netstat -a Shows state of all sockets.
netstat -I Shows state of all network interfaces.
netstat -r Shows the routing table.
netstat -s Shows per-protocol statistics.
passwd new passwd: New password entry.
ping This command sends ICMP packets to a host and listens for responses.
CM SNMP
Page G-18 6/14/02 CM System User’s Manual
ping –s host The –s option sends datagrams containing specified datagram size in bytes. Count specifies number of bytes/datagram, and timeout specifies time duration of transmission.
reboot After changing parameters issue the reboot command to update the NMU. Requires administrative-level access to execute.
reboot NE Reboots NMC of near-end radio.
reset_log This administrative-level command responds to its options as follows:
reset_log system Resets system log.
reset_log radio Resets radio and alarm log.
route The route command manually manipulates the network routing tables. Requires administrative-level access to execute.
add Adds a route.
delete Deletes a specific route.
host Name of host IP address
net Specifies network
destination Destination of host or network
gateway Name of specified gateway
metric Lists a number specifying the number of hops to reach destination.
setup_ppp This administrative-level command lets you configure the PPP interface of the radio (IF2).
• Set one radio of a hop as the client and one as the server.• Enable or disable RIP.• Connect the first radio of a radio subnet as an intermediate gateway.• Use reboot when finished to save this configuration to the NMU.
shutdown This administrative-level command enables the connected radio NMC to be shut down (Y), or remain on (N).This command ensures that flash memory is updated and placed in a safe state for removing power.
ver Displays the NMU software version, part number and build date. Code size and check-sum also displays to aid in troubleshooting. For example:
Version v2.2 PN# 4600026-01 (build 06-12-02)Code Size 660096 bytes - Checksum 0x2e23e12
whoami This command displays name of connected radio and user name used during login. For example:
Radio name: westUser: admin
radioname Type radioname and press return to display the current name. To change the name use radioname [-s (newname)]. Do not use spaces.
syndestype Displays radio interface type. To change the Syndes interface type use: syndestype [-s (config)] where config is one of 4DS1, 8DS1, 12DS1, 28DS1, 1DS3, 3DS3, or OC3 (155Mbit/s).
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 I-1
8000608 WTUswitch 3-14-6
AAccess Panel 2-5, 3-1-1Access Panel connections 4-6Access Panel LEDs 5-11ACU 3-7-1Adaptive Time Domain Equalizer 2-2adding ATDE 6-10adding NMU 6-10adding orderwire 6-10AGC 5-19Alarm and Control Unit 3-7-1alarm codes D-1alarm log 6-7alignment 5-1, 5-10, 5-20ALM LED, Orderwire unit 3-13-4antenna connection 4-21antenna port, connections 4-22APC 2-2, 2-27ATDE 2-6Automatic 2-27Automatic Gain Control 5-19Automatic Power Control 2-27Automatic Switching 2-12
Bbandpass filter
location 6-12branching waveguide 2-3
Ccarrier frequency test 5-10channel capacity 1-4checking frequency 2-28computer/terminal installation 4-13
DDC voltages 5-9
DCE-to-DCE internal cable connections 4-20DEMOD
operation 3-9-2differential fading 1-7DIP Switches 3-15-4DS1
line coding (28xDS1 radio only) 6-8
Eend-to-end DS3 check 5-11end-to-end service channel check 5-13equipment rack 3-1-12
FFCC compliance 1-4frequency switch settings E-1frequency, LO 5-10Frequency, Local Oscillator 5-10frequency, modulator 5-10Front Panel Functions 3-13-4front panel functions
ACU 3-7-4DEMOD 3-9-4SP PSU 3-6-3
front panel functions, RXU 3-4-2front panel functions, TXU 3-3-2
HHot Standby Transmitter, Hot Standby Receiver 2-7,3-2-2Hot Standby Transmitter, Space Diversity Receiver 2-8, 3-2-2
IIF cabling 5-8IF local loopback 2-22inspection 5-1installation 4-1installation kit 4-2installation kits 3-1-12
Index
I-2 5/12/04 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
Index
Interference Considerations 1-7interference considerations 1-7
Jjumpers
ACU 3-7-4RXU 3-4-4SP shelf backplane 3-1-10TXU Alarm Control 3-3-4
LLDU screens B-1LO frequency 5-10LO frequency, verification 6-8Local Access Port B-1Local Oscillator, Frequency 5-10loopback
IF local 2-22RF local 2-20SCU remote 2-25SYNDES remote 2-24WTU remote 2-26
loopbacks 2-19
MManual Switching 2-12MGN8112 Access Panel
switch settings 3-1-9MLN7330 WTU
jumpers 3-14-4switch 3-14-4
MOD 2-1, 3-8-1front panel functions 3-8-3
Modular 4-10Modulator 3-8-1modulator frequency 5-10module alarm LEDs 6-2module fail LEDs 5-11modules
DIP switches 5-9jumpers 5-9
Monitored Hot Standby Switching 2-11Multiplexer 3-10-1MUX 2-1, 3-10-1
MUX Local loopback 2-24
NNetwork Management Unit 3-15-1NMU 3-15-1
jumpers 3-15-3switches 3-15-3, 3-15-4
Non-protected Transmitter, Non-protected Receiver2-10, 3-2-2Non-protected/Non-protected configuration 5-7
OOrderwire Unit 3-13-1OWU 3-13-1
front panel functions 3-13-4handset functions 3-13-4jumpers 3-13-5, 3-13-6, C-7switches 3-13-5, 3-13-6
Pperformance checking 6-7power cables 4-5power distribution 3-1-4preliminary checks 5-9Protected Configuration 2-11Protection Switching 2-7protection switching 2-11
Rrack ground wiring 4-5rack installation 4-2radio cabinet 3-1-1radio commissioning 5-19Radio Frequency Power Supply Unit 3-5-1radio system gain 1-7rated power output 1-7Receive Signal Level 5-19receive signal level 1-7receive threshold check 5-15Receiver 2-2Receiver RXU-DEMOD Switch Plane 2-17Receiver Sensitivity 1-7receiver switching, HS 2-18receiver SYNDES-MUX switch plane 2-18
CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual 5/12/04 I-3
Microwave Networks
Receiver Unit 3-4-1recommended test equipment 5-20Repeater Arrangements 2-10RF cables 5-8RF Channel Separation 1-7RF channel separation 1-7RF Distribution 3-2-1
front panel functions (HH) 3-2-6front panel functions (HS) 3-2-7front panel functions (NN) 3-2-10receive section 3-2-5transmit section 3-2-5
RF Distribution Tray 2-1RF Modules 2-3RF Power Supply Unit 2-4RF PSU 2-4, 3-5-1RF PSU features 3-5-3RF shelf backplane 3-1-11RF Tx fade margin check 5-17RSL 5-19RXU 2-2, 3-4-1RXU-DEMOD switch plane, receiver 2-17
SSCU 3-12-1
switches 3-12-5, C-6SCU Local Loopback 2-25SCU local loopback 2-25SCU switch plane, receiver 2-18SCU Switch Plane, Transmitter 2-14serial communication port connections 4-15Service channel operation 5-13Service Channel Unit 3-12-1signal flow 2-1Signal Processing Modules 2-5Signal Processing Power Supply Unit 3-6-1SP cabinet 1-5SP PSU 3-6-1SP shelf backplane 3-1-10
jumpers 3-1-10SP verification 5-10specifications 1-7switch plane
receiver RXU-DEMOD 2-17
receiver SCU 2-18receiver SYNDES-MUX 2-18transmitter SCU 2-14transmitter SYNDES-MUX 2-13transmitter TXU-MOD 2-14
switch planes 2-13switches
ACU 3-7-4switches, OWU C-8SYNDES
front panel functions 3-11-4SYNDES loopback 2-24SYNDES module 2-1SYNDES-MUX switch plane, receiver 2-18SYNDES-MUX switch plane, transmitter 2-13System Block Diagram 1-3system configuration 5-9system gain 1-2, 2-27system temperature 1-6
TT/I curves A-1T/I ratio 1-7, A-1T/R frequency separations 1-7terminal block 6-2test equipment 5-20test records 5-22test, Interface Panel 5-11tests, initial turn-up 5-10Transmitter Power 1-7transmitter switch planes 2-13Transmitter Unit 2-4, 3-3-1troubleshooting 6-5TXU 2-1, 2-4, 3-3-1TXU-MOD switch planes, transmitter 2-14
Uunpacking 4-2
Vverification 5-8VF1 connector pin assignments 4-10
I-4 5/12/04 CM7/8 SONET/SDH System User’s Manual
Index
Wwaveguide, connections 4-21Wayside Traffic Unit 3-14-1WTU 3-14-1
switch 3-14-5WTU local loopback 2-25WTU switch plane, transmitter 2-14